AMG GT (2020) - Automotive Mercedes-Benz - Free user manual and instructions

USER MANUAL AMG GT (2020) Mercedes-Benz

The following version of the Owner's Manual describes all models, series and special equipment of your vehicle. Country-specific language variations are possible. Please note that your vehicle might not be equipped with all the described functions. This also affects safety-relevant systems and functions. Please contact your authorised Mercedes-Benz dealership if you would like to receive a printed Owner's Manual for other vehicle models and vehicle model years.

The online Owner's Manual is the current and valid version. It is possible that deviations affecting your specific vehicle could not be taken into account as Mercedes-Benz constantly adapts its vehicles according to the latest technology and makes changes to the form and the equipment.

Please also read the printed Owner's Manual, supplementary documents and the digital Owner's Manual in the vehicle.

Copyright

All rights reserved. All texts, images and graphics are subject to copyright and other laws for the protection of intellectual property. They may not be copied or changed for any commercial use or for the purpose of being passed on nor used on other webistes.

Blue Mercedes-Benz sedan parked on a city highway with modern skyscrapers in the background (no visible text or symbols)

Mercedes-AMG GT 4-door coupe

Owner's Manual

Mercedes-Benz

Front passenger airbag warning

AIRBAG

WARNING Risk of injury or death if the co-driver airbag is enabled

If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on the co-driver seat may be struck by the co-driver airbag during an accident.

NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

Observe the chapter "Children in the vehicle".

Thank you for purchasing a Mercedes-AMG

Before you first drive off, read this Owner's Manual carefully and familiarise yourself with your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer operating lifespan of the vehicle, follow the instructions and warning notices in this Owner's Manual. Disregarding them may lead to damage to the vehicle or injury to people.

The standard equipment and product description of your vehicle may vary and depends on the following factors:

• model
• order
• national version
• availability

The illustrations in this Owner's Manual show left-hand drive vehicle. On right-hand-drive vehicles, the layout of car parts and control elements differs accordingly.

Mercedes-AMG is constantly developing its vehicles further.

Mercedes-AMG therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas:

• design
• equipment
• technical features

The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations.

The following documents are integral parts of the vehicle:

• Digital Owner's Manual
• printed Owner's Manual
- service booklet
• equipment-dependent Supplements

aKeep these documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all of the documents on to the new owner.

Symbols 5

At a glance 6

Cockpit 6

Indicator and warning lamps 10

Overhead control panel 12

Door operating unit and seat adjustment .....

Emergencies and breakdowns 1

Digital Owner's Manual 18

Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual ..... 18

General notes 20

Protection of the environment 20

Take-back of end-of-life vehicles 20

Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts 2

Owner's Manual 2

Operating safety 22

Declaration of conformity 24

Diagnostics connection 28

Qualified specialist workshop 29

Vehicle registration 30

Correct use of the vehicle 30

Information on the REACH regulation .... 30

Notes for persons with electronic medical aids 30

Implied warranty 31

QR code for rescue card 31

Data storage 31

Copyright 35

Occupant safety 36

Restraint system 36

Seat belts 38

Airbags 42

PRE-SAFE® system 50

Safely transporting children in the vehicle 51

Notes on pets in the vehicle 71

Opening and closing 73

Key 73

Doors 76

Load compartment 80

Side windows 86

Sliding sunroof 89

Sun blind and roller sunblind ....

Anti-theft protection 93

Seats and stowing 96

Notes on the correct driver's seat posi-

tion 96

Seats 97

Steering wheel 105

Easy entry and exit feature 106

Memory function 107

Stowage areas 108

Cup holders 1 17

Sockets 117

Wireless charging of the mobile phone

and connection with the exterior aerial ..... 120

Fitting/removing the floor mats 122

Light and sight 124

Exterior lighting 124

Interior lighting 131

Windscreen wipers and windscreen

washer system 132

Mirrors 134

Area permeable to radio waves on the

windscreen 137

Infrared-reflective windscreen function ..... 138

Climate control 139

Overview of climate control systems ..... 139

Operating the climate control system ..... 1

Driving and parking 150

Driving 150

DYNAMIC SELECT switch 162

Automatic transmission 164

Function of the 4MATIC 168

Refuelling 169

Parking 171

Driving and driving safety systems 178

Trailer hitch 240

Bicycle rack function 245

Vehicle towing instructions 247

Instrument display and on-board computer 249

Notes on the instrument display and on-board computer 249

Instrument display overview 250

Overview of the buttons on the steering wheel 2 51

Operating the on-board computer 251

Overview of displays on the multifunction display 2 5

^0 Head-up display 253

MBUX multimedia system 257

Overview and operation 257

System settings 263

Navigation 266

Telephone 272

Mercedes me and apps 275

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ..... 284

Radio, media & TV 291

Sound settings 297

Maintenance and care 299

ASSYST PLUS service interval display ..... 299

Engine compartment 300

Cleaning and care 30

Breakdown assistance 313

Emergency 3 13

Flat tyre 315

Battery (vehicle) 321

Tow-starting or towing away 326

Electrical fuses 331

Wheels and tyres 335

Notes on noise or unusual handling characteristics 3 3

Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tyres 3 3

Notes on snow chains 335

Tyre pressure 336

Wheel change 339

Emergency spare wheel 349

Technical data 350

Notes on technical data 350

On-board electronics 350

Radio operating permits for vehicle components 352

Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number 3 5

Operating fluids 354

Vehicle data 360

Trailer hitch 362

Display messages and warning/indi-

cator lamps 365

Display messages 3 6 5

Warning and indicator lamps 417

Index 434

In this Owner's Manual, you will find the following symbols:

DANGER Danger due to not observing the warning notices

Warning notices draw your attention to hazards that may endanger your health or life, or the health or life of others.

▶ Observe the warning notices.

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to failure to observe environmental notes

Environmental notes include information on environmentally responsible behaviour or environmentally responsible disposal.

▶ Observe environmental notes.

NOTE Damage to property due to failure to observe notes on material damage

Notes on material damage inform you of risks which may lead to your vehicle being damaged.

▶ Observe notes on material damage.

These symbols indicate useful instructions or further information that could be helpful to you.

Instruction

(→ page) Further information on a topic

Display Information on the multifunction display/media display

Highest menu level, which is to be selected in the multimedia system

Relevant submenus, which are to be selected in the multimedia system

* I indicates a cause

Diagram of a car interior with numbered components and a control panel interface showing navigation controls and signal lights.

Left-hand-drive vehicles

① Steering wheel gearshift paddles → 167
② Combination switch → 125
Instrument display → 250
4 Media display → 257
5 360° camera → 230
6 Hazard warning light system → 126
⑦ PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps → 47
8 MBUX multimedia system switch panel → 257
9 Start/stop button → 151
10 Climate control systems → 140
Glove compartment → 111
12 Touchpad → 259
13 Controller for volume and switching sound on/off → 257
Switches the MBUX multimedia system → 257 on/off
14 (A) ECO start/stop function → 159

15 ☐ Adjusts the rear wing → 221
16 AMG Performance exhaust system → 162
17 E-SELECT selector lever → 164
18 ESP ^® → 181
19 AMG RIDE CONTROL + → 215
20 Manual gearshifting → 167
21 DYNAMIC SELECT switch → 162
22 Stowage compartment → 111
23 Control panel for the MBUX multimedia system → 251
24 AMG steering-wheel buttons → 218
25 Adjusts the steering wheel electrically → 105
Switches the steering wheel heater → 106 on/off
26 Control panel:
On-board computer → 251
Cruise control or variable limiter → 190

	Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC	→	194
27	Diagnostics connection	→	28
28	Opens the bonnet	→	301

20	(P) Electric parking brake	→	175
30	Light switch	→	124

1 DRIFT 150 180 210 km/h 240 90 270 60 300 330 360 125.3 24967 ESP-SPORT x 1000/min 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 OFF OFF OFF 7

Instrument display

1 DRIFT DRIFT MODE
2 Turn signal lights → 125
Engine operating temperature → 422
4 Restraint system → 419
5 ESP SPORT ESPORT → 428
ESP OFF EOPF → 428
6 ESP® OFF → 428
ESP ^® → 428
7 0‡ Rear fog light → 125
Electric parking brake (red) → 425
(1) Brakes (red) → 425
10 Coolant temperature → 422
11 Coolant temperature display → 250
12 (P) Electric parking brake (yellow) → 425
13 (1) Brakes (yellow) → 425
14 Power steering → 420

15 ABS → 428
16 Tyre pressure monitoring system → 432
Electrical fault → 422
18 Distance warning → 427
19 Reserve fuel with fuel filler flap location → 422 indicator
20 Fuel level → 250
21 ☐ D High beam → 125
Low beam → 124
200≤ Standing lights → 124
22 Rear wing → 222
23 Seat belt → 419
24 Engine diagnostics → 422
25 AMG RIDE CONTROL → 427
26 ! Trailer hitch → 420

Diagram of car interior compartments with numbered labels pointing to specific areas such as the front panel, rear panel, and back panel.

Sun visors
2 Switches the left-hand reading lamp → 131 on/off
3 Switches the automatic interior lighting → 131 control on/off
4 SOS SOS button → 277
5 Switches the front interior lighting → 131 on/off
6 me button → 277

7 Switches the rear interior lighting → 131 on/off
B Switches the right-hand reading lamp → 131 on/off
9 Spectacles compartment
10 Opens/closes the sliding sunroof → 89
11 Inside rearview mirror → 135

Diagram of car interior components with numbered parts, including seatbelt covers and dashboard controls

1 Adjusts the seats electrically → 98
Switches the seat heating on/off → 104
3 Switches the seat ventilation on/off → 105
4 Adjusts the front passenger seat from → 99 the driver's seat
5 Locks/unlocks the vehicle → 77
6 Opens/closes the tailgate → 80
⑦ Operates the outside mirrors → 134
8 Opens/closes the right side window → 86
9 Opens/closes the rear right side win- → 86 dow
10 Child safety lock for the rear side windows → 71
⑪ Opens/closes the rear left side window → 86

12 Opens/closes the left side window → 86
13 Opens the door → 77
14 Operates the memory function → 108
15 Sets the seat fore-and-aft position → 97
16 Adjusts the seat cushion length → 97
17 Adjusts the 4-way lumbar support → 97
18 Configures the seat settings → 101
19 Adjusts the head restraints → 100
20 Adjusts the seat cushion inclination → 97
21 Adjusts the seat height → 97
22 Adjusts the seat backrest inclination → 97

Labeled diagram of a car interior showing numbered components for identification

B-pillar with: QR code for accessing the rescue card → 31
Safety vests → 313
me button → 277
SOS SOS button → 277
4 To check and top up operating fluids → 354
⑤ Tow-starting or towing away → 326
6 Flat tyre → 315
⑦ Starting assistance → 324
8 Hazard warning light system → 126

9 Fire extinguisher → 314
10 Fuel filler flap with:
information label on fuel type → 169
information label on tyre pressure → 337
QR code for accessing the rescue card → 31
⑪ Tow-starting or towing away → 326
12 TREFIT kit → 317
13 Warning triangle → 313
14 First-aid kit (soft sided) → 314

Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual

Multimedia system:

Search Quick start Tan Animations Messages

The Digital Owner's Manual describes the functions and operation of the vehicle and the mult media system.

Select one of the following menu items in the Digital Owner's Manual:
- Search: search for keywords in order to find quick answers to questions about the operation of the vehicle.
- Quick start: here is where you find the first steps towards setting up your vehicle.

• Tips: find information that prepares you for certain everyday situations with your vehicle.
• Animations: watch animations of the vehicle functions.
• Messages: receive additional information about the messages in the Instrument Display.
• Bookmarks: gain access to your personally saved bookmarks.
  • Language: select the language for the Digital Owner's Manual.

Diagram of a room layout with numbered zones and directional arrows indicating spatial relationships

1 Back
② Adds bookmarks

3 Picture
④ Contents section
Directions of movement of contents section
6 Menu

Some sections in the Digital Owner's Manual, e.g. warning notes, can be expanded and collapsed.

Additional methods of calling up the Digital Owner's Manual:

Direct access: open the required content in the Digital Owner's Manual by pressing and holding an entry on the tab bar in the multimedia system:

USB Bluetooth Japan TV Sound Reading USB device...

Instrument Display: call up brief information as display messages in the instrument cluster

LINGUATRONIC: call up via the voice control system

For safety reasons, the Digital Owner's Manual is deactivated while driving.

Protection of the environment

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to operating conditions and personal driving style

The pollutant emission of the vehicle is directly related to the way you operate the vehicle.

Operate your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner to help protect the environment. Please observe the following recommendations on operating conditions and personal driving style.

Operating conditions:

Make sure that the tyre pressure is correct.
Do not carry any unnecessary weight (e.g. roof luggage racks once you no longer need them).
Adhere to the service intervals. A regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental protection.

Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Personal driving style:

Do not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine.
Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary.
▶ Drive carefully and maintain a suitable distance from the vehicle in front.
Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration and braking.
Change gear in good time and use each gear only up to 23 of its maximum engine speed.
Switch off the engine in stationary traffic, e.g. by using the ECO start/stop function.
▶ Drive fuel-efficiently. Observe the ECO display for a fuel-efficient driving style.

Take-back of end-of-life vehicles

EU countries only:

Mercedes-Benz will take back your end-of-life vehicle for environment-friendly disposal in accordance with the European Union (EU) End-of-Life Vehicles Directive.

A network of vehicle take-back points and dismantlers has been established for you to return your vehicle. You can leave it at any of these points free of charge. This makes an important contribution to closing the recycling circle and conserving resources.

For further information about the recycling and disposal of end-of-life vehicles, and the take-back conditions, please visit the national Mercedes-Benz website for your country.

Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage caused by not using recycled reconditioned components

Mercedes-Benz AG offers recycled reconditioned components and parts with the same quality as new parts. The same entitlement from the implied warranty is valid as for new parts.

Recycled reconditioned components and parts from Mercedes-Benz AG.

NOTE Impairment of the operating efficiency of the restraint systems from installing accessory parts or from repairs or welding

Airbags and seat belt tensioners, as well as control units and sensors for the restraint systems, may be installed in the following areas of your vehicle:

- doors

• door pillars
• door sills
• seats
• cockpit
• instrument cluster
• centre console
• lateral roof frame

Do not install accessory parts such as audio systems in these areas.
Do not carry out repairs or welding.
▶ Have accessories retrofitted at a qualified specialist workshop.

You could jeopardise the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tyres and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety which have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Safety-relevant systems, e.g. the brake system, may malfunction. Only use Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts or parts of equal quality. Only use tyres, wheels and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehicle model.

Mercedes-Benz tests original parts and conversion parts and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehicle model for their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is unable to assess other parts. Mercedes-Benz therefore accepts no responsibility for the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehicles, even if they have been officially approved or independently approved by a testing centre.

Certain parts are only officially approved for installation or modification if they comply with legal requirements. All Mercedes-Benz Genuine-Parts meet the approval requirements. The use of non-approved parts may invalidate the vehicle's general operating permit.

This is the case in the following situations:

• the vehicle type is different from that for which the vehicle's general operating permit was granted.
• other road users could be endangered.
  • the exhaust gas or noise level gets worse.

Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) ( page 352) when ordering Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts.

Owner's Manual

This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment available for your vehicle at the time of this Owner's Manual going to press. Country-specific differences are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be fitted with all features described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. Therefore, the equipment on your vehicle may differ from that in the descriptions and illustrations.

The original purchase agreement for your vehicle contains a list of all of the systems in your vehicle.

Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

The Owner's Manual and Service Booklet are important documents and should be kept in the vehicle.

Operating safety

⚠ WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions or system failure

In order to avoid malfunctions or system failures:

Always have the specified service/maintenance work as well as any necessary repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

A WARNING Risk of accident or injury due to improper modifications to electronic components

Modifications to electronic components, their software or wiring can impair their functionality and/or the functionality of other networked components or safety-relevant systems.

This can endanger the vehicle's operating safety.

You must not tamper with wiring, electronic components, or their software.

▶ Always have work on electrical and electronic devices carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

If you modify the on-board electronics, the general operating permit is rendered invalid.

Observe the "On-board electronics" section in "Technical data".

WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable materials on hot parts of the exhaust system

Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system.

When driving on unpaved roads or off-road, regularly check the vehicle underside.

Remove trapped plants or other flammable material, in particular.

If there is damage, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to driving too fast and due to impacts to the vehicle underbody or suspension components

In the following situations, in particular, there is a risk of damage to the vehicle:

• the vehicle becomes grounded, e.g. on a high kerb or an unpaved road
• the vehicle is driven too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a kerb, speed bump or pot-hole
• a heavy object strikes the underbody or suspension components

In situations such as these, damage to the body, underbody, suspension components, wheels or tyres may not be visible. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, may no longer absorb the resulting force as intended.

If the underbody panelling is damaged, flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can collect between the underbody the underbody panelling. These materials may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system.

Have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
or
If driving safety is impaired while continuing your journey, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, while paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system (EQ Boost technology)

and

⚠️ DANGER Risk of fatal injury by touching damaged high-voltage components

Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system contain individual high-voltage components. These high-voltage components are under high voltage.

If you modify component parts of these high-voltage components or touch damaged component parts, you may be electrocuted.

High voltage components may be damaged in an accident, although the damage may not be visible.

▶ Never perform modifications to component parts of high-voltage components.
▶ Never touch damaged component parts of high-voltage components.
▶ Never touch component parts of high-voltage components after an accident.

Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system according to the currently valid version of Regu-contain high voltage components. These compo-lation UN R10. nents are marked with a high voltage label:

Warning sign with hazard symbol, warning sign, open book, and hand gesture

All work on high voltage components must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Declaration of conformity

Electromagnetic compatibility

The electromagnetic compatibility of the vehicle components has been checked and certified

Wireless vehicle components

For EU and EFTA countries only:

The following information applies to all wireless components of the vehicle and of the information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle:

The wireless components of this vehicle comply with the basic requirements and all other relevant conditions of Directive 2014/53/EU. You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

Brazil only:

Note on the two-way radio systems in the vehicle:

These systems are not protected from harmful interference and must not cause interference in duly approved systems.

Nigeria only:

Connection and use of the wireless communication equipment in this vehicle are permitted by the Nigerian Communications Commission.

Ukraine only:

The manufacturer hereby declares that the wireless vehicle components meet the technical regulations for two-way radios. You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Wireless applications in the vehicle

Besides the typical frequencies for mobile communications, cars from Mercedes-Benz make use of the following automotive radio applications:

Wireless applications in the vehicle

Technology	Frequency range	Transmission output/magnetic field strength
Convenience central locking system	20 kHz (9–90 kHz)	≤ 72 dBμA/m at 10 m
Wireless power transmission	105 kHz (90–119 kHz)	≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10 m
Convenience central locking system	125 kHz (119–135 kHz)	≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10 m
Wireless power transmission
Near-field communication	13.553–13.567 MHz	≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10 m
Convenience central locking system, garage door opener, tyre pressure monitoring system	433 MHz (433.05–434.79 MHz)	≤ 10 mW ERP
Heater booster function remote control, garage door opener	868 MHz (868.0–868.6 MHz)	≤ 25 mW ERP
Heater booster function remote control, garage door opener	869 MHz (868.7–869.2 MHz)	≤ 25 mW ERP
Bluetooth®, Kleer, RLAN, general remote controls, wireless headphones	2.4 GHz ISM band (2400–2483.5 MHz)	≤ 100 mW EIRP
Interior monitoring radar, RLAN	5.8 GHz UNII-3 (5725–5875 MHz)	≤ 25 mW EIRP
Convenience central locking system	7.25 GHz UWB (6.0–8.5 GHz)	≤ -41.3 dBm/MHz EIRP mean ≤ 0 dBm/MHz EIRP peak
24 GHz ISM radar	24.05–24.25 GHz*	≤ 100 mW EIRP
24 GHz UWB radar	24.25–26.65 GHz*	≤ -41.3 dBm/MHz EIRP mean ≤ 0 dBm/50 MHz EIRP peak
76 GHz radar	76–77 GHz	≤ 55 dBm peak EIRP
	* Model series launched on the market before April 2016
Carsharing module	NFC:13.553–13.567 MHzBluetooth:2402–2480 MHz	NFC:≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10 mBluetooth:≤ + 4 dBm (power category 2)

Information about the specific absorption rate

Only for France:

The values were determined and tested in accordance with the guideline Décret n° 2019-1186 regarding the indication of

the specific absorption rate (SAR) of wireless vehicle components.

Vehicle component (designation in accordance with EU DoC)	SAR value in W/kg
Radio data transmission telephone system	< 0.4 W/kg
Hermes 2.1	< 0.4 W/kg
Compensator ECE DE003 & ECE DE 004 < 0.4 W/kg
Tablet PC SM-T230NZ < 0.82 W/kg
DAI RSE < 1.8 W/kg

Jack

Copy and translation of the original declaration of conformity:

EC declaration of conformity

1.

The signatory, as a representative

Manufacturer:

BRANO a.s.

74741 Hradec nad Moravicí, Opavská 1000,

Czech Republic

ID No.: 64-387-5933

VAT Reg. No.: CZ64-387-5933

declares, as our sole responsibility, that the product:

1. a)

Designation:

Jack

Type, number:

A) A 164 580 02 18, A 166 580 01 18

B) A 240 580 00 18

C) A 639 580 02 18

Year of manufacture: 2015

Fulfils all relevant conditions

Directive No. 2006/42/EC

b)

Description and purpose of use:

The jack is only intended for raising the specified vehicle in accordance with the operating instructions affixed to the jack.

3.

Reference data of the harmonised standards or specifications

A) ISO 4063, EN ISO 14341-A, DBL 7382.20, MBN 10435, AS 2693

B) ISO 4063, ISO 14341-A, DBL 7392.10, MBN 10435

C) DBL 7392.10, DBL 8230.10

The technical documentation of the product is stored at the manufacturer's plant. Representative for the compilation of the technical documentation: Director of the Technical Department Brano a.s.

4.

Hradec nad Moravicí

City

5.

05.05.2015

Date

Signed by

Director of Quality

TREFIT kit

Copy and translation of the original declaration of conformity:

EC declaration of conformity

In accordance with EC Directive 2006/42/EC We hereby declare that the product

Product designation: Daimler electric air pump Model designation: 0851ve, DT/UW 200046 - IBK-LK2

MB part no.: A 000 583 8200

complies with the following relevant regulations: 2014/30/EU

Applied harmonised standards, in particular:

DIN EN 55014-1: 2012

Manufacturer: Dunlop Tech GmbH

Address: Offenbacher Landstrasse 8, 63456 Hanau

Authorised representative: IMS dept.

Date: December 2019

Signature: IMS-AE, IMS-AE-L

Diagnostics connection

The diagnostics connection is a technical interface in the vehicle. It is used, for example, within the scope of repair and maintenance work or for reading out vehicle data by a specialist workshop. Diagnostic devices should therefore only be connected by a qualified specialist workshop.

WARNING Risk of accident due to connecting devices to the diagnostics connection

If you connect devices to the diagnostics connection of the vehicle, the function of vehicle systems and operating safety may be impaired.

For safety reasons, we recommend that you only use and connect products approved by your Mercedes-Benz service centre.

WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell

Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle.

Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell.
▶ Always fit the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals.
Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another.

! NOTE Battery discharging from using devices connected to the diagnostics connection

Using devices at the diagnostics connection drains the battery.

▶ Check the charge level of the battery.

If the charge level is low, charge the battery, e.g. by driving a considerable distance.

Diagram showing a car interior with a close-up of a black plastic component being inserted, no text or symbols present.

Connecting and using another device with the diagnostics connection can have the following effects:

• malfunctions in the vehicle system
  • permanent damage to vehicle components

Please refer to the warranty terms and conditions for this matter.

Moreover, connecting equipment to the diagnostics connection can lead to emissions monitoring information being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions inspection during the main inspection.

Qualified specialist workshop

A qualified specialist workshop has the necessary special skills, tools and qualifications to correctly carry out any necessary work on your vehicle. This particularly applies to safety-relevant works.

Always have the following work carried out on your vehicle at a qualified specialist workshop:

• safety-relevant works
• service and maintenance work
- repair work
- modifications as well as installations and conversions

• work on electronic components
- vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system (EQ boost technology): work on high voltage components of the 48 V on-board electrical system

Mercedes-AMG recommends a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

Vehicle registration

Mercedes-Benz may ask its service centres to carry out technical inspections on certain vehicles. The quality or safety of the vehicle is improved as a result of the inspection.

Mercedes-Benz can only inform you about vehicle checks if Mercedes-Benz has your registration data.

It is possible that your vehicle has not yet been registered in your name in the following cases:

• if your vehicle was not purchased at an authorised specialist dealer.
• if your vehicle has not yet been examined at a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

It is advisable to register your vehicle with a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible about any change in address or vehicle ownership. You can do this at a Mercedes-Benz service centre, for example.

Correct use of the vehicle

If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognise certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position.

Observe the following information in particular when driving your vehicle:

• the safety notes in this manual
• technical data for the vehicle
- traffic rules and regulations
- laws and safety standards pertaining to motor vehicles

Information on the REACH regulation

EU and EFTA countries only:

The REACH regulation (Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006, Article 33) stipulates a duty to supply information about substances of very high concern (SVHCs).

Mercedes-Benz AG acts to the best of its knowledge to prevent these SVHCs from being used and to enable customers to safely handle these substances. There are SVHCs known to Mercedes-Benz AG, according to supplier information and internal product information, found in individual components of this vehicle in quantities of over 0.1 percent by weight.

Further information can be obtained at the following addresses:

• https://reach.daimler.com/de/home/
• https://reach.daimler.com/en/home/

Notes for persons with electronic medical aids

Mercedes-Benz AG cannot, despite carefully developing vehicle systems, completely rule out the interaction of vehicle systems with electronic medical aids such as cardiac pacemakers.

In addition, there are components installed in the vehicle that, regardless of the operating status of the vehicle, can generate magnetic fields on a par with permanent magnets. These fi can be found, for example, in the area around the multimedia and sound system or also in area of the seats, depending on the vehicle equipment.

For this reason, the following can occur in isolated cases, depending on the aids used:

• Medical aids malfunctioning
- Adverse health effects

Observe the notes and warnings of the manufacturer of the medical aids; if in doubt, contact device manufacturer and/or your doctor. If there is continuing uncertainty concerning the possibility of medical aids malfunctioning, Mercedes-Benz AG recommends using only few electrical vehicle systems and/or maintaining a distance from the components.

Only have repairs and maintenance work in the area of the following components carried out by a qualified specialist workshop:

• vehicle components carrying live voltage

• transmission aerials
  • multimedia system and sound system

fieldsIf you have any queries or suggestions, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Implied warranty

! NOTE Damage to the vehicle arising from violation of these operating instructions.

Damage to the vehicle can arise from violation of these operating instructions.

the This damage is not covered either by the Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the New- or Used-Vehicle Warranty.

▶ Follow the instructions in these operating instructions on proper operation of your vehicle as well as on possible vehicle damage.

QR code for rescue card

QR codes are attached in the fuel filler flap and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue card contains the most important information about your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the routing of the electric lines.

Further information can be obtained at https://www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code.

Data storage

Data processing in the vehicle

Electronic control units

Electronic control units are fitted in your vehicle. Control units process data which, for example, they receive from vehicle sensors, generate themselves or exchange between themselves. Some control units are required for the safe operation of your vehicle, some assist you when driving, such as driver assistance systems, while others enable comfort or infotainment functions.

The following provides you with general information regarding data processing in the vehicle. Additional information regarding exactly which data in your vehicle are collected, saved and transmitted to third parties and for what purpose, can be found in the information directly related to the functional characteristics in question in their respective operating instructions. This information is also available on line and, depending on the vehicle equipment, digitally.

Personal data

Every vehicle is identified by a unique vehicle identification number. Depending on the country, this vehicle identification number can be used by, for example, governmental authorities to determine the identity of the owner. There are other possibilities to use data collected from the vehicle to identify the owner or driver, such as the licence plate number.

Therefore, data generated or processed by control units may be attributable to a person or, under certain conditions, become attributable to a person. Depending on which vehicle data are available, it may be possible to make inferences about, for example, your driving behaviour, your location, your route or your use patterns.

Legal requirements regarding the disclosure of data

If legally required to do so, manufacturers are, in individual cases, legally obliged to provide governmental entities, upon request and to the extent required, data stored by the manufacturer. For example, this may be the case during the investigation of a criminal offence.

Governmental entities are themselves, in individual cases and within the applicable legal framework, authorised to read out data from the vehicle. In the case of an accident, information that can help with an investigation can, therefore, be taken from the airbag control unit, for example.

Operational data in the vehicle

This is data regarding the operation of the vehicle, which have been processed by control units. This includes the following data, for example:

- vehicle status information such as the speed, longitudinal acceleration, lateral acceleration, number of wheel revolutions or the fastened seat belts display

- ambient conditions, such as temperature, rain sensor or distance sensor

Generally, the use of these data is temporary; they will not be stored beyond the period of operation and will only be processed within the vehicle itself. Control units often contain data memories for vehicle keys, for example. Their use permits the temporary or permanent documentation of technical information about the vehicle's operating state, component loads, maintenance requirements and technical events or faults.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the following data are stored:

• operating status of system components, such as fill levels, tyre pressure or battery status
• malfunctions or faults in important system components, such as lights or brakes
• system reactions in special driving situations, such as airbag deployment or the intervention of stability control systems
  • information on events leading to vehicle damage

In certain cases, it may be required to store data that would have otherwise been used only temporarily. This may be the case if the vehicle has detected a malfunction, for example.

If you use services, such as repair services and maintenance work, stored operational data as well as the vehicle identification number can be read out and used. They can be read out by service network employees, such as workshops and manufacturers or third parties, such as breakdown services. The same is true in the case of warranty claims and quality assurance measures.

In general, the read out is performed via the legally prescribed port for the diagnostics connection in the vehicle. The operational data that are read out document technical states of the vehicle or of individual components and assist the diagnosis of malfunctions, compliance with warranty obligations and quality improvement. To that end, these data, in particular information about component loads, technical events, malfunctions and other faults may be transmitted along with the vehicle identification number to the manufacturer. Furthermore, the manufacturer is subject to product liability. For this reason the manufacturer also uses operational from the vehicle, for example, for recalls. These data can also be used to examine the customer's warranty and guarantee claims.

Fault memories in the vehicle can be reset by a service outlet or at your request as part of repair or maintenance work.

Convenience and infotainment functions

You can store convenience settings and individual settings in the vehicle and change or reset them at any time.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, this includes the following settings, for example:

• seat and steering wheel positions
• suspension and climate control settings
  in• individual settings, such as interior lighting

Depending on the selected equipment, you can import data into vehicle infotainment functions yourself.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, this data includes the following data, for example:

• multimedia data, such as music, films or photos for playback in an integrated multimedia system
• address book data for use in connection with an integrated hands-free system or an integrated navigation system
• entered navigation destinations
  • data about the use of Internet services

These data for convenience and infotainment functions may be saved locally in the vehicle or they may be located on a device which you have connected to the vehicle, such as a smartphone, USB flash drive or MP3 player. If you have entered these data yourself, you can delete them at any time.

This data is transmitted from the vehicle to third parties only at your request. This applies, in particular, when you use online services in accordance with the settings that you have selected.

Smartphone integration (e.g. Android Auto or Apple CarPlay)

If your vehicle is accordingly equipped, you can connect your smartphone or another mobile en device to the vehicle. You can then control them by means of the control elements integrated in the vehicle. Images and audio from the smartphone can be output via the multimedia system Certain information is simultaneously transferred to your smartphone. Depending on the type and integration, this includes position data, the day/night mode and other general vehicle statuses. For more information please consult the Owner's Manual of the vehicle/infotainment system.

This integration allows the use of selected smartphone apps, such as navigation or music player apps. There is no further interaction between the smartphone and the vehicle; in particular, vehicle data is not directly accessible. The type of additional data processing is determined by the provider of the app being used. Which settings you can make, if any, depends on the specific app and the operating system of your smartphone.

Online services

Wireless network connection

If your vehicle has a wireless network connection, it enables data to be exchanged between your vehicle and additional systems. The wireless network connection is made possible by the vehicle's own transmitter and receiver or by a mobile end device that you have brought into the vehicle, for example, a smartphone. Online functions can be used via the wireless network connection. This includes online services and applications/apps provided to you by the manufacturer or by other providers.

Manufacturer's services

Regarding the manufacturer's online services, the individual functions are described by the manufacturer in a suitable place, for example, in the Owner's Manual or on the manufacturer's website, where the relevant data protection information is also given. Personal data may be used for the provision of online services. Data are exchanged via a secure connection, such as the manufacturer's designated IT systems. Any personal data which are collected, processed

and used, other than for the provision of services, is done so exclusively on the basis of legal permission. This is the case, for example, for a legally prescribed emergency call system, a contractual agreement or when consent has been given.

You can have services and functions, some of which are subject to a fee, activated or deactivated. This excludes legally prescribed functions and services, such as an emergency call system.

Third party services

If you use online services from other providers (third parties), these services are the responsibility of the provider in question and subject to that provider's data protection conditions and terms of use. As a general rule, the manufacturer has no influence on the content exchanged.

For this reason, when services are provided by third parties, please ask the service provider in question for information about the type, extent and purpose of the collection and use of personal data.

Data protection rights

Depending on your country or the equipment and range of functions of your vehicle as well as the services you use and the services on offer, you are entitled to different data protection rights. Further information on data protection and your data protection rights can either be found on the manufacturer's website or you will receive this information as part of the various services and service offers. There you will also find the contact information for the manufacturer and its data protection officers.

At a workshop, for example, with the support of a specialist and possibly for a fee, you can have data read out which is stored only locally in the vehicle.

Copyright

Information on licences for free and open-source software used in your vehicle can be found on the data carrier in your vehicle document wallet and with updates on the following website:

https://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

Restraint system

Protection provided by the restraint system

The restraint system includes the following components:

• Seat belt system
• Airbags
• Child restraint system
  • Child seat securing systems

The restraint system can help prevent the vehicle occupants from coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior in the event of an accident. In the event of an accident, the restraint system can also reduce the forces to which the vehicle occupants are subjected.

A seat belt can only provide the best level of protection if it is worn correctly. Depending on the detected accident situation, seat belt tensioners and/or airbags supplement the protection offered by a correctly worn seat belt. Seat belt tensioners and/or airbags are not deployed in every accident.

In order for the restraint system to provide the intended level of protection, each vehicle occupant must observe the following information:

• Fasten seat belts correctly.
• Sit in an almost upright seat position with their back against the seat backrest.
• Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if possible.
• Always secure persons under 1.50 m tall in an additional restraint system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.

However, no system available today can completely eliminate injuries and fatalities in every accident situation. In particular, the seat belt and airbag generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. It is also not possible to completely rule out the risk of injury caused by the airbag deploying.

Reduced restraint system protection

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to modifications to the restraint system

Vehicle occupants may no longer be protected as intended if alterations are made to the restraint system.

▶ Never alter the parts of the restraint system.
▶ Never tamper with the wiring or any electronic component parts or their software.

If it is necessary to modify the vehicle to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use driving aids which have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

Restraint system functionality

When the ignition is switched on, a self-test is performed, during which the restraint sys-

tem warning lamp lights up. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the vehicle is started. The components of the restraint system are then functional.

Malfunctioning restraint system

A malfunction has occurred in the restraint system if:

• the restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the ignition is switched
• the ☐ restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during journey

WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system

Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident.

Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Function of the restraint system in an accident

How the restraint system works depends on the severity of the impact detected and the apparent type of accident:

• Frontal impact
• Rear impact
• Side impact

- Rollover

The activation thresholds for the components of the restraint system are determined based on the evaluation of the sensor values measured at various points in the vehicle. This process is preemptive in nature. The triggering/deployment of the components of the restraint system must take place in good time at the start of the collision.

Factors which can only be seen and measured after a collision has occurred cannot play a decisive role in airbag deployment. Nor do they provide an indication of airbag deployment.

The vehicle may be deformed significantly without an airbag being deployed. This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the rate of vehicle deceleration is not high. Conversely, an airbag may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. If very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal members are hit, this may result in sufficiently high levels of vehicle deceleration.

Depending on the detected deployment situation, the components of the restraint system can be activated or deployed independently of each other:

• Seat belt tensioner: frontal impact, rear impact, side impact, rollover
• Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: frontal impact
• Knee airbag: frontal impact
• Side airbag: side impact
• Window airbag: side impact, rollover, frontal impact
• PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side: side impact

The front passenger airbag can only be deploy in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF

indicator lamp is off. If the front passenger seat is occupied, make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct ( page 47).

⚠ WARNING Risk of burns from hot airbag components

The airbag parts are hot after an airbag has been deployed.

Do not touch the airbag parts.
Have a deployed airbag replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident. Take this into account, particularly if a seat belt tensioner is triggered or an airbag deployed.

If the seat belt tensioners are triggered or an airbag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released:

- The bang will not generally affect your hearing.

In general, the powder released is not hazardous to health but may cause short-term breathing difficulties to persons suffering from asthma or other pulmonary conditions.

Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehicle immediately or open the window in order prevent breathing difficulties.

Seat belts

Protection provided by the seat belt

Always fasten your seat belt correctly before starting a journey. A seat belt can only provide the best level of protection if it is worn correctly.

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrectly fastened seat belt

If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot perform its intended protective function. In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries, for example, in the event of an accident or when braking or changing direction suddenly.

Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly.

Always observe the instructions about the correct driver's seat position and adjusting the seat ( page 96).

In order for the correctly worn seat belt to provide the intended level of protection, each vehicle occupant must observe the following information:

• The seat belt must not be twisted and must fit tightly and snugly across the body.
• The seat belt must be routed across the centre of the shoulder and as low down across the hips as possible.
• The shoulder section of the seat belt should not touch your neck nor be routed under your arm or behind your back.
• Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat.
• Push the lap belt down as far as possible across your hips and pull tight with the shoul-

der section of the belt. Never route the lap belt across your abdomen.

Pregnant women must also take particular care with this.

• Never route the seat belt across sharp, pointed, abrasive or fragile objects.
• Only one person should use each seat belt any one time. Never allow babies and children to travel sitting on the lap of another vehicle occupant.
• Never secure objects with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. Always observe the instructions for loading the vehicle when securing objects, luggage or loads (→ page 108).

Also ensure that no objects, e.g. a cushion, are ever placed between a person and the seat.

If children are travelling in the vehicle, be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Children in the vehicle" (→ page 52).

Limitations of the protection provided by the seat belt

⚠ WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position

The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position.

You could slip beneath the seat belt and injure yourself.

Adjust the seat properly before commencing your journey.
▶ Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder belt is routed across the centre of your shoulder.

WARNING Risk of injury or death when additional restraint systems are not used for persons with a smaller stature

Persons under 1.50 m tall cannot wear the seat belt correctly without a suitable additional restraint system.

▶ Always secure persons under 1.50 m tall in a suitable restraint system.
WARNING Risk of injury or death due to damaged or modified seat belts

Seat belts cannot provide protection in the following situations:

• the seat belt is damaged, has been modified, is extremely dirty, bleached or dyed
• the seat belt buckle is damaged or extremely dirty
• modifications have been made to the seat belt tensioner, seat belt anchorage or seat belt retractor

Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters.

Modified or damaged seat belts could tear or fail in the event of an accident, for example.

Modified seat belt tensioners could accidentally trigger or fail to function as intended.

▶ Never modify the seat belt system, for example the seat belt, seat belt buckle,

seat belt tensioner, seat belt anchorage and seat belt retractor.
Make sure that the seat belts are undamaged, not worn and clean.
▶ Always have the seat belts checked immediately after an accident at a qualified specialist workshop.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use seat belts which have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

The AMG sport seat and the AMG Performance seat are designed for the standard three-point seat belt. If you fit a different multipoint seat belt, for example a four-point seat belt, the restraint system cannot provide the intended level of protection.

Depending on the type of vehicle, there may be openings in the seat backrest. These openings have no function.

WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to modified seat belt systems
If you feed seat belts through the opening in the seat backrest, the seat backrest may be damaged or may even break in the event of an accident.
Only use the standard three-point seat belt.
▶ Never modify the seat belt system.

A WARNING Risk of injury or death from deployed pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners

Pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners that have been deployed are no longer operational and are unable to perform their intended protective function.

Therefore, have deployed pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners immediately replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident.

NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt

If an unused seat belt is not fully retracted, it may become trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism.

Always ensure that an unused seat belt is fully retracted.

Fastening and adjusting seat belts

If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply, the seat belt retractor locks. The seat belt strap cannot be pulled out any further.

Diagram showing car seatbelt usage with numbered instructions for setting seatbelt positions

Always engage seat belt tongue ② of the seat belt into seat belt buckle ① of the corresponding seat.
Press and hold the seat belt outlet release and slide seat belt outlet ③ into the desired position.
Let go of the seat belt outlet release and ensure that seat belt outlet ③ locks into position.

Vehicles with automatic front passenger airbag shutoff:

! NOTE Deployment of the seat belt tensioner and side impact airbag when the front passenger seat is unoccupied

If the seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the unoccupied front passenger seat, the seat belt tensioner and the side impact airbag may also deploy in event of an accident along with other systems.

Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time.

Vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag shutoff:

NOTE Deployment of the seat belt tensioner when the front passenger seat is unoccupied

If the seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the unoccupied front passenger seat, the seat belt tensioner may

also deploy in the event of an accident along with other systems.

Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time.

Seat belt adjustment function

Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: after a front seat belt has been fastened, the automatic seat belt adjustment may apply a certain tightening force. Do not hold the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting.

You can activate and deactivate the seat belt adjustment function using the multimedia system ( page 41).

Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment via the multimedia system

Multimedia system:

Settings Vehicle

Activate or deactivate Belt adjustment.

Releasing a seat belt

Press the release button in the seat belt buckle and guide the seat belt back with the seat belt tongue.

Seat belt warning function for the driver and front passenger

The seat belt warning lamp in the instrument display is a reminder that all vehicle occupants must wear their seat belts correctly.

In addition, a warning tone may sound.

As soon as the driver and front passenger fasten their seat belts, the seat belt warning goes out.

Function of the rear seat belt status display

The rear seat belt status display is only available for certain countries.

When the ignition is switched on, the rear seat belt status display informs you for a certain amount of time which rear seat belt is not fastened.

You can immediately dismiss the rear seat belt status display using the back button on the left-hand side of the steering wheel ( page 251). If a vehicle occupant unfastens a seat belt in the rear while the vehicle is motion, the rear seat belt status display appears again.

In addition, a warning tone may sound. In this case, the rear seat belt status display cannot be hidden using the back button on the left-hand side of the steering wheel.

Airbags Overview of airbags

① Knee airbag
2 Driver's airbag
3 Front passenger airbag
4 Window airbag
Side airbag

The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol.

When enabled, an airbag can provide additional protection for the respective vehicle occupant.

Potential protection provided by each airbag:

• Knee airbag: thigh, knee and lower leg
• Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: head and ribcage
• Window airbag: head
• Side airbag: ribcage, also pelvis for front seat occupants

The side airbag of the AMG Performance seat provides possible protection for the ribcage.

⚠ WARNING Risk of injury or death if the co-driver airbag is enabled

If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on the co-driver seat may be struck by the co-driver airbag during an accident.

NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

When fitting a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-specific information ( page 68). Also, always observe

the notes on rearward-facing or forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat.

Information on automatic front passenger airbag shutoff

The front passenger airbag can only be deploy the window airbag on the front passenger side in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may deploy. The airbag is deployed regardless of indicator lamp is off. If the front passenger seat whether the front passenger seat is occupied.

is occupied, make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct ( page 47).

! NOTE Important points to remember if the front passenger seat is unoccupied

In an accident, the components of the restraint system may deploy unnecessarily on the front passenger side if:

• There are heavy objects on the front passenger seat.
• The seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the front passenger seat and the front passenger seat is unoccupied.

Stow objects in a suitable place.
▶ Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time.

Depending on the detected accident situation, the window airbag on the front passenger side may deploy. The airbag is deployed regardless of whether the front passenger seat is occupied.

Protective capacity of the airbags

Depending on the accident situation, an airbag may supplement the protection offered by a correctly fastened seat belt.

⚠ WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position

If you deviate from the correct seat position, the airbag cannot perform its intended protective function.

Each vehicle occupant must make sure of following:

• Fasten seat belts correctly. Pregnant women must take particular care to ensure that the lap belt never lies across the abdomen.
• Adopt the correct seat position and keep as far away as possible from the airbags.
• Observe the following information.
  ▶ Always make sure that there are no objects between the airbag and vehicle occupant.

To avoid the risks resulting from the deployment of an airbag, each vehicle occupant must observe the following information in particular:

- Before starting your journey, adjust your seat correctly; the driver's seat and front passenger seat should be moved as far back as possible.

When doing so, always observe the information on the correct driver's seat position ( page 96).

• Only hold the steering wheel by the steering wheel rim. This allows the airbag to be fully deployed.
• Always lean against the seat backrest when the vehicle is in motion. Do not lean forwards or against the door or side window. You may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbags.
• The occupants must always keep their feet on the floor. Do not put your feet on the cockpit, for example. Your feet may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbag.
• If children are travelling in the vehicle, observe the additional notes ( page 52).
  • Always stow and secure objects correctly.

Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent an airbag from functioning correctly. Each vehicle occupant must always make sure of the following in particular:

- There are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and an air-bag.

• There are no objects between the seat, door and door pillar (B-pillar).
• There are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks.
• There are no accessory parts, such as mobile navigation devices, mobile phones or cup holders, within the deployment area of an airbag, e.g. on the cockpit, on the door, on the side window or on the side trim.
  In addition, no connecting cables, tensioning straps or retaining straps must be routed or attached to the vehicle within the deployment area of an airbag. Always comply with the accessory manufacturer's installation instructions and, in particular, the notes on suitable places for installation.
• There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects in the pockets of your clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place.

Limited protection provided by airbags

WARNING Risk of injury due to modifications to the cover of an airbag

If you modify the cover of an airbag or affix objects such as stickers to it, the airbag may no longer function correctly.

▶ Never modify the cover of an airbag and do not affix objects to it.

The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol ( page 42).

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to the use of unsuitable seat covers

Due to unsuitable seat covers, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants as intended.

In addition, the operation of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff could be restricted.

You should only use seat covers that have been approved for the corresponding seats by Mercedes-Benz.

⚠ WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctioning sensors in the door

The function of the airbags can be impaired due to modifications or incorrect work performed on the doors or door trim, or if the doors are damaged.

▶ Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.

▶ Always have work on the doors or door trim carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

⚠ WARNING Risk of injury due to deployed airbag

A deployed airbag no longer offers any protection.

Have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop in order to have the deployed airbag replaced.

Have deployed airbags replaced immediately.

Status of the front passenger front airbag

Function of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff

The automatic front passenger airbag shutoff is able to detect whether the front passenger seat is occupied by a person or a child restraint system. The front passenger airbag is enabled or disabled accordingly.

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects under the co-driver seat

Objects trapped under the co-driver seat can interfere with the function of the automatic co-driver airbag shutoff or damage the system.

Do not store any objects under the co-driver seat.

When the co-driver seat is occupied, make sure that no objects are trapped under the co-driver seat.

When fitting a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, always make sure of the following:

• Ensure that the child restraint system is positioned correctly ( page 56).
  • Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
• Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint system.
• Fully retract the seat cushion length adjustment.
• The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the front passenger seat.
• The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the front passenger seat.

- The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be put under strain by the head restraints. Adjust the seat backrest inclination and the head restraint setting accordingly.

A WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system

Objects between the sitting surface and the child restraint system could affect the function of the automatic co-driver airbag shut-off.

Do not place any objects between the sitting surface and the child restraint system.
The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the co-driver seat.
The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the co-driver seat.

Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

A person on the front passenger seat must observe the following information:

• Fasten seat belts correctly (→ page 38).
• Sit in an almost upright seat position with their back against the seat backrest.
• Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if possible.

The front passenger airbag may otherwise be disabled by mistake, for example, in the following situations:

• The front passenger transfers their weight by supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest.
• The front passenger sits in such a way that their weight is raised from the sitting surface.

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to a disabled front passenger airbag

The front passenger airbag is disabled when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit.

A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit.

If the front passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that:

• the classification of the person in the front passenger seat is correct and the front passenger airbag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the front passenger seat.
• the front passenger seat has been moved as far back as possible.
  • the person is seated correctly.
  Both before and during the journey, ensure that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.

If the front passenger seat is occupied, the classification of the person or child restraint system on the front passenger seat takes place after the front passenger airbag shutoff self-test. The PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the status of the front passenger airbag.

Always observe the notes on the function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps ( page 47).

Function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps

ON PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF

Vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag shutoff have a special sticker affixed to the side of the cockpit on the front passenger side ( page 67).

Self-test of automatic front passenger airbag shutoff

When the ignition is switched on, a self-test is performed during which the two PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps light up simultaneously.

The status of the front passenger airbag is displayed via the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps after the self-test:

• ON is lit: the front passenger airbag may deploy during an accident.
  The indicator lamp goes out after approximately 60 seconds.
• ON and OFF are not lit: the front passenger airbag may deploy during an accident.
• OFF is lit: the front passenger airbag is disabled. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp shows the status of the front passenger airbag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp and the ☐ restraint system warning lamp light up simultaneously, the front passenger seat may not be used. Also in this case, do not fit a child restraint system to the front passenger seat. Have the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Status display

If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation.

After fitting a rearward-facing child restraint system to the front passenger seat:

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF must be lit continuously.

WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a rearward-facing child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled

If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag.

Always ensure that the front passenger air-bag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

When fitting a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-specific information ( page 68).

Depending on the child restraint system and the stature of the child, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be off. In this case, do

not fit the rearward-facing child restraint system to the front passenger seat.

Instead, fit the rearward-facing child restraint system to a suitable rear seat.

After fitting a forward-facing child restraint system to the front passenger seat: depending on the child restraint system and the stature of the child, PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit continuously or be off. Always observe the following information.

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect positioning of the forward-facing child restraint system

If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat that is positioned too close to the cockpit, in the event of an accident, the child could:

• come into contact with the vehicle interior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, for example
• be struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off.

Always move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and fully retract the seat cushion length adjustment.
While doing so, always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the seat belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and the front passenger seat accordingly.
▶ Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

When fitting a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-specific information ( page 68).

If a person is sitting on the front passenger seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit continuously or be off, depending on the person's stature.

A person on the front passenger seat must always observe the following information:

- If the front passenger seat is occupied by an adult or a person with a stature corresponding to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be off. This indicates that the front passenger airbag is enabled.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously, an adult or person with a build corresponding to that of an adult should not use the front passenger seat. Instead, they should use a rear seat.

- If the front passenger seat is occupied by a person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp either lights up continuously or remains off, depending on the classification.

- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off: move the front passenger seat as far back as possible, or the person of smaller stature should use a rear seat.

- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously: the person of smaller stature should not use the front passenger seat.

A WARNING Risk of injury or death when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit after the self-test, the co-driver airbag is disabled.

If the co-driver seat is occupied, always ensure that:

• The classification of the person in the co-driver seat is correct, and the co-driver airbag is enabled or disabled as is appropriate for the person in the co-driver seat.
• The person is seated properly with a correctly fastened seat belt.

Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects:

- Child restraint system on the front passenger seat ( page 68)

- Suitable positioning of the child restraint system ( page 56)

PRE-SAFE® system

PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection)

PRE-SAFE ^® is able to detect certain critical driving situations and implement pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants.

PRE-SAFE ^® can implement the following measures independently of each other:

• Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat and front passenger seat.
• Closing the side windows.
• Vehicles with sliding sunroof: close the sliding sunroof.
• Vehicles with memory function: move the front passenger seat to a more favourable seat position.
• Vehicles with multicontour seat: increase the air pressure in the seat side bolsters of the seat backrest.

- PRE-SAFE® Sound: provided that the multi-media system is switched on, generates a brief noise signal to stimulate the innate protective mechanism of a person's hearing.

NOTE Damage caused by objects in the footwell or behind the seat

The automatic adjustment of the seat position may result in damage to the seat and/or the object.

▶ Stow objects in a suitable place.

Reversing the PRE-SAFE ^® system measures

If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed.

You will need to perform certain settings yourself.

If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced, move the seat backrest back slightly. The locking mechanism releases.

Function of PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus)

PRE-SAFE® PLUS can detect certain impacts, particularly an imminent rear impact, and take pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants. These measures cannot necessarily prevent an imminent impact.

PRE-SAFE® PLUS can implement the following measures independently of each other:

• Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat and front passenger seat.
• Activating the rear hazard warning lights at a higher flashing frequency.
• Increasing brake pressure when the vehicle is stationary. This brake application is cancelled automatically when the vehicle pulls away.

If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed.

System limits

The system will not initiate any action in the following situations:

• when reversing or
• when the vehicle is towing a trailer and there is a risk of a rear impact

The system will not initiate any braking application in the following situations:

• whilst driving or
- when entering or exiting a parking space while using Active Parking Assist

Function of PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side

If an imminent side impact is detected, PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side can pre-emptively move the front seat vehicle occupant's upper body towards the centre of the vehicle. It does this by rapidly inflating an air cushion in the outer seat side bolster of the seat backrest on the side on which the impact is anticipated. This increases

the distance between the door and the vehicle occupant.

If PRE-SAFE ^® Impulse Side has been deployed or is faulty, the PRE-SAFE impulse side inoperative See Owner's Manual display message appears (→ page 366).

Safely transporting children in the vehicle

Always observe when children are travelling in the vehicle

Also strictly observe the safety notes for the specific situation. In this way you can recognise potential risks and avoid dangers if children are travelling in the vehicle ( page 52).

Be diligent

Bear in mind that negligence when securing a child in the child restraint system may have serious consequences. Always be diligent in securing a child carefully before every journey.

To improve protection for children younger than 12 years old or under 1.50 m in height, Mercedes-Benz recommends you observe the following information:

• Always secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehicle.
• The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child.
• The vehicle seat must be suitable for fitting a child restraint system ( page 56).

Accident statistics show that children secured on the rear seats are generally safer than children secured on the front seats. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you fit a child restraint system to a rear seat.

The generic term child restraint system

The generic term child restraint system is used in this Owner's Manual. A child restraint system is, for example:

• a baby car seat
  • a rearward-facing child seat

• a forward-facing child seat
- a child booster seat with a backrest and belt guide
Mercedes-Benz recommends using a child booster seat with a backrest.

The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child.

Observe laws and legal requirements

Always observe the legal requirements when using a child restraint system in the vehicle.

Make sure that the child restraint system is approved in accordance with the valid test specifications and guidelines. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose.

Only use approved child restraint systems

Only child restraint systems that meet the following UNECE standards are permitted for use in the vehicle:

• UN-R44
  • UN-R129 (i-Size child restraint systems)

Information on child restraint system approval categories and details on the approval label on the child restraint system ( page 57).

Detecting risks, avoiding danger

Securing systems for child restraint systems in the vehicle

Only use the following securing systems for child restraint systems:

• the ISOFIX or i-Size securing rings
• the vehicle's seat belt system
• the Top Tether anchorages

Fitting an ISOFIX or an i-Size child restraint system is preferred.

Simply attaching to the securing rings on the vehicle can reduce the risk of fitting the child restraint system incorrectly.

When securing a child with the integrated seat belt of the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system, always comply with the permissible gross weight for the child and child restraint system ( page 60).

Advantage of a rearward-facing child restraint system

It is preferable to transport a baby or a small child in a suitable rearward-facing child restraint system. In this case, the child sits in the opposite direction to the direction of travel and faces backwards.

Babies and small children have comparatively weak neck muscles in relation to the size and weight of their head. The risk of injury to the cervical spine during an accident can be reduced a rearward-facing child restraint system.

Always secure a child restraint system correctly

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect installation of the child restraint system

The child can then not be protected or restrained as intended.

Be sure to comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions for the

child restraint system and its correct use.

▶ Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system always rests on the sitting surface of the seat.
▶ Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint system.
▶ Use child restraint systems only with the original cover designed for them.
▶ Always replace damaged covers with genuine covers.

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to unsecured child restraint systems in the vehicle

If the child restraint system is incorrectly fitted or not secured, it can come loose.

The child restraint system could be flung around and hit vehicle occupants.

Always install child restraint systems correctly, even when not in use.

Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

- Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions as well as the vehicle-specific information:

• Fitting the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system to the rear seat ( page 60).
• Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat ( page 65).

• Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the front passenger sea ( page 68). Observe the specific instructions for the rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems ( page 68).
  If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation ( page 47).

• Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint system.

• Also secure Top Tether if present.

Do not modify the child restraint system

WARNING Risk of injury due to modifications to the child restraint system

The child restraint system can no longer function properly. This poses an increased risk of injury.

▶ Never modify a child restraint system.
Only affix accessories which have been specially approved for this child restraint system by the child restraint system's manufacturer.

Mercedes-Benz recommends Mercedes-Benz care products for cleaning child restraint systems recommended by Mercedes-Benz.

Only use child restraint systems which are in proper working condition

WARNING Risk of injury or death caused by the use of damaged child restraint systems

Child restraint systems or their retaining systems that have been subjected to stress in an accident may not be able to perform their intended protective function.

It may be the case that the child cannot be properly restrained.

▶ Always immediately replace child restraint systems that have been damaged or involved in an accident.
Have the securing systems for the child restraint systems checked at a qualified specialist workshop before installing a child restraint system again.

Avoid direct sunlight

WARNING Risk of burns when the child seat is exposed to direct sunlight

If the child restraint system is exposed to direct sunlight or heat, parts could heat up. Children could suffer burns from these parts, particularly on the metallic parts of the child restraint system.

Always make sure that the child restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight.
Protect the child restraint system, e.g. with a blanket.
If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to cool before securing a child in it.
▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

Observe when stopping or parking

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could, in particular:

• open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users.
• get out and be struck by oncoming traffic.
• operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by:

• releasing the parking brake.
• changing the transmission position.
• starting the vehicle.

▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
Keep the vehicle key out of reach of children.

WARNING Danger to life due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle

If people, particularly children, are exposed to extreme temperatures over an extended period of time, there is a risk of serious injury or danger to life.

▶ Never leave persons, children in particular, unattended in the vehicle.

Overview of recommended child restraint systems

Further information on the correct child restraint system can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose.

Securing with ISOFIX

Weight group 0+ (up to 13 kg and up to approx. 15 months)

Type1	BABY SAFE plus
Size category	E
Approval	E1 04 301 146
Order number2	B6 6 86 8224
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer.	2 With colour code 9H95.

Weight category I (9 to 18 kg and from approximately 9 months to 4 years)

Type1	DUO plus
Size category B1
Approval E1 04 301	133
Order number2	A 000 970 43 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer.	2 With colour code 9H95.

Securing with the vehicle seat belt

Weight category 0 (up to 10 kg and approximately 6 months) and weight category 0+ (up to 13 kg and approximately 15 months)

Type1	BABY SAFE plus II
Approval	E1 04 301 146
Order number2	A 000 970 38 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer.	2 With colour code 9H95.

Weight category I (9 to 18 kg and from approximately 9 months to 4 years)

Type1	DUO plus
Approval E1 04 301	133
Order number2	A 000 970 43 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer.	2 With colour code 9H95.

Weight category II/III (15 to 36 kg and from approximately 4 to 12 years)

Type1	KIDFIX XP
Approval E1 04 301	304
Order number2	A 000 970 49 02
Type1	AMG KIDFIX XP
Approval E1 04 301	304
Order number2	A 000 970 33 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer.	2 With colour code 9H95.

Overview of suitable seats in the vehicle for fitting a child restraint system

Left/right rear seat

Preferred securing system:

	ISOFIX child seat anchor (→ page 58) or
	i-Size child seat anchor (→ page 59)

Also secure Top Tether if present ( page 63).

Alternative securing system:

Vehicle seat belt ( page 64)

Front passenger seat

Securing system:

Vehicle seat belt ( page 64)

Be sure to observe:

• If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation ( page 47).
• Observe the notes on automatic front passenger airbag shutoff ( page 45)
• Adjust the seat backrest until it is as straight as possible and adjust the seat cushion inclination as far as it will go ( page 98).

Centre rear seat

Securing system:

☑ Vehicle seat belt ( page 64)

Approval categories for child restraint systems

Only use approved child restraint systems

Only child restraint systems that meet the following UNECE standards are permitted for use in the vehicle:

• UN-R44
  • UN-R129 (i-Size child restraint systems)

Identification on the child restraint system

Information about the approval category, weight category and approval number, for example, is on the approval label on the child restraint system.

There may be further information such as the ISOFIX size categories, depending on the approval category of the child restraint system.

Approval categories in accordance with UN-R44

universal 9 - 18 kg E1 03301095 HERSTELLER 0007386

Example of an approval label

- Universal: child restraint systems in the "Universal" category are approved for installation in vehicles. They can be used, in accordance with overviews of the suitability

of seats for securing child restraint systems, on seats labelled U, UF or IUF.

The identification IUF refers to ISOFIX child restraint systems in the "Universal" category. These child restraint systems must also be secured using Top Tether or support points.

• Semi-Universal: child restraint systems in the "Semi-Universal" category may only be used if the vehicle and vehicle seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.
• Vehicle-specific: child restraint systems in the "vehicle-specific" category may only be used if the vehicle and vehicle seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.

Approval categories in accordance with UN-R129

I-Size 67cm-105cm / ≤ 18,5 kg E4 E4-129R-000001 Nr. 263443

Example of an approval label

- i-Size: child restraint systems in the "i-Size" category are approved for installation in vehicles with i-Size mounting brackets. They can be used, in accordance with overviews of the

suitability of seats for securing child restraint systems, on seats labelled i-U.

The identification i-U refers to i-Size child restraint systems in the "Universal" category. These child restraint systems must also be secured using Top Tether or support points.

Observe the suitability of vehicle seats

Depending on the approval category, there are forward-facing and rearward-facing child restraint systems. Their use can be restricted for certain vehicle seats:

• Suitability of the seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems ( page 58)
• Suitability of seats for securing i-Size child restraint systems ( page 59).
• Suitability of seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems ( page 64)

Fitting an ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system on the rear seat

Overview of suitability of the seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems

ISOFIX is a standardised securing system for specially designed restraint systems.

The symbol indicates seats suitable for attaching an ISOFIX child restraint system in accordance with UN R44 ( page 57). Attach only child restraint systems that are approved in accordance with UN R44 as per the following ISOFIX tables.

Carry cot

Size class - Equipment	Left/right rear seat
F - ISO/L1 X
G - ISO/L2 X
X Not suitable for an ISOFIX child restraint system in this weight group and/or size class.

Weight group 0 (up to 10 kg and up to approx. 6 months)

Size class - Equipment	Left/right rear seat
E - ISO/R1 IL
IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems according to the table in "Overview of the recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed on the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.

Weight group 0+ (up to 13 kg and up to approx. 15 months)

Size class - Equipment	Left/right rear seat
E - ISO/R1 IL
D - ISO/R2 IL

Size class - Left/right rear seat Equipment

C - ISO/R3 IL (1)

IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems according to the table in "Overview of the recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed on the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.

(1) When using a child restraint system of size class (ISO/R3), move the front seat into the highest position. Make sure that the seat backrest of the front seat does not rest against the child restraint system.

Weight group 1 (9–18 kg and approx. 9 months to 4 years)

Size class - Equipment	Left/right rear seat
D - ISO/R2 IL
C - ISO/R3 IL (1)
B - ISO/F2 IUF

Size class - Left/right rear seat Equipment

B1 - ISO/F2X IUF
A - ISO/F3 IUF
II. Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems according to the table in "Overview of the recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed on the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.IUF Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight group.(1) When using a child restraint system of size class (ISO/R3), move the front seat into the highest position. Make sure that the seat backrest of the front seat does not rest against the child restraint system.

Overview of suitability of the seats for attaching i-Size child restraint systems

i-Size is a standardised securing system for specially designed restraint systems.

The symbol indicates seats suitable for attaching an i-Size child restraint system

in accordance with UN R129 ( page 57).

Child restraint systems that are permitted in accordance with UN R44 as per the ISOFIX tables ( page 58) or UN R129 per the following i-Size tables may be attached.

i-Size child restraint systems (ISO/R2, ISO/F2X, ISO/B2, ISO/B3)

Front passenger seat	Left/right rear seat
X	i
X Not suitable for an i-Size child restraint system in the "Universal" category.	i-U Suitable for forward-facing and rearward-facing i-Size child restraint systems in the "Universal" category.

Fitting an ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system on the rear seat

⚠ WARNING Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged

The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat back-rest may fold forwards, even while the vehicle is in motion.

• As a result, the vehicle occupant will be pressed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as intended and could cause additional injury.
• Objects or loads in the boot or load compartment cannot be restrained by the seat backrest.
  Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip.

on the multifunction display on the instrument cluster.

If the centre seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock verification indicator will be visible.

WARNING Risk of injury or death if the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system together is exceeded.

Too much load may be placed on the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint systems and the child may not be restrained correctly in the event of an accident, for example.

If the child and the child restraint system together weigh more than 33 kg, only use an ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system with which the child is secured with the vehicle seat belt.
Also secure the child restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if available.

If the left and right seat backrests are not engaged and locked in place, this will be shown

Always comply with the information about the mass of the child restraint system:

• in the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system [used]
• on a label on the child restraint system, if present

Regularly check that the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system is still complied with.

When fitting a child restraint system, observe the following:

√ Always observe the correct use of the seats and consider their suitability for attaching child restraint system.

ISOFIX child seat securing system

(→ page 58)

or

i-Size child seat securing system

(→ page 59)

√ Always comply with the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used.
√ Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards.
When fitting an ISOFIX child restraint system, also observe the following:
When using a baby car seat in weight group 0/0+ and a rearward-facing child restraint system in weight group I on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint system.
√ When using a forward-facing child restraint system of weight group 1: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible. In addition, the back-rest of the child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the vehicle seat.

After the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraints again immediately and adjust them correctly.

☑ If the head restraint of the child seat cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maximum size setting for child restraint systems in weight group 2 or 3.
Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use.
☑ The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be fitted facing the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly.
√ The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate.

When fitting an i-Size child restraint system, also observe the following:
√ When using a rearward-facing child restraint system: adjust the front seat so that it does not touch the child restraint system.
When using a forward-facing child restraint system: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible. In addition, the backrest of the child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the vehicle seat. After the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraints again immediately and adjust them correctly.

Diagram showing car seatbelt components with numbered labels and a magnified inset highlighting a specific part labeled '2'.

Vehicle with ISOFIX mounting brackets

Diagram showing car seatbelt components with numbered labels and zoomed-in detail view

Vehicle with i-Size mounting brackets

Before every journey, make sure that the ISOFIX child restraint system or the i-Size child restraint system is engaged correctly in both ISOFIX or i-Size mounting brackets.

! NOTE Damage to the seat belt for the centre seat during installation of the child restraint system

Make sure that the seat belt is not trapped.

Open the cover using zip fastener ①.
Carefully widen the opening further.
Attach the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system to both mounting brackets ② in the vehicle.

Securing Top Tether

WARNING Risk of injury or death if the rear seat backrests are not locked after Top Tether belts are fitted

The rear seat backrests may fold forwards when you are driving.

As a result, child restraint systems will no longer be able to perform their intended protective function. This may also cause additional injuries.

Always lock rear seat backrests after fitting Top Tether belts.
Observe the lock verification indicator.

If the left and right seat backrests are not engaged and locked in place, this will be shown on the multifunction display on the instrument cluster.

If the centre seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock verification indicator will be visible.

If the child restraint system is equipped with a Top Tether belt:

The risk of injury may be reduced by Top Tether. The Top Tether belt enables an additional connection between the child restraint system attached with ISOFIX or i-Size and the vehicle.

Diagram of a car interior with labeled components, showing front and rear views with numbered annotations.

If necessary, slide head restraint ① upwards (→ page 101).
Fit the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system with Top Tether. In doing so, comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with numbered parts labeled 2, 3, and 4

Guide Top Tether belt ④ under head restraint ① between the two head restraint bars.
Hook Top Tether hook ③ into Top Tether anchorage ② without twisting.
Tension Top Tether belt ④. In doing so, comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.
If necessary, slide head restraint ① downwards (→ page 101). Make sure that you do not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt ④.

Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt

Notes on the suitability of seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems

Rear seats

Weight category 0: up to 10 kg
Left/right rear seat U, L
Centre rear seat	U, L
Weight category 0+: up to 13 kg
Left/right rear seat U, L
Centre rear seat	U, L
Weight category I: 9 to 18 kg
Left/right rear seat U, L
Centre rear seat	U, L
Weight category II: 15 to 25 kg
Left/right rear seat U, L

Centre rear seat	U, L
Weight category III: 22 to 36 kg
Left/right rear seat U, L
Centre rear seat	U, L
1 Child restraint systems with a supporting bracket are not suitable for this seat.
U Suitable for child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight category.
L Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems according to the table in "Recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.

Notes on child restraint systems on the front passenger seat

- If it is absolutely necessary for you to fit a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, be sure to observe the information on

child restraint systems on the front passenger seat ( page 68).

- Observe the specific instructions for the rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems. If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation ( page 47).

Front passenger seat

Weight category 0: up to 10 kg
Front passenger airbag enabled	X
Front passenger airbag disabled2	U, L
Weight category 0+: up to 13 kg
Front passenger airbag enabled	X
Front passenger airbag disabled2	U, L
Weight category l: 9 to 18 kg
Front passenger airbag enabled	UF, L

Front passenger airbag disabled	U, L
Weight category II: 15 to 25 kg
Front passenger airbag enabled	UF, L
Front passenger airbag disabled	U, L
Weight category III: 22 to 36 kg
Front passenger airbag enabled	UF, L
Front passenger airbag disabled	U, L
1 Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that the front edge of the seat cushion is in the highest position and the rear edge of the seat cushion is in the lowest position.
2 The vehicle is equipped with automatic front passenger airbag shutoff. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
X Not suitable for children in this weight category.
U Suitable for child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight category.

L Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems according to the table in "Recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.
UF Suitable for forward-facing child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight category.

Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat

A WARNING Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged
The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat back-rest may fold forwards, even while the vehicle is in motion.
- As a result, the vehicle occupant will be pressed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as intended and could cause additional injury.

- Objects or loads in the boot or load compartment cannot be restrained by the seat backrest.

Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip.

If the left and right seat backrests are not engaged and locked in place, this will be shown on the multifunction display on the instrument cluster.

If the centre seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock verification indicator will be visible.

When fitting a belt-secured child restraint system, observe the following:

√ Always comply with the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used.

For a child restraint system in the "Universal" or "Semi-Universal" category, make sure that the system has been approved for the vehicle seat.

Observe the notes under "Suitability of seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems" ( page 64).

√ When using a weight category 0/0+ baby car seat and a weight category I rearward-facing child restraint system on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint system.

√ When using a weight category I forward-facing child restraint system: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible.

After the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraints again immediately and adjust them correctly.

√ The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the rear seat.

If the head restraint of the child seat cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the

maximum size setting for child restraint systems in weight category II or III.

Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use.

☑ The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be fitted facing the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly.

√ The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate.

√ Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards.

Install the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the rear seat.

Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt

outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the seat belt outlet.

Notes on vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag shutoff

AIRBAG

Sticker visible when the front passenger door is open

Vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag shutoff have a special sticker affixed to the side of the cockpit on the front passenger side.

Make sure you observe the following information:

• Never fit a rearward-facing child restraint system to the front passenger seat
  • Always fit a rearward-facing child restraint system to a suitable rear seat
• Suitability of seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems ( page 64)
• Secure the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat ( page 65).
• Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat (→ page 68)

Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat

WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a rearward-facing child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled

If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident.

The child could be struck by the airbag.

Always ensure that the front passenger air-bag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.

NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

Observe the specific instructions for the rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems ( page 68).

AIRBAG

Warning notice on the front passenger sun visor

Always observe the status of the front passenger airbag on the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp:

- If it is absolutely necessary to fit a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, always observe the information on automatic front passenger airbag shutoff ( page

- When using a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, the front

passenger airbag must always be disabled. This is only the case if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously ( page 47).

- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag is enabled. The front passenger airbag may deploy during an accident.

Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the front passenger seat

When fitting a belt-secured child restraint system on the front passenger seat, always observe the following:

☑ Observe the notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat ( page 68).
√ Observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions.
For a child restraint system in the "Universal" or "Semi-Universal" category, make sure that the system has been approved for the vehicle seat.

Observe the notes under "Suitability of seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems" ( page 64).

√ When using a forward-facing child restraint system in weight category I: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible.
After the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraints again immediately and adjust them correctly.
√ The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the front passenger seat.
If the head restraint of the child seat cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maximum size setting for child restraint systems in weight category II or III.

Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use.

☑ The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be fitted facing the wrong direction.
√ The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate.
☑ Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint system.

Set the front passenger seat as far back as possible and move the seat into the highest position if possible.
Fully retract the seat cushion length adjustment.
Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that the front edge of the seat cushion is in the highest position and the rear edge of the seat cushion is in the lowest position.
Set the seat backrest to the most vertical position possible.

Install the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the front passenger seat.
Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the seat belt outlet.
If necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and the front passenger seat accordingly.

Child safety locks

Activating or deactivating the child safety lock for the rear doors

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could, in particular:

• open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users.
• get out and be struck by oncoming traffic.
• operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by:

• releasing the parking brake.
• changing the transmission position.
• starting the vehicle.

▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
Keep the vehicle key out of reach of children.

WARNING Danger to life due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle

If people, particularly children, are exposed to extreme temperatures over an extended period of time, there is a risk of serious injury or danger to life.

▶ Never leave persons, children in particular, unattended in the vehicle.

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If children are travelling in the vehicle, they could, in particular:

• open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users.
• get out and be struck by oncoming traffic.
• operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example.

▶ Always activate the installed child safety locks if children are travelling in the vehicle.

▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.

Vehicles for the United Kingdom: observe the important safety notes in the "Notes on the additional door lock" section.

There are child safety locks for the rear doors and the rear side windows.

The child safety lock on the rear doors secures each door separately. The doors can no longer be opened from the inside.

Technical diagram showing a car wheel assembly with numbered annotations and directional arrows indicating motion or movement.

Press the lever in direction ① (activate) or ② (deactivate).

Make sure that the child safety locks are working properly.

Activating or deactivating the child safety lock for the rear side windows

Diagram showing a car interior with numbered labels and a device icon, likely illustrating a vehicle or navigation system.

To activate/deactivate: press button 2.

The rear side window can be opened or closed in the following cases:

- indicator lamp ① is lit: via the switch on the driver's door

- indicator lamp ⓘ is off: via the switch the corresponding rear door or driver's door

Notes on pets in the vehicle

A WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to animals left unsecured or unattended in the vehicle

If you leave animals in the vehicle unattended or unsecured, they could press buttons or switches, for instance.

An animal may:

• activate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example
• switch systems on or off and endanger other road users

Unsecured animals may be thrown about the vehicle in the event of an accident, or sudden steering and braking manoeuvres, and injure vehicle occupants.

▶ Never leave animals unattended in the vehicle.
Always correctly secure animals while driving, e.g. using a suitable animal carrier.

Key

Overview of key functions

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could, in particular:

• open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users.
• get out and be struck by oncoming traffic.
• operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by:

• releasing the parking brake.
  • changing the transmission position.
• starting the vehicle.

▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
Keep the vehicle key out of reach of children.

! NOTE Damage to the key caused by magnetic fields

Keep the key away from strong magnetic fields.

Diagram of a car key with labeled parts including the BMW logo and numbered callouts 1, 2, 3, and 4.

1 Locks

② Indicator lamp

3 Unlocks

④ Opens/closes the tailgate

If indicator lamp does not light up after pressing the ☑ or ☐ button, the battery is weak or possibly discharged. Replace the battery as soon as possible.

Replace the key battery ( page 75).

The key locks and unlocks the following components:

• the doors
• the fuel filler flap
• the tailgate

If the vehicle is not opened within approximately 40 seconds after unlocking, it locks again. Anti-theft protection is primed again.

Do not keep the key together with electronic devices or metal objects. This can affect the key's functionality.

Do not keep the key in the temperature-controlled cup holder. Otherwise, the key will not be reliably detected.

Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking verification signal

Multimedia system:

Settings Vehicle

▶ Activate or deactivate Acoustic lock.

i Please note:

The selected setting for the acoustic locking verification signal must comply with the relevant national road and traffic regulations. In some countries, including Germany, using the acoustic locking verification signal is forbidden by traffic laws (in accordance with §16 Para. 1 and §30 Para. 1 of the German national road traffic regulations). The driver of the vehicle must comply with these regulations. In countries where the use of this function is forbidden, this function is not activated in the vehicle and must not be activated.

Changing the unlocking settings

Possible unlocking functions of the key:

- Central unlocking

• Unlocking the driver's door and fuel filler flap
  To switch between settings: press the ☑ and ☑ buttons simultaneously approximately six seconds until the indicator lamp flashes twice.

Options if the unlocking function for the driver's door and fuel filler flap has been selected:

• To unlock the vehicle centrally: press the button twice.
• Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you touch the inner surface of the door handle on the driver's door, only the driver's door and filler flap are unlocked.

Deactivating the key functions

If you do not use the vehicle or a key for an extended period of time, you can reduce the energy consumption of the respective key. To do so, deactivate the key functions.

To deactivate: press the [icon] button on the key twice in quick succession. The key indicator lamp flashes twice briefly and lights up once.
To activate: press any button on the key. When the vehicle is started with the key in the stowage compartment of the centre console, the key functions are automatically activated ( page 151).

Removing/inserting the emergency key

fuelRemoving the emergency key

Diagram illustrating two-step mechanical or electrical process with labeled components and directional arrows

Press release knob ①. Emergency key ② is pushed out slightly.
Pull out emergency key ② until it engages in the intermediate position.
Press release knob ① again and fully remove emergency key ②.

Inserting the emergency key

• Press release knob ①.
• Insert emergency key ② to the intermediate position or fully until it engages.

① You can use the intermediate position of emergency key ② to attach the key to a key ring.

Replacing the key battery

DANGER Serious damage to health caused by swallowing batteries

Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. Swallowing batteries may cause serious damage to health.

There is a risk of fatal injury.

Keep batteries out of the reach of children.
If batteries are swallowed, seek medical attention immediately.

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of batteries

Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish.

Dispose of batteries of in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries.

Requirements:

• You require a CR 2032 3 V cell battery.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the battery replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

Remove the emergency key ( page 74).

Diagram showing three-step car door seat movement with arrows indicating direction of motion

Press release knob ② down fully and slide cover ① in the direction of the arrow.
Fold out cover ① in the direction of the arrow and remove.
Remove battery compartment ③ and take out the discharged battery.

Insert the new battery into battery compartment- There is interference from a powerful radio ment ③. Observe the positive pole marking signal source
in the battery compartment and on the bat- The key function is impaired by, for example: tery when doing this.
Push in battery compartment ③.
Re-attach cover ① and push it until it engages.
• high voltage power lines
- mobile phones
• electronic devices (notebooks, tablets)

Problems with the key

You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle

Possible causes:

• The key battery is weak or discharged.
• The key is faulty.
▶ Check the battery using the indicator lamp ( page 73).
Replace the key battery, if necessary ( page 75).
Use the emergency key to lock or unlock ( page 80).
Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

• shielding due to metal objects or induction loops for electrical gate systems or automatic barriers
  Make sure that there is a sufficient distance between the key and the potential source of interference.

You have lost a key

Have the key deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.
If necessary, have the mechanical lock replaced as well.

Doors

Notes on the additional door lock

The additional door lock is only available for vehicles for the United Kingdom.

WARNING Risk of injury to persons inside the vehicle when the additional door lock is activated

If the additional door lock is activated, the doors can no longer be opened from the inside.

▶ Never leave persons, in particular children, unattended in the vehicle.
If there are persons in the vehicle, do not activate the additional door lock.

The additional door lock is automatically activated in the following situations:

• The vehicle is locked using the key.
• The vehicle is locked using KEYLESS-GO.

If the vehicle has been locked via Mercedes me connect, the additional door lock is not activated.

If the additional door lock is activated, the doors cannot be opened from the inside.

i After locking you can issue a signal with the horn.

You can prevent the additional door lock from being activated by deactivating interior protection before locking the vehicle ( page 95).

Unlocking/opening the doors from the inside

United Kingdom only: observe the notes on the additional door lock ( page 76).

Diagram showing car interior with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating movement or flow

Pull door handle ②. Locking pin ① pops up when the door is unlocked.

Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside

Diagram showing car interior components with numbered labels pointing to a device panel

To unlock: press button ①.
To lock: press button 2.

This does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap. The vehicle is not unlocked:

• If you have locked the vehicle using the key.

- If you have locked the vehicle using KEY-LESS-GO.

Locking/unlocking the vehicle with KEY-LESS-GO

Requirements:

• The key is outside the vehicle.
- The distance between the key and the vehicle does not exceed 1 m.
- The driver's door and the door at which the door handle is used are closed.

Diagram showing a car side profile with labeled parts, highlighting two numbered features (1 and 2) in a blue inset.

To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner surface of the door handle.
To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface ① or ②.
▶ Convenience closing: touch recessed sensor surface ② until the closing process has been completed.

(i) Further information on convenience closing ( page 88).

If you open the tailgate from outside, it is automatically unlocked.

Problems with KEYLESS-GO

You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO.

Possible causes:

• The key functions have been deactivated.
• The key battery is weak or discharged.
• The key is faulty.

▶ Activate the key functions ( page 74).

▶ Check the battery using the indicator lamp (→ page 73).

Replace the key battery, if necessary (→ page 75).

Use the emergency key to lock or unlock ( page 80).

Have the vehicle and key checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

There is interference from a powerful radio signal source

The KEYLESS-GO function is impaired by, for example:

• high voltage power lines
- mobile phones
• electronic devices (Notebooks, Tablets)
- shielding due to metal objects or induction loops for electrical gate systems or automatic barriers

Make sure that there is a sufficient distance between the key and the potential source of interference.

Activating/deactivating the automatic locking feature

The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning faster than walking pace.

Diagram showing car interior with labeled parts and a close-up of the device's screen, likely illustrating a door or seat design.

To activate: press and hold button ② for approximately five seconds until an acoustic signal sounds.

To deactivate: press and hold button ① for approximately five seconds until an acoustic signal sounds.

In the following situations, there is a danger of being locked out when the function is activated:

• While the vehicle is being tow started/pushed.
• If the vehicle is being tested on a roller dynamometer.

Power closing function

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the doors close automatically

Body parts or objects can become trapped, causing injuries.

▶ Ensure that no body parts or objects are in the closing area.
▶ Automatic closing of the doors can be cancelled by pulling the outer or inner door handle.

If you push the door into the lock to the first detent position, the power closing function will automatically pull the door into the lock.

Locking/unlocking the driver's door with the emergency key

If you wish to lock the vehicle entirely using the emergency key, first press the button for locking from the inside while the driver's door is open. Then proceed to lock the driver's door using the emergency key.

Insert the emergency key as far as it will go into opening ① in the cover.
▶ Pull and hold the door handle.
▶ Pull the cover on the emergency key as straight as possible away from the vehicle until it releases.
Release the door handle.

To unlock: turn the emergency key anticlockwise to position 1.
To lock: turn the emergency key clockwise to position [1].
Carefully press the cover onto the lock cylinder until it engages and is seated firmly.

Diagram showing car door and side view with a magnified view of the handle mechanism, labeled with number ①.

Remove the emergency key ( page 74).

Side view of a car with a highlighted door panel and a close-up of the engine compartment (no text or symbols visible)

Load compartment

Opening the tailgate

DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tailgate is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion.

Always switch off the engine before opening the tailgate.
▶ Never drive with the tailgate open.

NOTE Damage to the tailgate caused by obstacles above the vehicle

The tailgate swings rearwards and upwards when it is opened.

Make sure that there is sufficient space behind and above the tailgate.

Pull on the handle for the tailgate in the bumper above the number plate.
▶ Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: make a kicking movement with your foot below the bumper (→ page 83).

Diagram showing car interior with steering wheel, dashboard, and car icon highlighting a key component labeled '1'

Pull remote operating switch ① for the tail-gate.
Press and hold the 📞 button on the key.
If the tailgate is stopped in an intermediate position, pull it upwards. Release it as soon as it begins to open.

If an obstacle obstructs the tailgate during the automatic opening process, blockage detection

will stop the tailgate. The automatic blockage detection function is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attentiveness.

Closing the tailgate

⚠ WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle

If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants.

There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

▶ Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around.
Before the journey, secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.

Pull the tailgate downwards slightly. Release it as soon as it begins to close.

⚠ WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during automatic closing of the tailgate

Body parts may become trapped. There may be people in the closing area.

Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area during the closing process.

Use one of the following options to stop the closing process:

• Press the 📋 button on the key.
• Press or pull the remote operating switch on the driver's door.
• Press the closing or locking button on tailgate.
• Pull the tailgate handle.

▶ Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: it is also possible to stop the closing process by making a kicking movement below the rear bumper.

the

Diagram showing car interior with steering wheel, dashboard, and car door panel, including a highlighted car icon labeled '1'

Switch on the power supply or the ignition.
Press remote operating switch ① for the tailgate.

1 2 STOP

Press closing button ① on the tailgate.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO

Press locking button ② on the tailgate. If a key is detected outside the vehicle, the tailgate will close and the vehicle will be locked.
Press and hold the 📋 button on the key. The key must be in the vicinity of the vehicle.

Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS

Make a kicking movement with your foot below the bumper ( page 83).

Automatic reversing function for the tailgate

The tailgate is equipped with automatic blockage detection with a reversing function. If an obstacle stops the tailgate during the automatic closing procedure, it will automatically open again. Automatic blockage detection with the reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute your attentiveness.

During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function

The reversing function will not react:

• to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers
• towards the end of the closing procedure

In these situations in particular, the reversing function cannot prevent someone being trapped.

▶ Ensure that no body parts are in the closing area.
If someone is trapped, either:
- Press the button on the key.
- Press or pull the remote operating switch on the driver's door.
- Press the closing or locking button on the tailgate.
for Pull the tailgate handle.

HANDS-FREE ACCESS function

Illustration of a person standing beside a car with directional arrows indicating movement or change (no text or symbols)

With HANDS-FREE ACCESS you can open, close or stop the closing process of the tailgate by performing a kicking movement under the rear bumper.

The kicking movement triggers the opening or closing process alternately.

Observe the notes when opening ( page 80) and closing ( page 81) the tailgate.

Two warning tones sound when the tailgate is opening or closing.

WARNING Risk of burns caused by a hot exhaust system

The vehicle exhaust system can become very hot. If you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you could burn yourself by touching the exhaust system.

Always ensure that you only make a kicking movement within the detection range of the sensors.

NOTE Vehicle damage due to unintentional opening of the tailgate

• when using an automatic car wash
• when using a high pressure cleaner
  ▶ Deactivate KEYLESS-GO or make sure that the key located is at least 3 m

away from the vehicle in such situations.

When making the kicking movement, make sure that you are standing firmly on the ground. You could otherwise lose your balance, e.g. on ice. Observe the following notes:

• The key is behind the vehicle.
- Stand at least 30 cm away from the vehicle while performing the kicking movement.
- Do not come into contact with the bumper while making the kicking movement.
- Do not carry out the kicking movement too slowly.
- The kicking movement must be towards the vehicle and back again.

Front view of a Mercedes-Benz car with a blue circular marker labeled '1' pointing to the front grille (no text or symbols on the car itself)

① Detection range of the sensors

If several consecutive kicking movements are not successful, wait ten seconds.

System limits

The system may be impaired or may not function in the following cases:

• The sensors are dirty, e.g. due to road salt or snow.
• The kicking movement is made using a prosthetic leg.

The tailgate can open or close unintentionally in the following situations:

• A person's arms or legs are moving in the sensor detection range, e.g. when polishing the vehicle or picking up objects.
• Objects are moved or placed behind the vehicle, e.g. tensioning straps or luggage.
• Clamping straps, tarpaulins or other coverings are pulled over the bumper.
• A protective mat with a length reaching over the boot sill down into the detection range of the sensors is used.
  • The protective mat is not secured correctly.
• Work is being done on the trailer hitch, trailers or rear bicycle racks.

Deactivate the key functions ( page 74) or do not carry the key about your person in such situations.

Limiting the opening angle of the tailgate

Activating the opening angle limiter

You can limit the opening angle of the tailgate in the top half of its opening range to approximately 20 cm before the end position.

Stop the opening procedure of the tailgate at the desired position.
Press and hold the closing button on the tailgate until you hear a short acoustic signal. The opening angle limiter will be activated. The tailgate will then stop in the stored position when opened.

To open the tailgate fully, pull the handle on the outside of the tailgate again after it has stopped automatically.

Deactivating the opening angle limiter

Press and hold the closing button on the tailgate until two short acoustic signals sound.

Unlocking the tailgate with the emergency key

▶ Fold the rear seat backrest forward.

Remove the emergency key ( page 74).

Diagram showing car seatbelt insertion steps with numbered instructions and component labels

Insert emergency key ② into opening ① in the trim and push it in. The tailgate will be unlocked.

Side windows

Opening and closing the side windows

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when opening a side window

When you open a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame.

When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side window.
If someone is trapped, release the button immediately or pull it in order to close the side window again.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when closing a side window

When closing a side window, body parts could be trapped in the closing area in the process.

When closing, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

If someone is trapped, release the button immediately or press the button in order to reopen the side window.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when children operate the side windows

Children could become trapped if they operate the side windows, particularly when unattended.

Activate the child safety lock for the rear side windows.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

Requirements:

- The power supply or the ignition is switched on.

Diagram showing car interior with a highlighted component and directional arrows indicating movement or flow, labeled ① and ②.

To close

To open

The buttons on the driver's door take precedence.

To start automatic operation: press the button beyond the point of resistance or pull and release it.

To interrupt automatic operation: press or pull the ☐ button again.

When the vehicle is switched off, you can continue to operate the side windows.

This function is available for around four minutes or until a front door is opened.

Automatic reversing function of the side windows

If an obstacle impedes a side window during the closing process, the side window will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.

During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

⚠ WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite there being reversing protection on the side window

The reversing function does not react:

• to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers.
- during resetting.

The reversing function cannot prevent someone from becoming trapped in these situations.

During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.
If someone becomes trapped, press the button to open the side window again.

Automatic function of the side windows

In the following cases, the side windows will be closed automatically when the vehicle is switched off:

• if it starts to rain
  Rain is detected by a rain sensor on the windscreen.
  • in extreme temperatures
• after a certain time (depending on the onboard electrical system voltage)
• if there is a malfunction in the power supply

The side windows will be closed as far as the ventilation position.

Vehicles with a sliding sunroof: the side windows will be closed completely if the sliding sunroof is open.

If the side windows are obstructed during automatic closing, the side window concerned will open again slightly. The automatic function for the sliding sunroof and the side windows will then be deactivated.

Convenience opening (ventilating the vehicle before starting a journey)

⚠ WARNING Risk of entrapment when opening a side window

When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame.

When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side window.
Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.

Press and hold the ☑ button on the key. The following functions are performed:
• The vehicle is unlocked.
• The side windows are opened.
• The sliding sunroof is opened.
- The seat ventilation of the driver's seat is switched on.
To interrupt convenience opening: release the button.
To continue convenience opening: press and hold the 📊 button again.

Convenience closing (closing the vehicle from outside)

A WARNING Risk of entrapment due to not paying attention during convenience closing

When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side window and the sliding sunroof.

When the convenience closing feature is operating, monitor the entire closing process and make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.
Press and hold the ⏻ button on the The following functions are performed:
• The vehicle is locked.
• The side windows are closed.
• The sliding sunroof is closed.
To interrupt convenience closing: release the button.
i Convenience closing also functions with KEYLESS-GO ( page 78).

Problems with the side windows

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatally injured if reversing protection is not activated

If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked, the side window

will close with increased or maximum force. The reversing function is then not active and body parts may become trapped.

Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
To stop the closing process, release the button or press the button again to reopen the side window.

A side window cannot be closed and you can- not see the cause.

Check to see whether any objects are in the window guide.
Adjust the side windows.

Adjusting the side windows

If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again immediately:

Immediately after this, pull and hold the corresponding button again until the side win-

dow has closed and hold the button for at least one more second (re-adjustment).

The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function.

If the side window is obstructed again and reopens again immediately:

Immediately after this, pull and hold the corresponding button again until the side window has closed and hold the button for at least one more second (follow-up adjustment).

The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function.

The side windows cannot be opened or closed using the convenience opening feature.

Possible cause:

• The key battery is weak or discharged.
Check the battery using the indicator lamp ( page 73).
Replace the key battery, if necessary ( page 75).

Sliding sunroof

Opening and closing the sliding sunroof

The term "sliding sunroof" refers to the panoramic roof.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the sliding sunroof is being opened and closed

Body parts may become trapped in the range of movement.

During opening and closing, make sure that no body parts are in the range of movement.
▶ Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.

or

Briefly press the button in any direction during automatic operation. The opening or closing process will be stopped.

WARNING Risk of entrapment if the sliding sunroof is operated by children

Children operating the sliding sunroof could get caught in the moving parts, particularly if unattended.

▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.

NOTE Malfunction due to snow and ice

Snow and ice may cause the sliding sunroof to malfunction.

▶ Open the sliding sunroof only if it is free of snow and ice.

NOTE Damage caused by protruding objects

Objects that protrude from the sliding sun-roof may damage the sealing strips.

Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding sunroof.
NOTE Important points to remember when a roof luggage rack is fitted

When a roof luggage rack is fitted, raising or opening the sliding sunroof may be limited.

▶ Check whether the sliding sunroof can be raised or opened when a roof luggage rack is fitted.
If in doubt, do not raise or open the sliding sunroof.

Diagram showing car interior and rearview view with numbered arrows indicating directional flow or movement in a vehicle's seat.

To raise
② To open
To close/lower

To start automatic operation: press the button beyond the point of resistance or pull and release it.

To interrupt automatic operation: briefly press the button in any direction. The opening/closing process will be stopped.

Automatic reversing function of the sliding sunroof

If an obstacle obstructs the sliding sunroof during the closing process, the sliding sunroof will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.
During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

A WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite the reversing function being active

In particular, the reversing function does not react:

• to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers.
• towards the end of the closing procedure.
- during resetting.

During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.
Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.
or
▶ Briefly press the button in any direction during automatic operation.
The closing process will be stopped.

Automatic functions of the sliding sunroof

The sliding sunroof will be closed automatically when the vehicle has been switched off in the following situations:

• if it starts to rain
  Rain is detected by a rain sensor on the windscreen.
  • in extreme temperatures
• after a certain time (depending on the onboard electrical system voltage)
• if there is a malfunction in the power supply

The sliding sunroof will rise at the rear in order to continue ventilating the vehicle interior.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during an automatic closing procedure, the roof will be opened again slightly. The automatic function the sliding sunroof and the side windows will then be deactivated.

Problems with the sliding sunroof

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatal injuries when the sliding sunroof is closed again

If the sliding sunroof is closed again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, it will close with increased force.

Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
▶ Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.

or

▶ Briefly press the button in any direction during the automatic closing process. The closing process will be stopped.

for The sliding sunroof cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause.

① The term "sliding sunroof" refers to the panoramic roof.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closir and reopens again slightly:

Immediately after automatic reversing, pull and hold the button down again to the point of resistance until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof will be closed with increased force.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again and opens again slightly:

Repeat the previous step. The sliding sunroof will be closed with even greater force.

Vehicles without a panoramic roof: the sliding sunroof is not operating smoothly.

Reset the sliding sunroof.

Resetting the sliding sunroof

Push the button up to the point of resistance repeatedly until the sliding sun-roof is fully open.
Press the button for another second.
▶ Close the sliding sunroof. Vehicles with a panoramic roof: the roller sunblind does not operate smoothly.
▶ Reset the roller sunblind.

Resetting the roller sunblind

Pull and hold the button little by little until the roller sunblind is fully closed.
Use automatic operation to fully open and then close the roller sunblind.

Sun blind and roller sunblind

Folding up or down the sun blind for the rear window

Illustration of a sleek, curved object with a blue stylized 'S' logo on the right side (no text or symbols on the object itself)

▶ Fold the sun blind up or down.
To fold the sun blind while the tailgate is open, unhook the load compartment cover in advance.

Operating the roller sunblind for the panoramic roof

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the roller sunblind is being opened and closed

Body parts may become trapped between the roller sunblind and frame.

When opening or closing, make sure that no body parts are in the roller sun-blind's range of movement.
Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.

or
Briefly press the button in any direction during automatic operation. The opening/closing process will be stopped.

Opening and closing the roller sunblind

Diagram of car interior and dashboard with numbered arrows indicating movement or flow, showing a highlighted component in the dashboard.

To open: push the button in direction or pull it in direction.
To close: pull the button in direction 3.

Automatic reversing function of the roller sunblind

If an object is obstructing the roller sunblind during the closing process, the roller sunblind will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.

When closing the roller sunblind, make sure that no body parts are in the range of movement.

⚠ WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function

In particular, the reversing function does not react to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers.

• When closing the roller sunblind, make sure that no body parts are in the range of movement.
• Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.
  or

▶ Briefly press the button in any direction during the automatic closing process. The closing process will be stopped.

Anti-theft protection

Function of the immobiliser

The immobiliser prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct key.

The immobiliser is automatically activated when the ignition is switched off and deactivated when the ignition is switched on.

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Function of the ATA system

If the ATA system is primed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered in the following situations:

• when a door is opened
• when the tailgate is opened
• when the bonnet is opened
• when interior protection is triggered (→ page 95)

- when tow-away protection is triggered (→ page 94)

The ATA system is primed automatically after approximately ten seconds in the following situations:

- after locking the vehicle with the key - after locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO

OFF 1

Indicator lamp ① flashes when the ATA system is primed.

The ATA system is deactivated automatically in the following situations:

• after unlocking the vehicle with the key
- after unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
- after pressing the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment (→ page 151)

When the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is active and the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, a message is automatically sent to the Customer Assistance Centre ( page 286).

Deactivating the ATA

Press the ☑, ☑ or ☑ button on the key.
or
Press the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment ( page 151)

Deactivating the alarm using KEYLESS-GO

Grasp the outside door handle with the key outside the vehicle.

Function of tow-away protection

An audible and visual alarm is triggered if an alteration to your vehicle's angle of inclination is detected while tow-away protection is primed.

Tow-away protection is automatically primed after approximately 60 seconds:

• after locking the vehicle with the key
• after locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO

Tow-away protection is only primed when the following components are closed:

• the doors
• the tailgate

Tow-away protection is automatically deactivated:

- after pressing the ☑ or ⚡ button on the key

• after pressing the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment (→ page 151)
• after unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
• when using HANDS-FREE ACCESS

Information on collision detection on a parked vehicle ( page 177).

Priming/deactivating tow-away protection

Multimedia system:

Settings

Quick access

▶ Prime or deactivate Tow-away protection. Tow-away protection is primed again in the following cases:

• The vehicle is unlocked again.
- A door is opened.
• The vehicle is locked again.

If quick access is unavailable, select the Vehicle submenu in the Settings main menu to prime or deactivate tow-away protection.

Function of interior protection

When interior protection is primed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered if movement is detected in the vehicle interior.

Interior protection is primed automatically after approximately ten seconds:

• after locking the vehicle with the key
• after locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO

Interior protection is only primed when the following components are closed:

- the doors

- the tailgate

Interior protection is automatically deactivated:

• after pressing the ☑ or ☑ button on the key
• after pressing the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment (→ page 151)
• after unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
• when using HANDS-FREE ACCESS

The following situations can lead to a false alarm:

• moving objects such as mascots in the vehicle interior
• when the side window is open
• when the sliding sunroof is open

Priming/deactivating interior protection

Multimedia system:

Settings

quick access

▶ Prime or deactivate Interior motion sensor. Interior protection is primed again in the following cases:

• The vehicle is unlocked again.

- A door is opened.

• The vehicle is locked again.

If quick access is unavailable, select the Vehicle menu under Settings to prime or deactivate interior protection.

Notes on the correct driver's seat position

WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular:

• If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion.
• If you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion.

Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel and the mirror and fasten your seat belt.

Diagram of a car interior showing driver's seat, steering wheel, and dashboard with numbered labels pointing to key parts.

Ensure the following when adjusting the steering wheel ①, seat belt ② and driver's seat ③:

• You are sitting as far away from the driver's airbag as possible, taking the following points into consideration.
• You are sitting in an upright position

• Your thighs are slightly supported by the seat cushion

• Your legs are not fully extended and you can depress the pedals properly

• The back of your head is supported at eye level by the centre of the head restraint
• You can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent
• You can move your legs freely
• You can see all the displays on the instrument cluster clearly
• You have a good overview of the traffic conditions
• Your seat belt sits snugly against your body and passes across the centre of your shoulder and across your hips in the pelvic area

Vehicles with an AMG performance seat: if the front passenger seat is unoccupied, this can lead to noise caused by the seat belt tongue knocking against the seat. You can prevent this by sliding the seat belt tongue upwards with the belt clip.

Seats

Adjusting the front seat mechanically and electrically

⚠ WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seats are adjusted by children

Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

You can adjust the seats when the ignition is switched off.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during seat adjustment

When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail.

Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Children in the vehicle".

⚠ WARNING Risk of accident due to the driver's seat not being engaged

The driver's seat may move unexpectedly while driving.

This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

Always make sure that the driver's seat is engaged before starting the vehicle.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seat height is adjusted carelessly

If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured.

Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped.

While moving the seats, make sure that hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system.

A WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints not being fitted or being adjusted incorrectly

If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or whe braking.

▶ Always drive with the head restraints fitted.
Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the centre of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.

Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to adjust the height and angle of the head restraints correctly.

Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head.

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position

The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. You could slip beneath the seat belt and injure yourself.

Adjust the seat properly before commencing your journey.
Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder belt is routed across the centre of your shoulder.

Diagram showing car seatbelt components with numbered labels and directional arrows indicating movement or positioning.

① Seat cushion inclination
② Seat height
3 Seat backrest inclination
④ Seat fore-and-aft position
5 Seat cushion length

To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position: lift lever ④ and slide the seat into the desired position.

Make sure that the seat is engaged.
To adjust the seat cushion length: lift lever ⑤ and slide the front section of the seat cushion forwards or backwards.

Adjusting the front seat electrically

Diagram illustrating car seat positioning and movement with numbered arrows and a magnified inset showing the seat interior.

① Head restraint height
② Seat backrest inclination

3 Seat height
④ Seat cushion length
5 Seat cushion inclination
6 Seat fore-and-aft position
Save the settings with the memory function ( page 108).

Adjusting the front passenger seat electrically from the driver's seat

Requirements:

• The power supply is switched on.

Diagram showing a car interior with steering wheel and dashboard, alongside a control panel with a numbered indicator (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

You can call up the following functions for the front passenger seat:

• Seat adjustment
• Seat heating
• Seat ventilation
• Memory function

To select the front passenger seat: press button ①. When the indicator lamp lights up, the front passenger seat is selected.
Adjust the front passenger seat using the buttons on the driver's side door control panel.

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support via the multimedia system ( page 101).

Adjusting the AMG Performance seat

To adjust the contour of the seat and for improved lateral support, you can adjust the front seats individually.

On the front passenger seat, you can adjust only the seat side bolsters of the seat backrest.

Adjusting the AMG Performance seat via the multimedia system ( page 101).

Head restraints

Adjusting the front seat head restraints mechanically

WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular:

• If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion.
• If you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion.

Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel and the mirror and fasten your seat belt.

WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints not being fitted or being adjusted incorrectly

If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking.

Always drive with the head restraints fitted.
Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the centre of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.

Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to adjust the height and angle of the head restraints correctly.

Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head.

Diagram showing car seat positioning with numbered arrows and a magnified detail view labeled ①

To raise: pull the head restraint up.
To lower: press release knob ① in the direction of the arrow and push the head restraint down.
To move forwards: pull the head restraint forwards.
To move backwards: press release knob and push the head restraint backwards.

Adjusting the head restraints of the rear seats mechanically

Interior view of a car showing seatbelt and seatbelt switch mechanism (no text or symbols)

To raise: pull the head restraint up.
To lower: press release knob ① in the direction of the arrow and push the head restraint down.

Fitting/removing the outer rear seat head restraints
Removing

Diagram showing car seatbelt adjustment with blue arrows indicating left and right movement, plus a close-up of the seatbelt component.

Release the rear seat backrest and fold it forwards slightly ( page 111).
Pull the head restraint upwards as far as it will go.

Push release knob ① in the direction of the arrow and pull out the head restraint.

Fitting

Insert the head restraint such that the notches on the bar are on the left when viewed in the direction of travel.
Push the head restraint down until it engages.
Fold the rear seat backrest back until it engages.

Configuring the seat settings

Multimedia system:

→ ▶ Comfort ▶ Seat comfort

Adjusting the backrest contour in the lumbar region of the seat backrest (lumbar)

Select Lumbar.
Select the settings 🙏 for the desired seat.
Adjust the air cushions.

Adjusting the backrest side bolsters

▶ Select Side bolsters.
Adjust the air cushion for the desired seat.

Setting the seat heating balance

▶ Select Seat heating balance.
Adjust the heat distribution for the desired seat.

Setting automatic seat adjustment

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the driver's seat after calling up a driver profile

Selecting a user profile may trigger an adjustment of the driver's seat to the position saved under the user profile. You or other vehicle occupants could be injured in the process.

Make sure that when the position of driver's seat is being adjusted using the multimedia system, no people or body

parts are in the seat's range of movement.

If there is a risk of someone becoming trapped, stop the adjustment process immediately:

a) Tap the warning message on the media display.
or
b) Press a memory position button or a seat adjustment switch on the driver's door. The adjustment process will be stopped.

Requirements:

- Adapting the driver's seat position to the body size: automatic seat adjustment has been switched on.

Multimedia system:

→ Settings Vehicle
▶ Automatic seat adjustment

Switching automatic seat adjustment on/off When the active user profile is changed while the vehicle is stationary, the driver's seat, outside mirror and seat contour will automatically be adapted to the driver.

Select On or Off.

This setting is available only for individual user profiles. For the guest profile, automatic seat adjustment cannot be switched on or off. Further information about user profiles.

Adjusting the driver's seat position to body size

The vehicle will calculate a suitable driver's seat position on the basis of the driver's body size and set this directly.

To set the unit of measurement: select cm or ft/in.
Set the size using the scale.

▶ Select Start positioning.

The driver's seat position will be adjusted the body size that has been set.

If the driver's seat position calculated by the vehicle is not practical or comfortable, it can be changed manually at any time via the buttons.

The exterior mirrors are not set via this function. Instead, they have to be set manually via the switches.

You can also configure these settings via the Mercedes me portal for your user profile. By synchronising the profiles in the vehicle and the Mercedes me connect profiles, you can carry over these settings for your vehicle. Further information about synchronising user profiles.

Setting the easy entry and exit feature

▶ Activate or deactivate the function.

If you use an individual user profile and have set your body size, this information is carried over for the easy entry and exit feature. This causes the driver's seat to automatically move into the correct position.

Overview of massage programs

• Hot Relaxing back Combination of heat and massage. It starts by massaging the back. In addition, warm pressure points become noticeable, starting in the pelvic area.

- Hot Relaxing shoulder Combination of heat and massage. It starts by massaging the shoulders. In addition, warm pressure points become noticeable, starting in the pelvic area.

- Activating Massage Activating massage with upward-moving massage waves.

• Classic Massage Relaxing back massage.

- Wave Massage Regenerating massage via massage waves across the back and in the seat cushion.

- Mobilizing Massage Mobilising massage with upward-moving massage waves. Can promote slower, deeper respiration. This can improve the supply of oxygen to cells and the brain.

- Active Workout backrest and Active Workout cushion These programs require your cooper-

ation. Alternating between tensing and releasing helps to improve blood flow to your muscles. Press against a pressure point as soon as you feel it.

Selecting the massage programme for the front seats

Multimedia system:

Start the program for the desired seat ▶.
To set the massage intensity: switch High intensity on or off.

Resetting seat settings

Multimedia system:

→ ▶ Comfort ▶ Seat comfort
Select for the desired seat.
Confirm the prompt.

Switching the seat heating on/off

WARNING Risk of burns due to repeatedly switching on the seat heating

Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and seat backrest padding to become very hot.

In particular, the health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries.

Do not repeatedly switch on the seat heating.

To protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactivated after it is switched on repeatedly.

NOTE Damage to the seats caused by objects or documents when the seat heater is switched on

When the seat heater is switched on, overheating may occur due to objects or docu-

ments placed on the seats e.g. seat cushions or child seats. This could cause damage to the seat surface.

Make sure that no objects or documents are on the seats when the seat heater is switched on.

Requirements:

• The power supply is switched on.

Diagram showing car interior with steering wheel and dashboard, highlighting a key adjustment labeled '1'

Interior view of a car showing the dashboard and seat area with a hand icon pointing to a touchscreen switch (no text or symbols present)

Press button ① repeatedly until the desired heating level is set.

Depending on the heating level, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator lamps are off, the seat heating is switched off.

The seat heating will automatically switch down from the three heating levels after 8, 10 and 20 minutes until the seat heating is switched off.
① Vehicles with the Warmth Comfort Package: you can heat the armrests in the door and the centre console. You can also set the panel heating in the multimedia system (→ page 105).

Setting the panel heating

Multimedia system:

When the seat heater is switched on, the armrests and the centre console can be heated.
Switch the function for the desired seats on or off.

Switching the seat ventilation on/off

Requirements:

• The power supply is switched on.

Diagram showing a car dashboard with a steering wheel and a control panel, no text or symbols present.

Press button ① repeatedly until the desired blower setting has been reached. Depending on the blower setting, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator lamps are off, the seat ventilation is switched off.

Steering wheel

Adjusting the steering wheel electrically

The steering wheel can be adjusted when the power supply is disconnected.

Diagram showing car interior and hand valve mechanism with numbered annotations indicating directional flow or movement

To adjust the distance to the steering wheel
② To adjust the height

Save the settings with the memory function ( page 108).

Switching the steering wheel heater on or off

Requirements:

- The power supply or the ignition is switched on.

Diagram showing car seatbelt usage with numbered steps and a close-up of the device's keychain mechanism

To switch on: turn the lever in the direction of arrow ①. Indicator lamp ③ lights up. To switch off: turn the lever in the direction of arrow ②. Indicator lamp ③ goes out.

When you switch the ignition off, the steering wheel heater switches off.

Easy entry and exit feature

Using the easy entry and exit feature

WARNING Risk of accident when pulling away during the adjustment process for the easy exit feature

You could lose control of the vehicle.

Always wait until the adjustment process is complete before pulling away.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the easy entry and exit feature

You and other vehicle occupants - particularly children - could become trapped.

▶ Ensure that no-one has any body parts in the range of movement of the steering wheel.
Move the adjustment lever of the steering wheel if there is a risk of becoming trapped by the steering wheel. The adjustment process is stopped.
▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key if the "Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via Mercedes me connect.

Vehicles with memory function: you can stop the adjustment process by pressing one of the memory function position switches.

If the easy entry and exit feature is active, the steering wheel will move upwards in the following situations:

• You switch the ignition off.
• You open the driver's door when the ignition is switched on

The steering wheel will move back to the last drive position when:

• You switch the ignition on with the driver's door closed.
• You close the driver's door with the ignition switched on.

The last drive position will be saved when:

• You switch the ignition off.
- Vehicles with memory function: you save the seat settings via the memory function.

Setting the easy entry and exit feature

Multimedia system:

Settings Vehicle

▶ Automatic seat adjustment

Easy Entry/Exit

▶ Activate or deactivate the function.

Memory function

Function of the memory function

WARNING Risk of an accident if the memory function is used while driving

If you use the memory function on the driver's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made.

Only use the memory function on the driver's side when the vehicle is stationary.

WARNING Risk of entrapment when setting the seat with the memory function

When the memory function adjusts the seat, you and other vehicle occupants - particularly children - could become trapped.

During the adjustment process of the memory function, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
If someone becomes trapped, press a preset position button or seat adjustment switch immediately.

⚠ WARNING Risk of entrapment if the memory function is activated by children

Children could become trapped if they activate the memory function, particularly when unattended.

▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.

You can use the memory function when the ignition is switched off.

Seat adjustments for up to three people can be stored and called up using the memory function.

You can save settings for the following systems:

• Seat, backrest and head restraint
• Steering wheel
• Outside mirrors
• Head-up display

Operating the memory function

Storing

Diagram showing a car interior with labeled parts and a magnified inset highlighting a specific section labeled M.

Set the desired position for all systems.
Briefly press the M memory button and then press preset position 1, 2 or 3 within three seconds.

An acoustic signal sounds. The settings are stored.

To call up: press or briefly hold preset position button 1, 2 or 3. After releasing the button, all systems are moved into the stored position.

Stowage areas

Notes on loading the vehicle

DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tailgate is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion.

Always switch off the engine before opening the tailgate.
▶ Never drive with the tailgate open.

d▲ WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle

If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip,

tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants.

There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around.
Before the journey, secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over.

WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly

If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain.

There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of braking manoeuvres or abrupt changes in direction.

▶ Always stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations.
▶ Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.
▶ Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.
Stow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or too large in the load compartment.

A WARNING - Risk of accident or injury when using the cup holder while the vehicle is in motion

The cup holder cannot hold a container secure while the vehicle is in motion. If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is in motion, the container may be flung around and liquids could be spilled. The vehicle occupants may come into contact with the liquid and if it is hot, they could be scalded.

You could be distracted from traffic conditions and you may lose control of the vehicle.

Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is stationary.
Only use the cup holder for containers of the right size.
▶ Always close the container, particularly if the liquid is hot.

! NOTE Damage to the cup holder

When the rear armrest is folded back the cup holder could become damaged.

▶ Only fold the rear armrest back when the cup holder is closed.
! NOTE Damage to the rear armrest due to body weight
When folded out, the rear armrest can be damaged by body weight.
Do not sit or support yourself on the rear seat armrest.

⚠ WARNING Risk of injury due to an open load compartment floor

If you drive with the load compartment floor open, objects could be flung around and hit vehicle occupants as a result. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

Always close the load compartment floor before a journey.

! NOTE Damage to the stowage compartment under the ashtray due to intense heat

The stowage compartment under the ashtray is not heat resistant and could be damaged if you rest a lit cigarette on it.

▶ Make sure that the ashtray is fully engaged.

WARNING - Risk of fire and injury from the hot cigarette lighter

You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the cigarette lighter.

In addition, flammable materials may ignite if:

- you drop the hot cigarette lighter - a child holds the hot cigarette lighter to objects, for example

▶ Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.

▶ Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of reach of children.

▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

⚠ WARNING Risk of burns from the tailpipe and tailpipe trims

The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can become very hot. If you come into contact

with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself.

Always be particularly careful around the tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and supervise children especially closely in this area.

Allow vehicle parts to cool down before touching them.

The driving characteristics of your vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. You should bear the following in mind when loading the vehicle:

- never exceed the permissible gross mass or the permissible axle loads for the vehicle (including occupants).

Information can be found on the vehicle identification plate ( page 352).

- the load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests.

- always place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible.

- secure the load using the tie-down eyes distribute the load evenly.

and a Stowage compartment in the front centre console with a USB port and a 12 V socket

Stowage spaces in the vehicle interior

Overview of the front stowage compartments

Diagram of car interior with numbered components for identification

① Stowage space in the doors
Stowage compartment in the armrest with a multimedia and a USB connection as well as a charging module for wireless charging of mobile phones

Through-loading feature in the rear bench seat (EASY-PACK Quickfold)

Folding the rear seat backrest forwards

WARNING Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged

The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat back-rest may fold forwards, even while the vehicle is in motion.

• As a result, the vehicle occupant will be pressed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as intended and could cause additional injury.
• Objects or loads in the boot or load compartment cannot be restrained by the seat backrest.

Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip.

If the left and right seat backrests are not engaged and locked in place, this will be shown on the multifunction display on the instrument cluster. A warning tone will also sound.

If the centre seat backrest is not engaged and locked, the red lock verification indicator will be visible.

Requirements:

• To fold the centre seat backrest forwards: the centre seat backrest has been unlocked.

You can fold the centre and outer seat backrests forwards separately.

You can unlock the outer seat backrests electrically. The buttons for unlocking are located in the load compartment.

Diagram of a car interior showing rear seats and a close-up of the back panel with a button labeled '1' (no text or symbols on the main diagram)

▶ Vehicles without a memory function: move the driver's or front passenger seat forwards, if necessary.

Vehicles with a memory function: if necessary, when the seat backrest in the rear is folded forward, the front seat will move forwards slightly to avoid a collision.

If necessary, fully insert the head restraints in the rear seat backrest.
To fold the left and right seat backrests forward: pull the right or left release handle ①.

Diagram showing car seatbelt components with numbered labels pointing to specific parts

▶ Vehicles with a centre seat backrest: pull the release catch ③ of the seat backrest ② forward.

Fold the seat backrest ② forwards.
If necessary, reset the driver's or front passenger seat.

Folding back the rear seat backrest

NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt when folding back the seat backrest

The seat belt could become trapped and thus be damaged when the seat backrest is folded back.

Make sure that the seat belt is not trapped when folding back the seat back-rest.

Move the driver's or front passenger seat forwards, if necessary.

Interior view of a car showing seatbelt and dashboard with blue directional arrows (no text or symbols)

in place, the red lock verification indicator will be visible.

Locking the release catch of the centre rear seat backrest

Requirements:

- The left and centre seat backrests are engaged and joined together.

You can lock the centre seat backrest release catch if you want to secure the load compartment against unauthorised access. The centre seat backrest can then be folded forwards only together with the left seat backrest.

Interior view of a car showing the dashboard and seat area with a close-up inset of the seat (no text or symbols visible)

Fold the corresponding seat backrest back until it engages.

Left and right seat backrests: if the seat

backrest is not engaged and locked in place, this will be shown on the multifunction display on the instrument cluster.

A warning tone will also sound.

Vehicles with a centre seat backrest: if

the seat backrest is not engaged and locked

Fold the centre and left seat backrests forwards.

To lock or unlock: slide catch ① upwards or downwards.

Overview of the tie-down eyes

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle ( page 108).

Diagram of a car interior showing a seatbelt and a gear shift knob (no text or symbols)

Tie-down eyes

Overview of bag hooks

WARNING Risk of injury when using bag hooks with heavy objects

The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects or items of luggage.

Objects or items of luggage may be flung around and hit vehicle occupants.

Only hang light objects on the bag hooks.
▶ Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile objects on the bag hooks.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle ( page 108).

Subject the bag hooks to a maximum load of 3 kg and do not attach any goods to them.

Top-down line drawing of a car's rear bumper and dashboard, with an inset showing a close-up of the dashboard (no text or symbols)

Bag hook

EASY-PACK load-securing kit

Notes on the snap-in module for the load compartment (telescopic rods)

① This equipment is available for all vehicles except hybrid vehicles.

The EASY-PACK load-securing kit allows you to use your load compartment for a variety of purposes. The components are located in the stowage space under the load compartment floor.

Technical line drawing of a vehicle rear panel with no visible text or symbols

① Telescopic rod with mounting elements and holders

Installing a telescopic rod

WARNING Risk of injury due to an open load compartment floor

If you drive with the load compartment floor open, objects could be flung around and hit vehicle occupants as a result. There is a risk

of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

▶ Always close the load compartment floor before a journey.

This equipment is available for all vehicles except hybrid vehicles.

Top-down view of a car's rear window with a robotic vacuum cleaner on the roof (no text or symbols visible)

▶ Open the load compartment floor.

Attach the holders ① in the desired position to the side of the load compartment floor.
▶ Close the load compartment floor.

Diagram showing a car interior with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating movement or movement.

Insert the mounting elements ② into the holders ①.
▶ Extend the telescopic rod ③.
Insert the telescopic rod ③ into the mounting elements ②.

Turn both mounting elements

to

until you feel them engage.

Attaching a roof luggage rack

WARNING Risk of accident due to exceeding the maximum roof load

The vehicle centre of gravity and the usual driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics alter.

If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, will be greatly impaired.

Never exceed the maximum roof load and adjust your driving style.

You will find information on the maximum roof load in the "Technical data" section.

NOTE Vehicle damage from non-approved roof luggage racks

The vehicle could be damaged by roof luggage racks that have not been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz.

▶ Use only roof luggage racks tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz.
▶ Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure that the sliding sunroof can be fully raised when the roof luggage rack is fitted.
▶ Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure that the tailgate can be fully opened when the roof luggage rack is fitted.
▶ Position the load on the roof luggage rack in such a way that the vehicle will not sustain damage even when it is in motion.

① It is not possible to attach a roof luggage rack to vehicles with a carbon roof.

Diagram showing car door and directional traffic sign with blue arrows indicating down or up states

NOTE Damage to the covers

The covers may be damaged and scratched when being opened.

Do not use metallic or hard objects.

Carefully fold covers ① upwards in the direction of the arrow.

Secure the roof luggage rack to the fastening points beneath covers ①.
Comply with the installation instructions of the roof luggage rack manufacturer.
▶ Secure the load on the roof luggage rack.

Cup holders

Switching the cooling or heating function for the temperature-controlled cup holder on or off

When the heating function is used, the metal insert of the cup holder is heated. For this reason, you must not reach into the cup holder insert.

Diagram of car interior with labeled parts, showing a vehicle's internal structure and numbered annotations.

To switch on: press button ② repeatedly until the blue (keep cool) or red (keep warm) indicator lamp on the button lights up.
To switch off: press button 2 repeatedly until the indicator lamp on the button goes out.
i Clean the removable rubber mat only with clean, lukewarm water and the temperature-controlled cup holder ① only with a soft cloth.

Sockets

Using the 12 V socket

Requirements:

- Only devices up to a maximum of 180 W (15 A) are permissible.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle has the following 12 V sockets:

• In the stowage compartment in the front centre console
• In the stowage compartment in the centre console of the rear passenger compartment
  • In the load compartment

Diagram showing a device inside a car intake channel with labeled component 1 and directional arrow

Example: 12 V socket in the stowage compartment in the front centre console

Fold up socket cap ①.

Insert the plug of the device.

If you have connected a device to the 12 V socket, leave the cover of the stowage compartment open.

Using the 230 V socket in the rear passenger compartment

& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to damaged connecting cables or sockets

You could receive an electric shock if the connecting cable or the 230 V power socket is pulled out of the trim or is damaged or wet.

Use only connecting cables that are dry and free of damage.

When the ignition is switched off, make sure that the 230 V power socket is dry.
4 Immediately have the 230 V power socket checked or replaced at a qualified specialised workshop if it is damaged or has been pulled out of the trim.

Never plug the connecting cable into a 230 V power socket that is damaged or has been pulled out of the trim.

& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to incorrect handling of the socket

You could receive an electric shock in particular:

• if you reach into the socket.
- if you insert unsuitable devices or objects into the socket.
4 Do not reach into the socket.

Only connect suitable devices to the socket.

Requirements:

• Devices are equipped with a suitable plug which conforms to the standards specific to the country you are in.
- A device up to a maximum of 150 W (0.65 A) is used.
- Do not use multiple socket outlets.

Diagram showing a car interior with labeled components and an inset view of the device's internal structure.

Open flap 3.
Insert the plug of the device into 230 V socket ①. When the on-board electrical system voltage is sufficient, indicator lamp ② lights up.

Diagram of car interior showing labeled parts including a device and a battery pack with numbered annotations

Open flap 3.
Insert the plug of the device into 230 V socket ①. When the on-board electrical system voltage is sufficient, indicator lamp ② lights up.

USB port in the rear passenger compartment

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle has the following USB ports in the rear passenger compartment:

• for vehicles with luxury individual rear seats: in the rear centre console
  • for vehicles with a rear bench seat: between the rear seats
• in the stowage compartment in the rear arm-rest

(i) Depending on the vehicle equipment, the design of the stowage compartment and the rear centre console may vary.

If the ignition is switched on you can charge a USB device, such as a mobile phone, at the U port using a suitable charging cable.

Vehicles with luxury individual rear seats:

the 230 V socket is in the stowage compartment in the centre console.

Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior aerial

Notes on wirelessly charging the mobile phone

WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly

If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within.

There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

Always stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations.
▶ Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.

Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.
▶ Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the boot/load compartment.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.

WARNING Risk of fire from placing objects in the mobile phone stowage compartment

Placing other objects in the mobile phone stowage compartment could constitute a fire hazard.

Apart from a mobile phone, do not place any other objects in the mobile phone stowage compartment, especially those made of metal.

NOTE Damage to objects caused by placing them in the mobile phone stowage compartment

If objects are placed in the mobile phone stowage compartment, they may be damaged by electromagnetic fields.

Do not place credit cards, data storage devices, ski passes or other objects sensitive to electromagnetic fields in the mobile phone stowage compartment.

NOTE Damage to the mobile phone stowage compartment caused by liquids

If liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment, the compartment may be damaged.

▶ Ensure that no liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment.

The following notes on wirelessly charging the mobile phone must be observed:

• Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mobile phone is connected to the vehicle's exterior aerial via the charging module.
• The charging function and wireless connection of the mobile phone to the vehicle's exterior aerial are only available if the ignition is switched on.
• Small mobile phones may not be able to be charged in every position of the mobile phone stowage compartment.
• Large mobile phones which do not rest flat in the mobile phone stowage compartment may not be able to be charged or connected with the vehicle's exterior aerial.
• The mobile phone may heat up during the charging process. This may particularly depend on the applications (apps) currently open in the background.
• To ensure more efficient charging and connection with the vehicle's exterior aerial, remove the protective cover from the mobile

phone. Protective covers which are necessary for wireless charging are excluded.

Wirelessly charging a mobile phone

Requirements:

- The mobile phone is suitable for wireless charging (Qi-compatible mobile phone). A list of Qi-compatible mobile phones can found at: https://www.mercedes-benzmobile.com

Mechanical assembly diagram showing directional arrows and a numbered component (no text or symbols)

Place the mobile phone as close to the centre of mat ① as possible with the display facing upwards. When the charging symbol is shown in the multimedia system, the mobile phone is being charged.

Malfunctions during the charging process are shown in the media display.

bei The mat can be removed for cleaning, e.g. using clean, lukewarm water.

Radio equipment approval numbers for Brazil

This device operates on a secondary basis, that is to say it has no protection against harmful interference, not even from the same type of stations, and must not cause interference with systems operating on a primary basis.

This product is permitted in accordance with the procedure defined in Directive 242/2000 by the Brazilian telecommunications agency ANATEL and meets the applicable technical requirements.

Further information is available on the ANATEL website. www.anatel.gov.br

▶ Further information on the declaration of conformity for vehicle components which receive and/or transmit radio waves.

Wirelessly charging a mobile phone in the rear passenger compartment

Requirements:

- The mobile phone is suitable for wireless charging (Qi-compatible mobile phone). A list of Qi-compatible mobile phones can found at: https://www.mercedes-benzmobile.com

Line drawing of a car interior showing the seat, dashboard, and screen (no text or symbols)

Example: vehicles with luxury individual rear seats

Open the stowage compartment in the rear centre console.
Fasten the mobile phone behind rubber strap ①.

When the indicator lamp in the upper area the mobile phone system lights up, the mobile phone is being charged.

i Observe the notes on loading the vehicle ( page 108).

Fitting/removing the floor mats

WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell

Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle.

Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell.
Always fit the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals.
Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another.

Diagram of car seatbelt components with numbered labels pointing to specific parts

To fit: slide the corresponding seat backwards and lay the floor mat in the footwell.
Press studs ① onto holders ②.
Adjust the corresponding seat.
To remove: slide the corresponding seat backwards and pull the floor mat off holders ②.
Remove the floor mat.

Exterior lighting

Notes on adjusting the lights when driving abroad

Vehicles with Intelligent Light System: before crossing the border into countries in which fic drives on the other side of the road, it is necessary to set the headlamps to symmetrical low beam (→ page 130).

Once the headlamps have been converted:

• Oncoming traffic will not be dazzled.
- The edge of the road will not be illuminated as far or as high.
- The "motorway mode" and "enhanced fog light" functions will not be available.

The headlamps must be reset to asymmetrical low beam when you return from abroad.

Information about lighting systems and your responsibility

The various lighting systems of the vehicle are only aids. The driver of the vehicle is responsible for correct vehicle illumination in accordance

with the prevailing light and visibility conditions, legal requirements and traffic situation.

Light switch

Operating the light switch

Diagram of car dashboard control knob with numbered labels pointing to specific parts

1 ←P← Left-hand parking lights
2 P←→ Right-hand parking lights

3 ≥00≤ Standing lights and licence plate lighting
4 AUTO Automatic driving lights (preferred light switch position)
5 Low beam / high beam
6 0‡ Switches the rear fog light on/off

When low beam is activated, the indicator lamp for the standing lights >005 will be deactivated and replaced by the low-beam indicator lamp D .

Always park your vehicle safely using sufficient lighting, in accordance with the relevant legal stipulations.

NOTE Battery discharging by operating the standing lights

Operating the standing lights over a period of hours puts a strain on the battery.

Where possible, switch on the right or left -P parking light.

In the event of severe battery discharging, the standing lights or parking lights will be switched

off automatically to facilitate the next engine start.

The exterior lighting (except standing and parking lights) will switch off automatically when the driver's door is opened.

- Observe the notes on surround lighting ( page 130).

Automatic driving lights function

The standing lights, low beam and daytime running lights are switched on automatically depending on the ignition status and the light conditions.

WARNING Risk of accident when the dipped beam is switched off in poor visibility

When the light switch is set to AUTO, the dipped beam may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility such as spray.

In such cases, turn the light switch to 📋.

The automatic driving lights are only an aid. are responsible for vehicle lighting.

Switching the rear fog lights on or off e Requirements:

- The light switch is in the ☐ or AUTO position.

Press the 0# button.

Please observe the country-specific laws on the use of rear fog lamps.

Yo Operating the combination switch for the lights

Medical illustration showing a car seatbelt with numbered instructions and directional arrows indicating movement or positioning.

① High beam
② Turn signal light, right
③ Headlamp flashing
4 Turn signal light, left
Use the combination switch to activate the desired function.

Switching on high beam

Turn the light switch to the 📋 or AUTO position.

Push the combination switch beyond the point of resistance in the direction of arrow ①.

When the high beam is activated, the indicator lamp for low beam will be deactivated and replaced by the indicator lamp for high beam.

Switching off high beam

Move the combination switch back to its starting position.

Headlamp flashing

Pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow 3.

Turn signal light

To indicate briefly: push the combination switch briefly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow ② or ④. The corresponding turn signal light will flash three times.

To indicate permanently: push the combination switch beyond the point of resistance in the direction of arrow ② or ④.

Activating/deactivating the hazard warning lights

a- 1 6

Press button 1.

The hazard warning lights will switch on automatically if:

• the airbag has been deployed.
- the vehicle is heavily braked from a speed of more than 70 km/h to a standstill.

When you pull away again, the hazard warning light system will switch off automatically at approximately 10 km/h. You can also switch off the hazard warning light system using button ①.

Adaptive functions, MULTIBEAM LED

Intelligent Light System function

The MULTIBEAM LED headlamps adapt to the driving and weather situation and provide extended functions for improved illumination of the road.

The system comprises the following functions:

• Active headlamps (→ page 127)
• Cornering light (→ page 127)
• Motorway mode (→ page 127)
• Enhanced fog light function (→ page 128)

• Adverse weather light ( page 128)
• City lighting ( page 128)

System limits

• The system is active only when it is dark.

Active headlamps function

Illustration of a car driving on a curved road with trees and directional arrows (no text or symbols)

Functions of the active headlamps:

• The headlamps follow the steering movements.
• Relevant areas are better illuminated during a journey.

The functions are active when the low beam is switched on.

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the course of the lane in which you are driving will also be evaluated and the active headlamps function will adjust the light in advance.

Cornering light function

Illustration of a person standing on a crosswalk beside a road with trees and a car in the background (no text or symbols)

The cornering light improves the illumination of the carriageway over a wide angle in the turning direction, enabling better visibility on tight bends, for example. It can be activated only when the low beam is switched on.

The function is active in the following cases:

• At speeds below 40 km/h when the turn signal light is switched on or the steering wheel is turned
• At speeds between 40 km/h and 70 km/h and when the steering wheel is turned

Roundabout and junction function: the cornering light will be activated on both sides bas on an evaluation of the vehicle's current GPS position. It will remain active until after the vehicle has left the roundabout or the junction.

Motorway mode function

Motorway mode increases the range and brightness of the cone of light, enabling better visibility.

Illustration of a highway with vehicles and trees, no visible text or symbols

The function is active if a motorway journey is detected by means of:

• the vehicle's speed
  • the multifunction camera
• the GPS

The function is not active in the following cases:

- at speeds below 80 km/h.

Enhanced fog light function

The enhanced fog light function reduces self-dazzling and improves the illumination of the edge of the carriageway.

Illustration of a road scene with cars and trees, no visible text or symbols

The function is automatically activated under following conditions:

- At speeds below 70 km/h and when the rear fog light is switched on.

The function is automatically deactivated under the following conditions:

• At speeds above 100 km/h after activation.
• When the rear fog light is switched off.

You can activate the enhanced fog light function up to a speed of 100 km/h by switching on the rear fog light.

Function of the adverse weather light

The adverse weather light reduces reflections in rainy conditions by dimming individual LEDs in the headlamps. This reduces glare for the driver and other road users.

The city lighting function

City lighting improves the illumination of road-sides in urban areas using a broad distribution of light.
The function is active in the following cases:

• At low speeds
  • In illuminated parts of urban areas

Switching the Intelligent Light System on/off

Requirements:

• the ignition is switched on.
Multimedia system:

Settings Lights
Settings Lights
▶ Intelligent Light System

▶ Activate or deactivate the function.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus function

WARNING Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus does not react to:

• road users without lights, e.g. pedestrians
  • road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
• road users whose lighting is obstructed, e.g. by a barrier

On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus may fail to recognise other road users with their own lighting, or may recognise them too late.

In these, or in similar situations, the automatic high beam will not be deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road users.

▶ Always observe the road and traffic conditions carefully and switch off the high beam in good time.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Detection may be restricted in the following cases:

• In poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow
- if there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions.

Illustration of a road scene with cars, trees, and a road (no text or symbols)

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus automatically switches between the following types of light:

• Low beam
• Partial high beam
• High beam

Partial high beam uses the high beam to shine past other road users rather than dazzling them.

The vehicle in front will be illuminated by the low beam.

At speeds below 25 km/h or when there is sufficient street lighting:

- The partial high beam and the high beam will be switched off automatically.

At speeds greater than 30 km/h:

• If no other road users are detected, the high beam will be switched on automatically.
• If other road users are detected, the partial high beam will be switched on automatically

At speeds greater than approximately 50 km/h:

- The headlamp range of the low beam is regulated automatically based on the distance to other road users.

The system's optical sensor is located behind the windscreen near the overhead control panel.

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus on/off

Switching on

▶ Turn the light switch to the AUTO position.

Switch on the high beam using the combinaMultimedia system: tion switch.

When the high beam is switched on automatically in the dark, the indicator lamp on the multifunction display will light up.

Switching off

Switch off the high beam using the combination switch.

Setting the low beam (vehicles with MULTI-BEAM LED headlamps only)

Multimedia system:

→ Settings Lights Dipped-beams

Select Right-side traffic, Left-side traffic or Automatic.

Setting the exterior lighting switch-off delay time

Requirements:

- The light switch is in the AUTO position.

→ Settings > Lights Ext. light. del. sw. off

Set the switch-off delay time. When the vehicle engine is switched off, the exterior lighting will be activated for the set time.

Switching the surround lighting on/off

Multimedia system:

→ Settings Lights Surround lighting

When Surround lighting is active, the exterior lighting lights up for 40 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked. When you start the vehicle, the surround lighting is deactivated and the automatic driving lights are activated.

▶ Activate or deactivate the function.

Interior lighting

Adjusting the interior lighting

Front overhead control panel

1 2 3 4 5

1 Front left reading lamp
2 Automatic interior lighting control
3 Front interior lighting
4 Rear interior lighting
5 Front right reading lamp
To switch on/off: press button ① - ⑤ accordingly.

Control panel in the rear passenger compartment

Close-up of a car's door panel with a blue circular indicator and '1' label, no readable text or symbols beyond the indicator.

① Rear reading lamp
To switch on/off: press button ①.

Adjusting the ambient lighting

Multimedia system:
Comfort Ambient lighting

Setting the colour

Select Colour.
Set the desired colour.

Adjusting the brightness

Select Brightness.
Adjust the brightness.

Activating the brightness for zones

Select Brightness.
▶ Select Brightness zones.
▶ Activate or deactivate the function.

or

Set the brightness for the desired zones.

Activating multi-coloured lighting

Select Colour.
Select Multi-colour.
▶ Select a colour combination.

Activating multi-coloured animation

Select Colour.
Select Multi-colour animat.. The chosen colour combination will change at predefined intervals.

Activating welcome lighting

▶ Select Colour.
▶ Select Welcome. When the vehicle is unlocked, a special ambient lighting sequence will run.

Activating dependency on air conditioning settings

Select Colour.
Select Climate. If changes are made to the temperature setting in the vehicle, the colour of the ambient lighting will change briefly.

Switching the interior lighting switch-off delay time on/off

Multimedia system:

→ Settings Lights

Int. light. del. sw. off

Switch the switch-off delay time on or off. 2 ... Intermittent wiping, normal When this function is active, the interior light 3 ... Intermittent wiping, frequent ing lights up for a short time after the vehicle is locked.

Windscreen wipers and windscreen washer system

Switching the windscreen wipers on/off

Medical illustration showing a hand holding an earpiece with numbered instructions and a close-up of the device's rotation diagram.

1 0 Windscreen wipers off

2 ... Intermittent wiping, normal

3 .... Intermittent wiping, frequent

4 — Continuous wiping, slow
5 = Continuous wiping, fast

Turn the combination switch to the corresponding position 1 - 5.

Single wipe/washing: push the button on the combination switch in the direction of arrow ①.

- Single wipe

• Wipes with washer fluid

Replacing the windscreen wiper blades

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the windscreen wipers are switched on while wiper blades are being replaced

If the windscreen wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm.

Always switch off the windscreen wipers and ignition before changing the wiper blades.

Moving the wiper arms into the replacement position

▶ Switch the ignition on and then off again immediately.
Within around 15 seconds, press and hold the button on the combination switch for approximately three seconds (→ page 132). The wiper arms will move into the replacement position.

Removing the wiper blades

Fold the wiper arms away from the wind-screen.

Diagram illustrating car safety camera setup with numbered instructions for adjusting components

Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper blade away from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow ① as far as it will go.
Slide catch ② in the direction of arrow ③ until it engages in the removal position.
Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 4.

Fitting the wiper blades

Diagram illustrating car engine components with numbered parts and directional arrows indicating assembly or repair steps.

Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper arm in the direction of arrow ①.
Slide catch ② in the direction of arrow ③ until it engages in the locking position.
Make sure that the wiper blade is seated directly.

Fold the wiper arms back onto the wind-screen.
▶ Switch on the ignition.
Press the button on the combination switch (→ page 132).
The wiper arms will return to the original position.
▶ Switch the ignition off.

Maintenance display

Diagram showing car exterior and cable connector with labeled parts, including a numbered annotation pointing to the cable.

Remove protective film ① from the maintenance display on the tip of the newly fitted wiper blades.

When the colour of the maintenance display changes from black to yellow, the wiper blades should be replaced.

The duration until the colour changes varies depending on the usage conditions.

Mirrors

Operates the outside mirrors

WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular:

• If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion.
• If you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion.

Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel and the mirror and fasten your seat belt.

WARNING Risk of accident due to mis-judgement of distance when using the outside mirror

The outside mirrors reflect objects on a smaller scale. The objects in view are in fact closer than they appear.

Therefore, always look over your shoulder in order to ensure that you are aware of the actual distance between you and the road users driving behind you.

Folding the outside mirrors in/out

Diagram of a car interior control panel with numbered labels pointing to key components

Briefly press button ①.

Resetting the outside mirrors

If the battery has been disconnected or completely discharged, the outside mirrors must be reset. Only then will the automatic mirror folding function work properly.

Briefly press button ①.

Adjusting the outside mirrors

Press button ③ or ④ to select the outside mirror to be adjusted.
Press button ② to adjust the position of the mirror glass.

Engaging the outside mirrors

▶ Vehicles without electrically folding outside mirrors: manually move the outside mirror into the correct position.
Vehicles with electrically folding outside mirrors: press and hold button 📄. You will hear a click and the mirror will audibly click into place. The outside mirror will now be set to the correct position.

Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors function

A WARNING Risk of acid burns and poisoning due to the anti-dazzle mirror electrolyte

Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an automatic anti-dazzle mirror breaks.

The electrolyte is hazardous to health and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or be swallowed.

If you come into contact with electrolyte, observe the following:

• Immediately rinse the electrolyte from your skin with water and seek medical attention.
• If electrolyte comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water and seek medical attention.
• If the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately.
• Immediately change out of clothing which has been contaminated with electrolyte.
• If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately.

The inside rearview mirror and the outside mirror on the driver's side will automatically go into anti-dazzle mode if light from a headlamp hits the sensor on the inside rearview mirror.

System limits

The system will not go into anti-dazzle mode if:

• the engine is switched off.
• reverse gear is engaged.
• the interior lighting is switched on.

Front-passenger outside mirror parking position function

The parking position makes parking easier. The front-passenger outside mirror will swivel downwards in the direction of the rear wheel on the front passenger's side when:

• the parking position is stored ( page 137).
• the front-passenger mirror is selected.
• reverse gear is engaged.

The front-passenger outside mirror will move back to its original position when:

• you shift the transmission to another transmission position.
• you are travelling at a speed greater than 15 km/h.
• you press the button for the outside mirror on the driver's side.

Storing the parking position of the front-passenger outside mirror using reverse gear

Storing

Diagram showing a car dashboard with labeled buttons and a close-up of the control panel, highlighting two key points.

Select the front-passenger outside mirror using button 2.
Engage reverse gear.
Move the front-passenger outside mirror into the desired parking position using button ①.

Calling up

Select the front-passenger outside mirror using button ②.
Engage reverse gear. The front-passenger outside mirror will move to the stored parking position.

Activating/deactivating the automatic mirror folding function

Multimedia system:

→ Settings Vehicle

▶ Switch Automatic fold-in on or off.

Area permeable to radio waves on the windscreen

Diagram of a car's front and rear door with numbered arrows indicating directional movement or placement.

Radio-controlled equipment, such as toll systems, can be mounted only on areas ① of the windscreen that are permeable to radio waves.

Areas permeable to radio waves ① are best visible from outside the vehicle when the windscreen is illuminated with an external light source.

Note this position for vehicles with:

• Windscreen heating
  • Infrared reflective windscreen

Infrared-reflective windscreen function

The infrared-reflective windscreen is coated and reduces the build-up of heat in the vehicle interior.

The coating shields the vehicle interior from radio waves.

Overview of climate control systems

Notes on climate control

An interior air filter in combination with the prefilter in the engine compartment must always be used so that the air conditioning system, pollution level monitoring and the air filtration work correctly. Make sure that the filter is installed correctly and the filter housing in the engine compartment is closed correctly using the cap and always tightly sealed when in operation. U filters recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Always have service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Overview of the air conditioning control panel

The indicator lamps on the buttons indicate that the corresponding function is activated.

THERMATIC air conditioning control panel with/without stationary heater (example)

Sets the temperature, left
② Sets the air distribution
3 Sets the airflow or switches off climate control
4 AUTO Sets climate control to automatic (→ page 140)
5 Demists the windscreen

⑥ Vehicles with THERMATIC air conditioning control panel (without stationary heater): MENU calls up the air conditioning menu Vehicles with THERMATIC air conditioning control panel (with stationary heater) or THERMOTRONIC (with/without stationary heater): MENU calls up the air conditionir menu, switches residual heat on/off (→ page 142)

7 REAR Switches the rear window heater on/off

Vehicles with THERMATIC air conditioning control panel without stationary heater: SYNC switches synchronisation on/off (→ page 141)

Vehicles with THERMOTRONIC air conditioning control panel without stationary heater:
A/C switches the A/C function on/off
(→ page 140)

Vehicles with a stationary heater: switches the stationary heater on/off (→ page 144)

9 Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (→ page 142)

10 Vehicles with THERMATIC air conditioning control panel: A/C switches the A/C function on/off (→ page 140)
Vehicles with THERMOTRONIC air conditioning control panel: ☐ adjusts the air distribution, right
Sets the temperature, right

Rear operating unit in vehicles with THERMOTRONIC air conditioning control panel

22°C OFF ① ② ③

Setting the temperature
② Display
3 Setting the temperature

Operating the climate control system

Switching climate control on/off

To switch on: set the airflow to level 1 or higher using the button.
To switch off: set the airflow to level 0 using the button.

If climate control is switched off, the windows may mist up more quickly. Switch climate control off only briefly.

Switching the A/C function on/off using the air conditioning control panel

The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidifies the vehicle's interior air.

Press the A/C button.

Switch off the A/C function only briefly; otherwise, the windows may mist up more quickly.

Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when cooling mode is active. This is not indicative of a fault.

Calling up the air conditioning menu

Calling up the air conditioning menu using the multimedia system

Select one of the temperature displays at the lower edge of the media display.

Activating/deactivating the A/C function via the multimedia system

The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidifies the vehicle's interior air.

▶ Call up the air-conditioning menu ( page 140).
Select First row of seats.
Select A/C.

Setting climate control to automatic mode

In automatic mode, the set temperature is controlled and maintained at a constant level by the air supply.

Press the AUTO button.

To switch to manual mode: press the or button.

Climate style

Climate style function

The following climate styles are available in automatic mode:

• FOCUS: high airflow, slightly cooler setting
• MEDIUM: medium airflow, standard setting
• DIFFUSE: low airflow, slightly warmer and draught-free setting

Setting the climate style

Call up the air conditioning menu ( page 140).
Select First row of seats or Second row seats.
▶ Call up the CLIMATE MODE menu.
Select a climate style.

Setting the air distribution

▶ Call up the air conditioning menu ( page 140).
Select a row of seats.
To set the air distribution: select 📞, 🙏 or 🚗.
Set the airflow.
Several air distribution options can be selected at the same time, for example to set the climate control for the windscreen and the footwells simultaneously. The climate control for the windscreen can only be selected for the first seat row.

Activating/deactivating the climate control synchronisation function via the air conditioning control panel

Climate control can be set centrally using the synchronisation function. The temperature and air distribution settings for the driver's side will be adopted automatically for the front passenger side.

Press the SYNC button.

The synchronisation function will be deactivated if the settings for one of the other climate control zones are changed.

Activating/deactivating the climate control synchronisation function via the multimedia system

Climate control can be set centrally using the synchronisation function. The driver's settings for temperature, air quantity and air distribution are adopted automatically for all climate zones.

▶ Call up the air conditioning menu ( page 140).
▶ Select First row of seats.
Select SYNC.

Demisting the windows

Windows misted up on the inside

Press the AUTO button.

If the windows continue to mist up: press the button.

Windows misted up on the outside

▶ Switch on the windscreen wipers.

Press the AUTO button.

Switching air-recirculation mode on/off

Press the button. The interior air will be recirculated.

Air-recirculation mode automatically switches to fresh air mode after some time.

If air-recirculation mode is switched on, the windows may mist up more quickly. Switch on air-recirculation mode only briefly.

Switching the residual heat on/off

Requirements:

• The vehicle is parked.

It is possible to make use of the residual heat from the engine to continue heating or ventilat-

ing the front compartment of the vehicle for approximately 30 minutes.

To switch on: press the MENU button. Residual heat is switched off automatically.

Activating/deactivating ionisation

Ionisation improves the quality of the vehicle's interior air. Ionisation of the interior air is odourless.

- Call up the air conditioning menu (→ page 140). - Select Air quality. - Select IONISATION.

Fragrance system

Setting the fragrance system

Requirements:

• Automatic climate control is activated.
• The glove box is closed.

The fragrance system distributes a pleasant fragrance throughout the vehicle interior from a flacon located in the glove box.

▶ Call up the climate control menu ( page 140).
▶ Select Air quality.
Select AIR FRESHENER.

Keep pressing until the desired intensity is reached.

Inserting or removing the flacon of the fragrance system

WARNING Risk of injury from liquid perfume

If children open the flacon, they could drink the liquid perfume or it could come into contact with their eyes.

Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Consult a doctor immediately if liquid perfume has been drunk.

If liquid perfume comes into contact with your eyes or skin, rinse your eyes with clean water.
If symptoms continue, consult a doctor.

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of full flacons

Full flacons must not be disposed ousehold waste.

Full flacons must be taken to I substance collection point.

Diagram of car interior showing a component being inserted into a speaker, with numbered parts and directional arrow indicating insertion.

To insert: slide flacon ② into the holder as far as it will go.
To remove: pull out flacon 2.

If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfumes, observe the manufacturers' safety notices on the perfume packaging.

Dispose of the genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfume flacon when it is empty and do not refill it.

Refillable flacon

Unscrew cap ① of empty flacon ②.
Fill flacon ② with a maximum of 15 ml.
Screw cap ① back onto flacon ②.

Always refill the empty refillable flacon with the same perfume. Observe the separate information sheet attached to the flacon.

Information on the windscreen heater

The windscreen heater is switched on automatically if the MAX button is activated.

After the vehicle is started, the windscreen heater is switched on automatically as required.

Stationary heater/ventilation

Stationary heater/stationary ventilation function

The following functions are performed:

• The air inside the vehicle is heated or ventilated to the set temperature.
• The air inside the vehicle cannot be cooled down to temperatures below the outside temperature.
• If the outside temperature changes, ventilation mode automatically switches to heating mode or heating mode automatically switches to ventilation mode.

The stationary heater and the exhaust gas outlet are situated at the right-hand front wheel.

Switching the stationary heater/ventilation on/off via the air conditioning control panel

DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poisonous exhaust gases

If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventilation is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehicle. This is the case in enclosed spaces or if the vehicle gets stuck in snow, for example.

▶ Always switch the stationary heater off in enclosed spaces without an air extraction systems, e.g. in garages.
Keep the tailpipe and the area around the vehicle free from snow when the engine or the stationary heater are running.
Open a window on the windward side of the vehicle to ensure an adequate supply of fresh air.

WARNING Risk of fire due to hot stationary heater components and exhaust gases

Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite.

When the stationary heater is switched on, make sure that:
- hot vehicle parts do not come into contact with flammable materials.
- the exhaust gas can flow out of the stationary heater exhaust pipe unhindered.
- the exhaust gas does not come into contact with flammable materials.

NOTE Battery discharge caused by stationary heater or stationary ventilation operation

Operating the stationary heater or stationary ventilation drains the battery.

After heating or ventilating the vehicle twice, drive for a longer period of time.

Requirements:

- The fuel tank is filled to at least the reserve level.

Set the desired temperature using the ▼▲ button (→ page 139).
Press the 🎨 button. The red or blue indicator lamp on button light up or go out.

The colours of the indicator lamp have the following meanings:

• Blue: stationary ventilation is switched on.
• Red: the stationary heater is switched on.
• Yellow: the departure time is preselected.

The stationary heater/ventilation will switch off automatically after 50 minutes.

Operation using the app: the stationary

heater/ventilation can also be operated via the Mercedes me connect app. You can find further information in the separate Owner's Manual at https://moba.i.daimler.com/markets/ece-row/baix/cars/connectme/en_GB/#emotions/Startseite.html.

Setting the stationary heater/stationary ventilation via the multimedia system

▶ Call up the air conditioning menu ( page 140).
▶ Select Auxiliary heating.

Selecting the departure time

Select the time TIME A: XX, TIME B: XX or TIME C: XX.

Setting the departure time

Select the time TIME A: XX, TIME B: XX or TIME C: XX.
▶ Select the pen beside the time.
Set a time.

Setting the stationary heater/ventilation via remote control

Requirements:

- The fuel tank is filled to at least the reserve level.

Switching on immediately

ON OFF

Press and hold the ON button.

Setting the departure time

Briefly press the ON button.
Press the ◀ or ▶ button repeatedly until the time to be changed appears on the display.

Press the ON and OFF buttons simultaneously.
The ⏻ symbol on the remote control display will flash.
Use the ◀ and ▶ buttons to set the desired departure time.
Press the ON and OFF buttons simultaneously.
The new departure time will be stored.

Up to three departure times can be stored.

To activate the departure time: select the desired departure time and press and hold the ON button. The symbol, the departure time and, depending on the selected departure time, the letter A, B or C will appear on the display.

To deactivate the departure time: select the desired departure time and press and hold the OFF button. OFF will appear on the display.

To check the status of the active stationary heater: briefly press the ON button.

Switching off immediately

▶ Press and hold the OFF button.

Overview of the remote control displays (stationary heater/ventilation)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 B 30 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

① Stationary ventilation switched on
② Stationary heater switched on
3 Selected departure time
4 Remaining time for the stationary heater/ventilation (in minutes)
5 Stationary heater/ventilation active
6 Departure time activated
⑦ Signal strength

Further possible displays:

• Time: the activated departure time.
- Zero minutes: the running time for the stationary heater is extended because the engine has not yet reached operating temperature when it is started.
• OFF: the stationary heater/ventilation is switched off.

Replacing the remote control battery (stationary heater)

DANGER Serious damage to health caused by swallowing batteries

Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. Swallowing batteries may cause serious damage to health.

There is a risk of fatal injury.

Keep batteries out of the reach of children.
If batteries are swallowed, seek medical attention immediately.

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of batteries

Batteries contain toxic and corro-tances.

Take discharged batteries to a specialist workshop or to a point for used batteries.

Requirements:

• One CR2450 lithium battery

Diagram showing two views of a black remote control device with numbered annotations indicating directional changes.

▶ Push a pointed object into recess ①.
Slide battery cover ② backwards in the direction of the arrow.
Insert new battery ③ with the lettering facing upwards.
Slide battery cover ② in the opposite direction to the arrow onto the remote control until the battery cover engages.

Problems with the remote control for the stationary heater/ventilation

FAIL (↑) appears on the remote control display

Possible cause:

• The signal transmission between the transmitter and the receiver is malfunctioning.
  Change your position in relation to the vehicle, moving closer if necessary.

FAIL appears on the remote control display

Possible cause:

• The starter battery is not sufficiently charged.
  ▶ Charge the starter battery.

Possible cause:

• The fuel tank content is below the reserve fuel level.
  Refuel at the nearest filling station.

FAIL 📁 appears on the remote control display

Possible cause:

• There is a malfunction in the stationary heater.
  Have the stationary heater checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Air vents

Adjusting the front air vents

WARNING Risk of burns and frostbite due to being too close to the air vents

Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents.

Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance from the air vents.
If necessary, direct the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior.

To guarantee the flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, comply with the following:

• Always keep the vents and vent grilles in the vehicle interior free.
• Keep the air inlet free of residue build-up (→ page 306).

Diagram of a car interior with steering wheel, dashboard, and three connected circular components labeled '1' pointing to the dashboard.

To open or close: hold the air vent ① in the centre and turn it to the left or right as far as it will go.
To set the airflow direction: hold the air vent ① in the centre and move it up or down or to the left or right.

Adjusting the rear air vents

Diagram of a car interior showing two circular fans with a numbered label (1) pointing to one fan, no text or symbols present.

To open or close: hold the air vent ⓘ in the centre and turn it to the left or right as far as it will go.
To set the airflow direction: hold air vent ① in the centre and move it up or down or to the left or right.

Opening or closing the air vent in the glove box

! NOTE Damage to temperature-sensitive objects in the glove box

Temperature-sensitive objects stored in the glove box may be damaged by the air vent located inside the glove compartment.

Close the air vent when you heat the vehicle.
At high outside temperatures, open the air vent and switch on the A/C function.

The automatic climate control must be switched on to cool the glove box.

Diagram showing car wheel and air intake mechanism with numbered parts and directional arrows

1 Air vent controller
2 Air vent
To open or close: turn controller ① to the right or left.

Driving

Switching on the power supply or ignition

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could, in particular:

• open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users.
• get out and be struck by oncoming traffic.
• operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by:

• releasing the parking brake.
• changing the transmission position.
• starting the vehicle.
▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
Keep the vehicle key out of reach of children.

Requirements:

• the key is in the vehicle and is recognised.
• the brake pedal is not depressed.

Engine 1

To switch on the power supply: press button once. You can activate the windscreen wiper, for example.

The power supply is switched off again if the following conditions are met:

• you open the driver's door.
• you press button ① twice more.

To switch on the ignition: press button twice.

The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up.

The ignition is switched off again if one of the following conditions is met:

• you do not start the vehicle within 15 minutes and the transmission is in position P or the electric parking brake is applied.
• you press button ① once.

Starting the vehicle

Starting the vehicle with the start/stop button

DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning.

▶ Never leave the engine or, if present, the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient ventilation.

WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable material in the engine compartment or the exhaust system

Flammable materials may ignite.

Therefore, check regularly that there are no flammable materials in the engine compartment or on the exhaust system.

Requirements:

• the key is in the vehicle and is recognised.

Shift the transmission to position P or N.

Depress the brake pedal and press button once.

If the vehicle does not start: switch off non-essential consumers and press button once.

You can switch off the engine while driving by pressing button ① for about three seconds or by pressing button ① three times within three seconds. Be sure to observe the safety notes under "Driving tips" (→ page 154).

Function of Emotion Start

Diagram of a car steering wheel with numbered components and brand logo at the head

Start the vehicle with the start/stop button (→ page 151) and simultaneously pull one of the steering wheel gearshift paddles Ⓞ or

- The idle speed is increased briefly when starting the engine.

- The exhaust gas flaps are opened (sporty characteristic) (→ page 161).

Starting the vehicle with the key in the marked space (emergency operation mode)

If the vehicle does not start and the Place the key in the marked space See Owner's Manu message appears in the multifunction display,

you can start the vehicle in emergency operation mode.

Diagram of car gear shift mechanism with labeled parts 1 and 2

Make sure that the marked space ② is empty.
Remove the key ① from the key ring.
Place the key ① in the marked space ②. The vehicle will start after a short time.

If you remove the key ① from the marked space ② the engine continues running. For further vehicle starts however, the key ① must be located in the marked space ② during the entire journey.

Have the key ① checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

If the vehicle does not start:

place the key ① in the marked space ② and leave it there.
Depress the brake pedal and start the vehicle using the start/stop button.
(i) You can also switch on the power supply or the ignition with the start/stop button.

Starting the vehicle via Remote Online services

Cooling or heating the vehicle interior before commencing your journey

Ensure the following before starting the engine:

• the legal stipulations in the area where your vehicle is parked allow engine starting via smartphone.
• it is safe to start and run the engine where your vehicle is parked.
  • The fuel tank is sufficiently full.
  • The starter battery is sufficiently charged.

Charging the starter battery before starting the journey

If the vehicle battery is discharged, you can receive a message on your smartphone. You can then start the vehicle with the smartphone to charge the battery. The vehicle is automatically switched off after ten minutes.

Ensure the following before starting the engine:

• the legal stipulations in the area where your vehicle is parked allow engine starting via smartphone.
• it is safe to start and run the engine where your vehicle is parked.
  • The fuel tank is sufficiently full.

Starting the vehicle (Remote Online)

WARNING Risk of crushing or entrapment due to unintentional starting of the engine

Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the engine is started unintentionally during service or maintenance work.

Always secure the engine against unintentional starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work.

Requirements:

• park position is selected.
  • the anti-theft alarm system is not activated
  • the panic alarm is not activated.
• the hazard warning light system is switched off.
  • the bonnet is closed.
  • the doors are closed and locked.
  • the windows and sliding sunroof are closed.

Start the vehicle using the smartphone. After every engine start, the engine runs for ten minutes.

You can carry out a maximum of two consecutive starting attempts. You must start the vehicle once with the key before trying to start the engine again with the smartphone. you can stop the vehicle again at any time.

i Further information can be found in the smartphone app.

Securing the engine against starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work:

switch on the hazard warning light system.
or
unlock the doors.
or
open a side window or the sliding sunroof.

Running-in notes

To preserve the engine during the first 1,500 km:

• drive at varying road speeds and engine speeds.
• do not drive at speeds greater than 140 km/h.
• allow the engine to reach a maximum engine speed of 4,500 rpm only briefly.

• drive the vehicle in drive program [C].

• change gear before the rev counter needle is 23 of the way to the red area of the rev counter.

• do not shift down a gear manually in order to brake.
• avoid overstraining the vehicle, e.g. driving at full throttle.
• do not depress the accelerator pedal past the pressure point (kickdown).
• only increase the engine speed gradually and accelerate the vehicle to full speed after 1,500 km.

This also applies when the engine or parts of the drivetrain have been replaced.

Please also observe the following running-in notes:

- in certain driving and driving safety systems, the sensors adjust automatically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered or after repairs. Full system effectiveness is not reached until the end of this teach-in process.

- brakepads, brake discs and tyres that are either new or have been replaced only achieve optimum braking effect and grip after several hundred kilometres of driving. Compensate for the reduced braking effect by applying greater force to the brake pedal.

Notes on engine output and engine torque

The actual (maximum) values that can be achieved for engine output and engine torque may deviate from the certified values within the country-specific guidelines for permissible tolerances (basis: UN-ECE No. 85 or country-specific guidelines).

Variables that can influence this are, for example:

• Location above sea level
• fuel grade
• Outside temperature
  • operating temperature of the engine

Until the engine has reached its operating temperature, the engine operating temperature warning lamp is lit.

Engine output and engine torque have been reduced. Take this into account for your driving style.

When the engine operating temperature warning lamp goes out, full engine output and engine que are available.

Notes on driving

WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell

Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle.

Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell.
Always fit the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals.

Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another.

WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrect footwear

Incorrect footwear includes, for example:

• shoes with platform soles
• shoes with high heels
- slippers
Always wear suitable footwear so that you can operate the pedals safely.

WARNING Risk of accident if the ignition is switched off while driving

If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety functions are restricted or no longer available.

You will then need, for example, to use considerably more force to steer and brake.

Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning.

▶ Never leave the engine or, if present, the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient ventilation.

A WARNING Risk of skidding and of an accident due to shifting down on slippery road surfaces

If you shift down on slippery road surfaces to increase the engine braking effect, the drive wheels may lose traction.

Do not shift down on slippery road surfaces to increase the engine braking effect.

DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poisonous exhaust gases

If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventilation is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehicle. This is the case when the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, for example.

Keep the tailpipe and the area around the vehicle free from snow when the engine or the stationary heater are running.
Open a window on the side of the vehicle facing away from the wind to ensure an adequate supply of fresh air.

⚠ WARNING Risk of accident due to the brake system overheating

If you leave your foot on the brake pedal when driving, the brake system may overheat.

This increases the braking distance and the brake system may even fail.

▶ Never use the brake pedal as a footrest.
Do not depress the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal at the same time while driving.

WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrect gearshifting

If the engine speed is higher than the idle speed and you engage the transmission position D or R, the vehicle may accelerate sharply.

If you engage the transmission position D or R when the vehicle is at a standstill, always depress the brake pedal firmly and do not accelerate at the same time.

! NOTE Engine damage due to excessively high engine speeds

The engine will be damaged if you drive with the engine in the overrevving range.

Do not drive with the engine in the over-revving range.
! NOTE Causing wear to the brake linings by permanently depressing the brake pedal
Do not permanently depress the brake pedal while driving.
To use braking effect of the engine, shift to a lower gear in good time.

! NOTE Damage to the drivetrain and engine when pulling away

Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary. Pull away immediately.
Avoid high engine speeds and driving at full throttle until the engine has reached its operating temperature.

NOTE Damage to the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel

The engine is not running smoothly and is misfiring.

Non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter.

▶ Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Notes on driving on salt-treated roads

The braking effect is limited on salt-treated roads.

Therefore, observe the following notes:

• due to salt build-up on the brake disks and brakepads, the braking distance can increase considerably or result in braking only on one side

- maintain a much greater safe distance to the vehicle in front

To remove salt build-up:

• brake occasionally while paying attention to the traffic conditions
• carefully depress the brake pedal at the end of the journey and when starting the next journey

Notes on aquaplaning

Aquaplaning can take place once a certain amount of water has accumulated on the road surface.

Observe the following notes during heavy precipitation or in conditions in which aquaplaning may occur:

• reduce speed
• avoid tyre ruts

- avoid sudden steering movements

• brake carefully

Also observe the notes on regularly checking wheels and tyres ( page 335).

Notes on driving through water on the road surface

Water which has entered into the vehicle can damage the engine, electrics and transmission.

Water can also enter the air intake of the engine and cause engine damage.

Observe the following if you must drive through water:

• The water, when calm, may only reach the lower edge of the vehicle body.
• Drive at walking pace at most, otherwise water can enter the vehicle interior or engine compartment.
• Vehicles travelling in front, or oncoming vehicles, can create waves which may exceed the maximum permissible depth of the water.

The braking effect of the brakes is reduced after fording. Brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until braking power has been fully restored.

Function of rear axle steering

The rear axle steering is an electromechanical auxiliary steering on the rear axle which adjusts the steering of the rear wheels according to the position of the front wheels, depending on the speed. This results in greater manoeuvrability and improved stability.

Rear axle steering has the following characteristics:

• reduced steering effort and turning circle resulting in reduced parking effort
• improved driving stability, e.g. when cornering
• more direct steering resulting in improved handling of the vehicle

Observe the notes on snow chains (→ page 335) and on activating snow chain mode.

Information on the AMG ceramic high-performance composite brake system

The brake system is designed for heavy loads. This may lead to noise when braking. This effect can also occur after washing the vehicle.

The noise depends on the following factors:

• speed
• brake force
  • environmental conditions, e.g. temperature and air humidity

i Have the brake system checked at a qualified specialist workshop after it has been subjected to extreme loads.

ECO start/stop function

Operation of the ECO start/stop function

The ECO start/stop function is not available in all drive programs, depending on the engine. Observe the status display in the multifunction display for this.

The engine is switched off automatically in the following situations if all vehicle conditions for an automatic engine stop are met:

• you brake the vehicle to a standstill in transmission position [D] or [N].
• vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system: you depress the brake pedal when travelling at a low speed.

If the system has detected one of the following situations, the engine will not stop:

• you stop at a stop sign and there is no vehicle in front of you.
• the vehicle that stopped in front of you starts up again.
• you manoeuvre, turn the steering wheel sharply or engage reverse gear.

If the system detects an intelligent stop inhibitor, e.g. a stop sign, the engine will not stop.

If you activate the HOLD function or engage the park position P, the engine can be switched off in spite of an intelligent stop inhibitor.

The engine is restarted automatically if:

• you engage transmission position D or R.
• you depress the accelerator pedal.
• an automatic engine start is required by the vehicle.
• you release the brake pedal.

- vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system:

• you release the brake pedal on a downhill gradient and the vehicle does not roll.
• the vehicle rolls on a downhill gradient and does not automatically enter glide mode at 20 km/h.

ECO start/stop function symbols in the multifunction display:

• the symbol (A) (green) appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: the engine was not switched off by the ECO start/stop function.

• the symbol Ⓐ (yellow) appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: not all vehicle conditions for an engine stop have been met.

• neither the symbol ☐ nor ☐ appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: an intelligent stop inhibitor was detected, e.g. a stop sign.

• the symbol ^n appears: the ECO start/stop function is deactivated or there is a malfunction.

If the engine was switched off by the ECO start/stop function and you leave the vehicle, a warning tone sounds and the engine is not restarted. In addition, the following display message appears in the multifunction display:

Vehicle is operational Switch off ignition before exiting

If you do not switch off the ignition, it is automatically switched off after three minutes.

Deactivating or activating the ECO start/stop function

Diagram showing a car interior with labeled buttons and a control panel, highlighting key points A and 2.

Press display button ①.

The display button indicates the current status ② of the ECO start/stop function:

• A OFF

(red): deactivated

• A

(green): activated

• A

(yellow): inactive

ECO display function

The ECO display summarises your driving characteristics from the start of the journey to its completion and assists you in achieving the most economical driving style.

You can influence consumption if you:

• drive with particular care.
• drive the vehicle in drive program C.
• follow the gearshift recommendations.

graph TD
    A["1"] --> B["Balance Scale"]
    C["2"] --> B
    D["3"] --> B

The inner segment lights up and the outer segment fills up:

• ① moderate acceleration

• ② gentle deceleration and rolling
• ③ consistent speed

The inner segment does not light up and the outer segment empties:

• ① sporty acceleration
• ② heavy braking
• ③ fluctuations in speed

You have driven economically if:

• the three outer segments are completely filled simultaneously.
  • the ECO display lights up.

The additional range achieved as a result of your driving style in comparison with a driver with a very sporty driving style is shown under Bonus from start. The range displayed does not indicate a fixed reduction in consumption.

ECO Assist function

This function is country-dependent and is available only for vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system.

ECO Assist analyses data for the vehicle's expected route. This allows the system to optimally adjust the driving style for the route ahead, save fuel and recuperate.

ECO Assist is available in the following drive programs:

• (Slippery)
• C Comfort)
- [1*] (Individual): only with the drive setting "Reduced" or "Moderate" (→ page 163)

If the system detects an event ahead, e.g. a speed limit or a roundabout, it will appear on multifunction display.

mph % +

Available route results

graph TD
    A["1"] --> B["Central Node"]
    C["2"] --> B
    D["3"] --> B
    B --> E["D"]

① Event ahead
② Distance display for the event ahead
③ "Foot off the accelerator" prompt

The segments of distance display ② show the distance to the event ahead as follows:

• A few segments light up: the event ahead is near.
• Many segments light up: the event ahead is further away.

When the vehicle nears an event, ECO Assist will calculate the optimal speed for maximum fuel economy and recuperative energy based on the distance, speed and gradient. The "Foot off the accelerator" symbol ③ will appear on the multifunction display.

If the driver takes their foot off the accelerator pedal in good time, the remaining segments on the display will successively turn green until the event shown is reached. The drivetrain will be set for maximum fuel economy. In drive program

with the drive setting "Reduced" or "Moderate", the vehicle will coast, with the combustion engine switched off if necessary.

If there is no response to the prompt, the segments will remain white.

The event will be shown for a short time after it has been passed.

If the event involves a vehicle in front and when the coast-down recommendation is given, all segments will immediately turn green once there is a response to the "Foot off the accelerator" prompt ③.

If the system does not intervene during the event ahead, nothing will be displayed. The system will be passive.

In drive program C, only the event "Vehicle in front" is displayed.

System limits

ECO Assist can function even more precisely if the route is adhered to when route guidance is active. The basic function is also available without active route guidance. Not all information and traffic situations can be foreseen. The quality depends on the map data.

ECO Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for keeping a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. The driver must be ready to brake at

all times irrespective of whether the system intervenes.

The system may be impaired or may not fur in the following situations:

e. If visibility is poor, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray.

- If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections.

- If there is dirt on the windscreen in the air of the multifunction camera or the camera misted up, damaged or obscured.

- If traffic signs are hard to discern, e.g. due to dirt, snow or insufficient lighting, or because they are obscured.

- If the information on the navigation system's digital map is incorrect or out of date.

- If signs are ambiguous, e.g. traffic signs in roadworks or in adjacent lanes.

Displaying ECO Assist

On-board computer:

on → Assistance

Select ECO Assist.

AMG Performance exhaust system

Function of the AMG Performance exhaust system

Changing the position of the exhaust gas flaps allows you to select the sound characteristics of the AMG Performance exhaust system:

• Balanced: closed exhaust gas flaps for a comfortable sound characteristic
- Powerful: open exhaust gas flaps for a sporty sound characteristic

Operating the AMG Performance exhaust system

Diagram showing car interior with labeled buttons and a device icon, likely from a vehicle control or navigation system.

Press display button ①.

The display button indicates the currently selected sound characteristic ②:

• button symbol (blue): balanced
• button symbol (red): powerful

DYNAMIC SELECT switch

Function of the DYNAMIC SELECT switch

Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to change between the following drive programs:

• [⚙️] Slippery
• optimised pulling away and driving characteristics in wintry and slippery road conditions
• Individual
• individual settings of drive, suspension, steering and ESP
• Comfort
• comfortable and economical driving
• S Sport
• sporty drivin
• Sport+
• particularly sporty driving
• Race
• maximum sportiness

late upshifting of the automatic transmission
particularly firm springing and damping settings
- sporty sound characteristic of the exhaust system

The drive program is available only for the Mercedes-AMG GT 63 S 4MATIC+ model or for vehicles with AMG DYNAMIC PLUS package.

Drive program 📄 offers driving characteristics suited for the racetrack and may not be used on normal roads. Drive program 📄 be activated and used only on dedicated race circuits, not on public roads.

may

Mercedes-AMG recommends selecting the drive program C when in city traffic or stop-and-go traffic.

Depending on the drive program selected, the following vehicle characteristics will change:

• drive
• AMG Dynamics

the four agility functions Basic, Advanced, Pro and Master are automatically selected depending on the drive program.
- the steering, shift timing point, all-wheel drive and stabilisation functions are adapted to the selected drive program.
- when ESP ^ is activated, agility function Pro is selected in drive program [icon]. The Master function is automatically selected when ESP ^ is deactivated.

• position of the exhaust gas flaps
- suspension
- steering
• availability of Glide mode

You can call up vehicle characteristics via the Performance menu in the on-board computer.
You can adjust the agility functions of AMG Dynamics using the AMG steering-wheel buttons.

You can also change the following vehicle characteristics using the buttons in the centre console:

• position of the exhaust gas flaps
- suspension

Selecting the drive program

Diagram showing car interior with labeled switches and a highlighted S+ component, likely for navigation or diagnostic reference.

Press DYNAMIC SELECT switch ① forwards or backwards. The selected drive program appears in the display ② and in the multifunction display in the instrument cluster.

Configuring DYNAMIC SELECT (multimedia system)

Multimedia system:

Settings Vehicle
DYNAMIC SELECT

Setting drive program I

▶ Select Individual configuration.
▶ Select and set a category.

Switching the restoration display on or off

▶ Switch Ask when starting on or off.

Function on: the next time the vehicle is started a prompt appears asking whether the last active drive program should be restored. If the ECO start/stop function was deactivated, an addi-

tional prompt appears asking if the function should remain deactivated.

The prompt appears only if the previously active settings deviate from the standard settings.
Function off: the next time the vehicle is started the C drive program is set automatically. The ECO start/stop function is activated automatically.
This function must be activated for each profile separately. Only when this function is activated will the drive program and Eco start/stop setting for the previous journey be saved for the respective user profile.

Displaying vehicle data

Multimedia system:

▶ Select Vehicle.

The vehicle data is displayed.

Displaying engine data

Multimedia system:

Select Engine.
The engine data is displayed.
The actual (maximum) values that can be achieved for engine output and engine torque may deviate from the certified values within the country-specific guidelines for permissible tolerances (basis: UN-ECE No. 85 or country-specific guidelines).

Factors that can influence this are, for example:

• Sea level
• Fuel grade
• Outside temperature
• Operating temperature of the engine

The values displayed serve only as orientation. The values for engine output and engine torque shown in the media display may deviate from the actual values.

Calling up the consumption indicator

Multimedia system:

▶ Select Consumption.
The current and average consumption is displayed.

Automatic transmission

E-SELECT selector lever

Function of the E-SELECT selector lever

⚠ WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrect gearshifting

If the engine speed is higher than the idle speed and you engage the transmission position D or R, the vehicle may accelerate sharply.

If you engage the transmission position D or R when the vehicle is at a standstill, always depress the brake pedal firmly and do not accelerate at the same time.

A WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could, in particular:

• open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users.
• get out and be struck by oncoming traffic.
  • operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by:

• releasing the parking brake.
• changing the transmission position.
• starting the vehicle.
  ▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
  When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.

Keep the vehicle key out of reach of children.

Use the E-SELECT selector lever to change the transmission position. The current transmission position is displayed in the multifunction display.

R N P N D

P Park position
R Reverse gear
N Neutral
D Drive position

Engaging reverse gear R

Depress the brake pedal and push the E-SELECT selector lever upwards past the first point of resistance.

Engaging neutral N

▶ Depress the brake pedal and push the E-SELECT selector lever up or down to the first point of resistance.

Subsequently releasing the brake pedal will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it away.

If you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutral N even if the ignition is switched off:

start the vehicle.
depress the brake pedal and engage neutral N.
release the brake pedal.
switch the ignition off.

① If you then exit the vehicle leaving the key in the vehicle, the automatic transmission remains in neutral N.

Engaging park position P

Observe the notes on parking the vehicle ( page 171).
Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle is stationary.
When the vehicle is stationary, press button P.

Park position is only engaged when the transmission position display P is shown the multifunction display. If no transmission position display P appears, secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away.

Park position is engaged automatically if one of the following conditions is met:

• you switch off the ignition when the vehicle is stationary and the transmission is in position D or R.
• you open the driver's door when the vehicle is stationary or when driving at a very low speed and the transmission is in position or [R].

To manoeuvre with an open driver's door, open the driver's door while stationary and

engage transmission position D or R again.

Engaging drive position D

▶ Depress the brake pedal and pull the E-SELECT selector lever back past the first point of resistance.

When the automatic transmission is in transmission position D, it shifts the gears automatically. This depends on the following factors:

• the selected drive program
• the position of the accelerator pedal
- the driving speed

Notes on the double-clutch function

The double-clutch function is active when changing down in all drive programs. The double-clutch function reduces load change reactions and supports sporty driving. The acoustic perception of the double-clutch function changes depending on the drive program.

Rocking the vehicle free

Rocking the vehicle free may help to free the vehicle if it has become stuck in slush or snow. To rock the vehicle free, move the E-SELECT selector lever upwards and downwards past the pressure point in order to switch between transmission positions and ( page 164).

The maximum design speed when switching between D and R is 9 km/h.

Manual gearshifting

Diagram showing car dashboard control panel with labeled buttons and icons, including 'M' and 'O'

To activate/deactivate: press display button ①.

The display switch displays the currently selected transmission position ②:

• M (red): manual gearshifting
• D (blue): automatic transmission

To permanently shift the gears manually in drive program using the steering wheel gearshift paddles, select the M (Manual) setting for the transmission.

! NOTE Damage to the engine due to shifting up too late

The automatic transmission does not shift up in manual mode even when the engine's limiting speed is reached.

The fuel supply is interrupted in order to prevent the engine from overrewing.

Shift up before the engine speed reaches the red area in the rev counter.

Diagram of a car steering wheel with numbered positions and brand logo at the head

To shift up: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle ②.
To shift down: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle ①.

0 240 270 300 1

If the engine speed is too high or too low, you cannot change gear using the steering wheel gearshift paddles. In this case, segments light up red.

Gearshift recommendation

The gearshift recommendation assists you in adopting an economical driving style.

M↑2 P R N 1

If gearshift recommendation message ① is shown on the multifunction display, shift to the recommended gear.
i Gearshift recommendation is active only if you have activated manual gearshifting with the button on the centre console.

Using kickdown

▶ Maximum acceleration: depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point.

The automatic transmission shifts up to the gear when the maximum engine speed is reached to protect the engine from overrevving.

If you have activated manual gearshifting with the button in the centre console, the transmission does not react to the kick-down.

Glide mode function

With an anticipatory driving style, Glide mode helps you to reduce fuel consumption.

Glide mode is characterised by the following:

• Mercedes-AMG GT 63 and GT 63 S
4MATIC+: the combustion engine is disconnected from the drivetrain and the vehicle continues to roll.
- all other models: the combustion engine is switched off. All of the vehicle functions remain active.
- the symbol appears in the multifunction display.

Glide mode is activated if the following conditions are met:

• the ECO start/stop function is switched on.

• drive program is selected with the drive setting "Moderate" or "Reduced".
  • the speed is within a suitable range.
• the road's course is suitable, e.g. no steep uphill or downhill inclines or tight bends.
• Mercedes-AMG GT 43, GT 43 4MATIC+ and GT 53 4MATIC+: the charge level of the battery is sufficient.
• you are no longer depressing the accelerator or brake pedal.

Glide mode is deactivated again if one of the conditions is no longer met.

Function of the 4MATIC

4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are driven. Together with ESP and 4ETS, 4MATIC improves the traction of your vehicle whenever a driven wheel spins due to insufficient traction.

If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take account of road, weather and traffic conditions.

4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible especially for maintaining a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane.

In wintry road conditions, the maximum effect of 4MATIC can be achieved only if you use winter tyres (M+S tyres), with snow chains if necessary.

Refuelling

Refuelling the vehicle

WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from fuel

Fuels are highly flammable.

▶ Fire, naked flames, smoking and creation of sparks must be avoided.
Switch off the ignition and, if available, the stationary heater, before and while refuelling the vehicle.

WARNING Risk of injury from fuels

Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health.

Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
Do not inhale fuel vapour.
Keep children away from fuel.
Keep doors and windows closed during the refuelling process.

If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following:

Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with soap and water.
If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately.
If you swallow fuel, seek medical attention immediately. Do not induce vomiting.

Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel.

WARNING Risk of fire and explosion due to electrostatic charge

Electrostatic charge can ignite fuel vapour.

Before you open the fuel filler cap or take hold of the pump nozzle, touch the metallic vehicle body.
To avoid creating another electrostatic charge, do not get into the vehicle again during the refuelling process.

NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel

Vehicles with a petrol engine:

Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system.

Only refuel using unleaded, sulphur-free petrol that conforms to European EN 228, or an equivalent specification.

Fuel of this specification may contain up to 10% ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel.

Never refuel with one of the following fuels:

• diesel
• regular petrol with an octane number lower than 91 RON
- petrol with more than 10% ethanol by volume, e.g. E15, E20, E85, E100
- petrol with more than 3% methanol by volume, e.g. M15, M30
• petrol with additives containing metal

If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel:

▶ do not switch the ignition on.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

NOTE Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a petrol engine

If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel:

• do not switch the ignition on. Otherwise fuel can enter the engine.
  Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.

NOTE Damage to the fuel system caused by overfilled fuel tanks

Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off.

Do not get into the vehicle again during the refuelling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge could build up again.

Observe the notes on operating fluids and fuel. The recommended octane number for your vehicle can be found on the information label in the fuel filler flap.

Requirements:

• The vehicle is unlocked.

Diagram showing car door dial adjustment steps with numbered instructions for switch operation

① Fuel filler flap
2 Bracket for fuel filler cap
3 Tyre pressure table
QR code for rescue card
5 Fuel type
Press on the back area of fuel filler flap ①.
Turn the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise and remove it.

Insert the fuel filler cap from above into bracket ②.
Completely insert the pump nozzle into the tank filler neck, hook in place and refuel.
Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off.
Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn clockwise until it engages audibly.
Close fuel filler flap ①.

Parking

Parking the vehicle

A WARNING Risk of accident and injury caused by an insufficiently secured vehicle rolling away

If the vehicle is not securely parked sufficiently, it can roll away in an uncontrolled way even at a slight downhill gradient.

On uphill or downhill gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle rolls towards the kerb if it starts moving.

apply the parking brake.
▶ Switch the transmission to position P.

WARNING Risk of fire caused by hot exhaust system parts

Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite.

Park the vehicle so that no flammable material can come into contact with hot vehicle components.
In particular, do not park on dry grassland or harvested grain fields.

A WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could, in particular:

- open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users.

• get out and be struck by oncoming traffic.
• operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by:

• releasing the parking brake.
• changing the transmission position.
- starting the vehicle.
▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
Keep the vehicle key out of reach of children.

! NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to it rolling away

Always secure the vehicle against rolling away.

! NOTE Damage due to the vehicle lowering

Vehicles with AMG RIDE CONTROL + or level control: The vehicle can lower because of temperature differences or longer non-operational times. This can cause damage to parts of the body.

When stopping the vehicle and when driving off, make sure that there are no obstacles such as curbs under or in the immediate vicinity of the body.

START ENGINE

Bring the vehicle to a standstill by pressing the brake pedal.
On gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle will roll towards the kerb if it starts moving.
▶ Apply the electric parking brake.

Engage transmission position P in a stationary vehicle with the brake pedal applied (→ page 166).
Switch off the engine and the ignition by pressing the ① button.
Release the service brake slowly.
▶ Get out of the vehicle and lock it.
When you park the vehicle, you can still operate the side windows and the sliding sunroof for approximately four minutes if the driver's door is closed.

Garage door opener

Programming buttons for the garage door opener

DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning.

▶ Never leave the engine or, if present, the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient ventilation.

A WARNING Risk of injury when opening or closing a door with the garage door opener

When you operate or program the door with the integrated garage door opener, persons in the range of movement of the door may become trapped or be struck by the door.

Always make sure that nobody is within the range of movement of the door.

Requirements:

• The vehicle has been parked outside the garage or outside the range of movement of the door.
  • The engine is switched off.
  • The ignition is switched on.

The garage door opener function is always available when the ignition is switched on.

Diagram of car interior showing a smartphone connected to a device with numbered labels pointing to key components.

Press and hold button ①, ② or ③ that you wish to program. Indicator lamp ④ flashes yellow.
① It can take up to 20 seconds before the indicator lamp flashes yellow.
Release the previously pressed button. Indicator lamp 4 continues to flash yellow.

Point remote control ⑤ from a distance of 1 cm to 8 cm towards button ①, ② or ③.
Press and hold button ⑥ of remote control ⑤ until one of the following signals appears:
- Indicator lamp ④ lights up green continuously. Programming is complete.
- Indicator lamp ④ flashes green. Programming was successful. Additionally, synchronisation of the rolling code with the door system must also be carried out.

If indicator lamp ④ does not light up or green: repeat the procedure.

Release all of the buttons.

① The remote control for the door drive is not included in the scope of delivery of the garage door opener.

Synchronising the rolling code

Requirements:

• The door system uses a rolling code.
- The vehicle must be within range of the garage door or door drive.

• The vehicle as well as persons and objects are located outside the range of movement of the door.
  Press the programming button on the door drive unit. Initiate the next step within approximately 30 seconds.
  Press previously programmed button ①, ② or ③ repeatedly until the door closes. When the door closes, programming is com- flaspleted.
  i Please also read the operating instructions for the door drive.

Troubleshooting when programming the remote control

Check if the transmitter frequency of remote control ⑤ is supported.
Replace the batteries in remote control 5.
Hold remote control ⑤ at various angles from a distance of 1 cm to 8 cm front of the inside rearview mirror. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position.

Hold remote control ⑤ at the same angles at various distances in front of the inside rear view mirror. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position.
On remote controls that transmit only for a limited period, press button ⑥ on remote control ⑤ again before transmission ends.
Align the aerial line of the door opener unit with the remote control.

i Support and additional information on programming:

• On the HomeLink Hotline on (0) 08000 466 354 65 or [phone]
  • on the Internet at https://www.homelink.com

Opening or closing the garage door

Requirements:

• The corresponding button is programmed to operate the door.
  Press and hold buttons ①, ② or ③ until the door opens or closes.

If indicator lamp ④ flashes yellow after approximately 20 seconds: press and hold the previously pressed button again until the door opens or closes.

Clearing the garage door opener memory

Press and hold buttons ① and ③. Indicator lamp ④ lights up yellow.
If indicator lamp ④ flashes green: release buttons ① and ③. The entire memory has been deleted.

Electric parking brake

Function of the electric parking brake (applying automatically)

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could, in particular:

- open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users.

• get out and be struck by oncoming traffic.
• operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by:

• releasing the parking brake.
- changing the transmission position.
- starting the vehicle.

▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
Keep the vehicle key out of reach of children.

The electric parking brake is applied if the transmission is in position P and one of the following conditions is fulfilled:

• The engine is switched off.

• The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened.
  To prevent application: pull the handle of the electric parking brake.

In the following situations, the electric parking brake is also applied:

• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is bringing the vehicle to a standstill.
• The HOLD function is keeping the vehicle stationary.
• Active Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle stationary.

This is the case if one of the following conditions is also fulfilled:

• The engine is switched off.
- The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened.
• There is a system malfunction.
• The power supply is insufficient.
• The vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period.

When the electric parking brake is applied, the red Ⓗ indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.

The electric parking brake is not automatically applied if the engine is switched off by the ECO start/stop function.

Electric parking brake function (releasing automatically)

The electric parking brake is released when theter following conditions are fulfilled:

• The driver's door is closed.
• The engine is running.
- The transmission is in position D or R and you depress the accelerator pedal or you shift from transmission position P to D or R when on level ground with the driver's door closed.
- If the transmission is in position [R], the tailgate must be closed.
- The seat belt tongue is inserted into the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat.

If the seat belt tongue is not inserted into the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat, one the following conditions must be fulfilled:

- You shift from transmission position P. - You have previously driven at speeds greater than 3 km/h.

When the electric parking brake is released, the red indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

Applying/releasing the electric parking of brake manually

Applying

Diagram showing car interior with hand holding a touchscreen device and a close-up of the screen, labeled with number 1.

Push handle ①. The red (P) indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.

The electric parking brake is only securely applied if the indicator lamp is lit continuously.

Releasing

Switch on the ignition.

Pull handle ①. The red (P) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

Emergency braking

Press and hold handle ①. As long as the vehicle is driving, the Release parking brake message is displayed and the red (P) indicator lamp flashes. When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the electric parking brake is applied. The red (P) indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.

Information on collision detection on a parked vehicle

If a collision is detected when the tow-away protection is primed on a locked vehicle, you will

receive a notification in the multimedia system when you switch on the ignition.

You will receive information about the following points:

• The area of the vehicle that may have been damaged.
  • The force of the impact.

The following situations can lead to inadvertent activation:

- The parked vehicle is moved, e.g. in a two-storey garage.

i Deactivate tow-away protection in order to prevent inadvertent activation. If you deactivate tow-away protection, collision detection will also be deactivated.

System limits

Detection may be restricted in the following situations:

• the vehicle is damaged without impact, e.g. if an outside mirror is torn off or the paint is damaged by a key
• an impact occurs at low speed

• the electric parking brake is not applied

Notes on parking up the vehicle

If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer than six weeks, it may suffer damage through disuse. The 12 V battery may also be impaired or damaged by heavy discharging.

i Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Standby mode (extension of the starter battery's period out of use)

Standby mode function

This function is not available for all models. If standby mode is activated, energy loss will be minimised during extended periods of non-operation.

Standby mode is characterised by the following:

• the starter battery is preserved.
- the maximum non-operational time appears in the media display.

• the connection to online services is interrupted.
• the ATA (anti-theft alarm system) is not available.
• the interior protection and tow-away protection functions are not available.
• the function for detecting collisions on a parked vehicle is not available.

If the following conditions are fulfilled, standby mode can be activated or deactivated using multimedia system:

• The engine is switched off.
• The ignition is switched on.

Exceeding the vehicle's displayed non-operational time may cause inconvenience, i.e. it can not be guaranteed that the starter battery will reliably start the engine.

The starter battery must be charged first in the following situations:

- The vehicle's non-operational time must be extended.

• The Battery charge insufficient for standby mode message appears in the media display.
  i Standby mode is automatically deactivated when the ignition is switched on.

Activating/deactivating standby mode (parking up the vehicle)

Requirements:

- The engine is switched off.

theMultimedia system:

→ Settings → Vehicle

▶ Activate or deactivate Standby mode.
Select Yes.

Driving and driving safety systems

Driving systems and your responsibility

Your vehicle is equipped with driving systems which assist you in driving, parking and manoeuvring the vehicle. The driving systems are only aids. They are not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings and do not relieve you of your responsibility pertaining to road traffic law.

The driver is always responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Pay attention to the traffic conditions at all times and intervene when necessary. Be aware of the limitations regarding the safe use of these systems.

Driving systems can neither reduce the risk of accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor override the laws of physics. They cannot always take into account road, weather or traffic conditions.

Information on vehicle sensors and cameras

Some driving and driving safety systems use cameras as well as radar or ultrasonic sensors to monitor the area in front of, behind or next to the vehicle.

Diagram of a car's front and rear views with numbered labels pointing to specific components.

The radar sensors are integrated behind the bumpers and/or behind the Mercedes star.
① Cameras in the outside mirrors
2 Multifunction camera
3 Front camera
4 Ultrasonic sensors

5 Reversing camera

⚠ WARNING Risk of accident due to restricted detection performance of vehicle sensors and cameras

If the area around vehicle sensors or cameras is covered, damaged or dirty, certain driving and safety systems cannot function correctly. There is a risk of an accident.

Keep the area around vehicle sensors or cameras clear of any obstructions and clean.
Have damage to the bumper, radiator grille or stone chipping in the area of the front and rear windows repaired at a qualified specialist workshop.

Particularly, keep the areas around the sensors and cameras free of dirt, ice or slush ( page 310). The sensors and cameras may not be covered and the detection ranges around them must be kept free. Do not attach additional license plate brackets, advertisements, stickers,

foils or foils to protect against stone chippings in the detection range of the sensors and cameras. Make sure that there are no overhanging loads protruding into the detection range.

If there is damage to a bumper or the radiator grille, or after an impact, have the function of the sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Have damage or stone chipping in the area of the cameras on the front and rear windows repaired at a qualified specialist workshop.

Overview of driving systems and driving safety systems

• ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) (→ page 180)
• BAS (Brake Assist System) (→ page 180)
- ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) (→ page 181)
• EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribution) (→ page 185)
• STEER CONTROL (→ page 185)

• Active Brake Assist ( page 201) ^1
• Adaptive Brake Lights ( page 186)
• Cruise control (→ page 188)
- Limiter (→ page 189)
• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC ( page 19 ^2 )
• Active Speed Limit Assist ( page 196) ^3
- Route-based speed adaptation (→ page 19%)
• Active Steering Assist ( page 198) ^3
• Active Emergency Stop Assist ( page 201) ^3
• Active Stop-and-Go Assist ( page 198) ^3
• Hill Start Assist ( page 186)
• HOLD function (→ page 185)
• RACE START ( page 219)
• DRIFT MODE ( page 220)
• AMG RIDE CONTROL + (→ page 215)

• AMG RIDE CONTROL ( page 215)
• Parking Assist PARKTRONIC ( page 230)
• Reversing camera ( page 223)
• 360° camera (→ page 226)
• Active Parking Assist ( page 235)
• ATTENTION ASSIST ( page 187)
- Speed Limit Assist (country-dependent) (→ page 206)
• Traffic Sign Assist ( page 207) ^1
- Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist (→ page 210)
• Active Lane Keeping Assist ( page 212) ^1

Function of ABS

The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) regulates the brake pressure in critical driving situations:

• During braking, e.g. at full brake application or insufficient tyre traction, the wheels are prevented from locking.
  • Vehicle steerability while braking is ensured.

If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and can serve as a reminder to take extra care while driving.

Function of BAS

The Brake Assist System (BAS) supports your emergency braking situation with additional brake force.

1 This function includes subfunctions which are only available in conjunction with the Driving Assistance Package.
2 This function is only available in combination with the Driving Assistance Package.
3 This function is country-dependent and only available in conjunction with the Driving Assistance Package.

If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS is activated:

• BAS automatically boosts the brake pressure.
  • BAS can shorten the braking distance.
  • ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

Functions of ESP®

WARNING Risk of skidding if ESRs malfunctioning

If ESP ^ is malfunctioning, ESP ^ cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.

▶ Drive on carefully.
Have ESP ^® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You can select between the following modes of the Electronic Stability Program (ESP®):

• ESP® ON
• ESP® SPORT
• ESP® OFF

Characteristics when ESP ^® is activated

ESP ^® monitors and improves driving stability and traction, particularly in the following situations:

• When pulling away on wet or slippery carriageways.
• When braking.
• Vehicles with trailer hitch: in trailer operation from speeds of 65 km/h, if the vehicle/trailer combination begins to sway from side to side.
• In strong side winds when you are driving faster than 75 km/h.

ESP ^® can stabilise the vehicle by intervening in the following ways:

• One or more wheels are braked.

- The engine output is adapted according to the situation.

ESP ^® is activated every time the engine is started regardless of whether ESP ^® was in ESP SPORT or deactivated before the engine was switched off.

If the ESP warning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster, one or several vehicle wheels has reached its grip limit:

• Adapt the driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions.
• Do not deactivate ESPunder any circumstances.
• Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as is necessary.

Characteristics of ESP® SPORT

WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP SPORT is used incorrectly

When you activate ESPSPORT, there is an increased risk of skidding and having an accident.

Activate ESP® SPORT only in the circumstances described below.

When ESP® SPORT is activated, the OFF and ESP SPORT warning lamps light up continuously in the instrument cluster.

Select ESP® SPORT when the vehicle's own oversteering and understeering characteristics are desired, e.g. on cordoned off roads.

Driving with ESP SPORT or with ESP deactivated requires an extremely qualified and experienced driver.

If ESP® SPORT is activated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ESP® warning lamp on the instrument cluster flashes. ESP® then only stabilises the vehicle to a limited degree.

ESP ^® SPORT also has the following characteristics:

- ESP® only improves driving stability to a limited degree.

• ETS/4ETS traction control is still active.

• The engine's torque is only restricted to a limited degree and the drive wheels can. The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action for better traction on loose surfaces.
• ESP ^ continues to provide assistance when the brakes are firmly applied.
• Vehicles with trailer hitch: stabilisation of the vehicle/trailer combination is no longer active.
  • Crosswind Assist is no longer active.

Characteristics when ESP ^® is deactivated

WARNING Risk of skidding if ESPs deactivated

If you deactivate ESP, ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation.

▶ ESP® should only be deactivated in the following situations.

When ESP ^ is deactivated, the OFF and ESP OFF spin warning lamps light up continuously in the instrument cluster.

Deactivating ESP® has the following effects:

• Driving stability will no longer be improved.
  • The drive wheels could spin.
  • ETS/4ETS traction control is still active.
• Vehicles with trailer hitch: stabilisation of the vehicle/trailer combination is no longer active.
  • Crosswind Assist is no longer active.

Even when ESP is deactivated, you are still assisted by ESP when braking hard.

It may be best to activate ESPORT or deactivate ESP® in the following situations:

• When using snow chains.
• In deep snow.
• On sand or gravel.
  i Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action, which enhances traction.

i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. ESPill otherwise not be able to stabilise the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin.

If the ESP warning lamp lights up continuously even when ESP is activated, ESP is not available due to a malfunction.

Observe any information which is displayed in the instrument cluster:

• Indicator and warning lamps (→ page 417)
• Display messages (→ page 365)

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)

ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP®.

ETS/4ETS can improve the vehicle's traction by intervening in the following ways:

• The drive wheels are braked individually if they spin.
• More drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction.

Function of ESP® Crosswind Assist

ESP® Crosswind Assist detects sudden gusts of side wind and helps the driver to keep the vehicle in the lane:

• ESP® Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speeds between approx. 75 km/h and 200 km/h when driving straight ahead or cornering slightly.
• The vehicle is stabilised by means of individual brake application on one side.

Function of ESP ^® trailer stabilisation

WARNING Risk of accident in poor road and weather conditions

In poor road and weather conditions, the trailer stabilisation cannot prevent lurching of the vehicle/trailer combination. Trailers with a high centre of gravity may tip over before ESP® detects this.

Always adapt your driving style to suit the current road and weather conditions.

When driving with a trailer, ESPan stabilise your vehicle if the trailer begins to swerve from side to side:

• ESP® trailer stabilisation is active above speeds of 65 km/h.
• Slight swerving is reduced by means of a targeted, individual brake application on one side.
• In the event of severe swerving, the engine output is also reduced and all wheels are braked.

ESP ^® trailer stabilisation may be impaired or may not function if:

- The trailer is not connected correctly or is not detected properly by the vehicle.

Activating/deactivating ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

Multimedia system:

Settings Quick access

i ESP® can only be activated/deactivated using quick access when at least one other function is available in quick access. ESP® can otherwise be found in the Assistance menu.

Select ESP.
Select On or Off.

ESP® is deactivated if the OFF ESPOFF warning lamp lights up continuously in the instrument cluster.

Observe the information on warning lamps and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster.

Activating/deactivating ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

NOTE Plug-in hybrid

Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.

① OFF ②

To activate ESP® SPORT: press and hold display button ① until the road in button symbol ② lights up yellow.
The OFF and ESP SPORT warning lamps appear in the instrument cluster.
To deactivate ESP®: press and hold display button ① until the road in button symbol ② lights up red.
The OFF and ESP OFF warning lamps appear in the instrument cluster.
When you deactivate ESP in the drive program, AMG Dynamics automatically switches to the Master level.
To activate ESP®: press and hold display button ① until the road in button symbol ② lights up blue.

The OFF, ESP SPORT and ESP OFF warning lamps go out.

When the symbol is shown with a red! on the display button, ESPis malfunctioning.

Observe the information on warning lamps and display messages which are shown in the instrument cluster.

Function of EBD

Electronic Breakforce Distribution (EBD) is characterised by the following:

• Monitoring and regulating the brake pressure on the rear wheels.
- Improved driving stability when braking, especially on bends.

Function of STEER CONTROL

STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilisation.

This steering recommendation is given in the following situations:

• both right wheels or both left wheels are on a wet or slippery road surface when you brake
  • the vehicle starts to skid

System limits

STEER CONTROL may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:

- ESP ^10 is deactivated.

• ESP® is malfunctioning.
  • The steering is malfunctioning.
  If ESP® is malfunctioning, you will be assisted further by the electric power steering.

HOLD function

HOLD function

The HOLD function holds the vehicle at a standstill without requiring you to depress the brake pedal, e.g. while waiting in traffic.

The HOLD function is only an aid. The responsibility for the vehicle safely standing still remains with the driver.

System limits

The HOLD function is only intended to provide assistance when driving and is not a sufficient means of safeguarding the vehicle against rolling away when stationary.

• The incline must not be greater than 30%.

Activating/deactivating the HOLD function

WARNING Risk of an accident due to the HOLD function being active when you leave the vehicle

If the vehicle is only braked with the HOLD function it could, in the following situations, roll away:

• If there is a malfunction in the system or in the power supply.
• If the HOLD function is deactivated by depressing the accelerator pedal or brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
  Always secure the vehicle against rolling away before you leave it.

Requirements:

• The vehicle is stationary.
- The driver's door is closed or the seat belt the driver's side is fastened.
- The engine is running or has been automatically switched off by the ECO start/stop function.

• The electric parking brake is released.
• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated.
• The transmission is in position D, R or

Activating the HOLD function

Depress the brake pedal, and after a short time quickly depress further until the HOLD display appears in the multifunction display.
Release the brake pedal.

Deactivating the HOLD function

▶ Depress the accelerator pedal to pull away.
or

Depress the brake pedal until the HOLD display disappears from the multifunction display.

The HOLD function is deactivated in the following situations:

• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated.

- The transmission is shifted to position .

- The vehicle is secured with the electric parking brake.

In the following situations, the vehicle is held by Ntransmission position P and/or by the electric parking brake:

• The seat belt is unfastened and the driver's door is opened.
• The vehicle is switched off.
• There is a malfunction in the system or the power supply is insufficient.

Function of Hill Start Assist

Hill Start Assist holds the vehicle for a short time when pulling away on a hill under the following conditions:

• The transmission is in position D or R.
• The electric parking brake is released.

This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll away.

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to the vehicle rolling away

After a short time, Hill Start Assist no longer holds the vehicle.

Swiftly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Do not leave the vehicle when it is being held by Hill Start Assist.

Function of Adaptive Brake Lights

Adaptive Brake Lights warn following traffic in an emergency braking situation with the following actions:

• By flashing the brake lamps
• By activating the hazard warning lights

If the vehicle is braked sharply from speeds above 50 km/h, the brake lamps flash rapidly. This provides traffic travelling behind you with an even more noticeable warning.

If the vehicle is travelling at speeds of more than 70 km/h at the beginning of the brake application, the hazard warning lights switch on once

the vehicle is stationary. When you pull away again, the hazard warning lights will switch off automatically at approximately 10 km/h. You can also switch off the hazard warning lights using the hazard warning button.

ATTENTION ASSIST

Function of ATTENTION ASSIST

ATTENTION ASSIST assists you on long, monotonous journeys, e.g. on motorways and trunk roads. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests taking a break.

ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It cannot always detect fatigue or lapses in concentration in time. The system is not a substitute for a well-rested and attentive driver. On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time that allow for adequate recuperation.

You can choose between two settings:

• Standard: normal system sensitivity.

- Sensitive: higher system sensitivity. The driver is warned earlier and the attention level detected by ATTENTION ASSIST is adapted accordingly.

If drowsiness or increasing lapses in concentration are detected, the ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a break! warning appears in the Instrument Display. You can acknowledge the message and take a break where necessary. If you do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST continues to detect increasing lapses in concentration, you will be warned again after a minimum of 15 minutes.

Attention Assist Last break 02:35 h ago

You can have the following status information for ATTENTION ASSIST displayed in the assistance menu of the on-board computer:

• The length of the journey since the last break.

• The attention level determined by ATTENTION ASSIST:

• the fuller the circle, the higher the attentional level determined

• as your attention wanes, the circle in the centre of the display becomes smaller

If ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the attention level and cannot issue a warning, the System suspended message appears.

If a warning is given in the Instrument Display, the multimedia system offers to search for a rest area. You can select a rest area and start navigation to this rest area. This function can be activated and deactivated in the multimedia system.

If ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the symbol appears in the assistance graphic in the Instrument Display when the engine is running. ATTENTION ASSIST is activated automatically

when the engine is re-started. The last selected sensitivity level remains stored.

System limits

ATTENTION ASSIST is active in the 60 km/h to 200 km/h speed range.

Particularly in the following situations, ATTENTION ASSIST only functions in a restricted manner and warnings may be delayed or not occur:

• If you have been driving for less than approximately 30 minutes.
• If the road condition is poor (uneven road surface or potholes).
  • If there is a strong side wind.
• If you adopt a sporty driving style (high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration).
• If the Steering Assist function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is active.
  • If the time has been set incorrectly.
• If you change lanes and vary your speed frequently In active driving situations.

The ATTENTION ASSIST drowsiness or alertness assessment is reset and restarted when continuing the journey in the following situations:

• If you switch off the engine.
- If you unfasten your seat belt and open the driver's door (e.g. to change drivers or take a break).

Setting ATTENTION ASSIST

Multimedia system:

→ Settings ▶ Assistance
▶ Attention Assist

Setting options

▶ Select Standard, Sensitive or Off.

Suggesting a rest area

▶ Select Suggest rest area.
Activate or deactivate the function. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects fatigue or increasing lack of attention, it suggests a rest area in the vicinity.
Select the suggested rest area. You are guided to the selected rest area.

Cruise control and limiter

Function of cruise control

Cruise control regulates the speed to the value selected by the driver.

If you accelerate to overtake, for example, the stored speed is not deleted. If you remove your foot from the accelerator pedal after overtaking, cruise control will resume speed regulation back to the stored speed.

You can store any speed above 20 km/h up to the maximum design speed or up to the set winter tyre limit.

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( page 178).

Displays on the multifunction display

• (grey): cruise control is selected but not yet activated.
  • (green): cruise control is active.

A stored speed appears along with the ☑ display.

The segments extending from the current stored speed to the end of the scale, or to the set winter tyre limit, light up in the speedometer.

System limits

Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out.

Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. Take particular note of this when driving a laden vehicle. By doing so, you will make use of the engine's braking effect. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly.

Do not use cruise control in the following situations:

• In traffic situations which require frequent changes of speed, e.g. in heavy traffic, on winding roads.
• On slippery roads. Accelerating can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid.
  • If you are driving when visibility is poor.

Function of the limiter

The limiter restricts the speed of the vehicle. To reduce the speed to the set speed, the limiter applies the brakes automatically.

You can limit the speed as follows:

• Variable: for speed restrictions, e.g. in built-up areas.
• Permanent: for long-term speed restrictions, e.g. when driving in winter tyre mode.

The variable limiter is operated using the corresponding steering wheel buttons. You can store any road speed from 20 km/h to 250 km/h or up to the set winter tyre limit. You can also perform settings while the vehicle is stationary if the vehicle has been started.

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( page 178).

Displays on the multifunction display

• LIM (grey): variable limiter is selected but not yet activated.
• LIM (flashes grey): variable limiter is temporarily passive.

• LIM (green): variable limiter is activated.
A stored speed appears along with the display. The segments in the speedometer light up, up to the currently stored speed.
When the driving speed is greater than the stored speed, display LIM flashes.

Kickdown

If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown), the variable limiter switches to passive mode. The Limiter passive message appears in the multifunction display.

After completion of kickdown, the variable limiter is activated again in the following situations:

• If the vehicle speed drops below the stored speed.
  • If the stored speed is called up.
  • If you store a new speed.

Operating cruise control or the variable limiter

WARNING Risk of accident due to stored speed

If you call up the stored speed and this is lower than your current speed, the vehicle decelerates.

Take into account the traffic situation before calling up the stored speed.

Requirements:

Cruise control

• Cruise control is selected.
- ESP® must be activated, but not intervening.
• The vehicle speed is at least 20 km/h.
• The transmission is in position D.

Variable limiter

• The variable limiter is selected.

Diagram of car dashboard with control panel and navigation icons, showing settings like SET+ and SET-

To operate cruise control or the variable limiter: press the rocker switch on the steering wheel control unit up or down to the desired position.

Switching between cruise control and the variable limiter

To select cruise control: select ☑ with the right rocker switch.

To select the variable limiter: select LIM with the right rocker switch.
① Vehicles with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: the variable limiter is selected by a different button ( page 194).

Activating cruise control or the variable limiter

Press rocker switch ① up SET/+ or down SET/-. The current vehicle speed is stored and the vehicle maintains this speed (cruise control) or does not exceed it (variable limiter).

or

Select RES/P with the left rocker switch. The last stored speed is called up and the vehicle maintains this speed (cruise control) or does not exceed it (variable limiter). If the last stored speed has previously been deleted, the current vehicle speed is stored.
When you switch off the vehicle, the last speed stored is deleted.

When you activate cruise control or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the last speed stored for the variable limiter is deleted.

Increasing/decreasing the stored speed

1 km/h: press rocker switch ① up SET/+ or down SET/- to the pressure point, or press and hold (increments of 1 km/h).

or

10 km/h: press rocker switch ① up SET/+ or down SET/- beyond the pressure point, or press and hold (increments of 10 km/h).

or

Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed and press rocker switch ① up SET/+

Adopting a detected speed

▶ Activate cruise control or the variable limiter.
If a traffic sign has been detected and is displayed in the instrument cluster: select RES/® with the left rocker switch. The maximum permissible speed shown by the traffic sign is stored and the vehicle maintains or does not exceed this speed.

Deactivating cruise control or the variable limiter

▶ Select CNCL with the left rocker switch.
If you brake, deactivate ESP or if ESP intervenes, cruise control is deactivated. The variable limiter is not deactivated.

Permanent limiter

If the vehicle should never exceed a specific speed (e.g. for driving in winter tyre mode), you can set this speed with the permanent limiter.

You do this by limiting the speed between 160 km/h and 240 km/h in the multimedia system ( page 191).

Shortly before the set speed is reached, it appears in the multifunction display. When you confirm the message, display messages no longer appear until you switch off the vehicle. The speed will only be displayed again once the vehicle has been restarted or if the set speed is changed.

The permanent limiter does not switch to passive mode even during kickdown and the driven speed remains below the set speed.

Setting the speed limitation for winter tyres Multimedia system:

→ Settings → Vehicle → Winter tyres limit

▶ Select a speed or deactivate the function.

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC maintains the set speed on free-flowing roads. If vehicles in front are detected, the set distance is maintained, if necessary, until the vehicle comes to a halt. The vehicle accelerates or brakes depending on the distance to the vehicle in front and the set speed. The speed (in the range between 20 km/h and 210 km/h) and the distance to the vehicle in front are set and saved on the steering wheel.

Other features of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC:

• Adjusts the driving style depending on the selected drive program (fuel-saving, comfortable or dynamic) ( page 162)
• Reacts to stationary vehicles detected in urban speed ranges (except bicycles and motorcycles)
• Initiates acceleration to the stored speed if the turn signal indicator is switched on to change to the overtaking lane
• Takes one-sided overtaking restrictions into account on motorways or on multi-lane roads with separate carriageways (country-dependent)

If the vehicle has been braked to a standstill on multi-lane, separate carriageways by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, it can automatically follow the vehicle in front when driving off again within 30 seconds. If a critical situation is dated when driving off, a visual and acoustic warning is given indicating that the driver must now take control of the vehicle. The vehicle is not accelerated any further.

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( page 178).

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC displays in the instrument cluster

1 2 3 4 100m 50m 0m

Assistant display

Route-based speed adaptation: type of route event ( page 196)
② Vehicle in front
3 Distance indicator
④ Set specified distance

Permanent status display of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

• (white): Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC selected, specified distance set
- (white vehicle, green speedometer): Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active, specified distance set and vehicle detected
- [icon] (green): Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active, specified distance set and vehicle detected
- [@]: Route-based speed adaptation active (→ page 196).

The stored speed is shown along with the permanent status display and highlighted on the speedometer. When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is passive, the speed is greyed out.

On motorways or high-speed major roads, the green vehicle symbol is displayed cyclically when the vehicle is ready to pull away.

If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the setting of the Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the system is switched to passive mode. The suspended message appears in the multifunction display.

Display on the speedometer

The stored speed is highlighted on the speedometer. If the speed of the vehicle in front or the speed adjustment is less than the stored speed due to the route event ahead, the segments in the speedometer light up. Deactivation of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, as well as alterations to the speed due to manual or automatic adoption of the maximum permissible speed, displayed in the control feedback of the multifunction display on a single line.

System limits

The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations, for example:

- In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying light conditions.

• The windscreen in the area of the camera is dirty, misted up, damaged or covered.
  • If the radar sensors are dirty or covered.
• In multi-storey car parks or on roads with steep uphill or downhill gradients.
• If there are narrow vehicles in front, such as bicycles or motorcycles.

In addition, on slippery roads, braking or accelerating can cause one or several wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid.

Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC in these situations.

WARNING Risk of accident from acceleration or braking by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may accelerate or brake in the following cases, for example:

- If the vehicle pulls away using Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC.

• If the stored speed is called up and is considerably faster or slower than the currently driven speed.
• If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no longer detects a vehicle in front or does not react to relevant objects.
  ▶ Always carefully observe the traffic conditions and be ready to brake at all times.
  Take into account the traffic situation before calling up the stored speed.

WARNING Risk of accident due to insufficient deceleration by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle with up to 50% of the possible deceleration. If this deceleration is not sufficient, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and acoustic warning.

Adjust your speed and maintain a suitable distance from the vehicle in front.

Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take evasive action.

A WARNING Risk of accident if detection function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is impaired

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not react or has a limited reaction:

• when driving on a different lane or when changing lanes
• to pedestrians, animals, bicycles or stationary vehicles, or unexpected obstacles
  • to complex traffic conditions
  • to oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic

As a result, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations.

▶ Always observe the traffic conditions carefully and react accordingly.

Operating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Requirements:

• The electric parking brake is released.
- ESP ^ is activated and is not intervening.
• The transmission is in position D.
• The driver's door is closed.
- Check of the radar sensor system has been successfully completed.
- Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not being used to park the vehicle or to exit from a parking space.

Diagram showing car steering wheel with labeled controls and a zoomed-in view of the main panel

To operate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: press the rocker switches on the steering wheel control unit up or down to the desired position.

Switching between Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and the limiter

Press the button.

Activating the variable limiter or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

To activate without a stored speed: press rocker switch ① up SET/+ or down SET/-, or select RES/ with the left rocker switch.

or

To activate with a stored speed: select [RES]® with the left rocker switch.

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The current vehicle speed is stored and maintained (Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC) or limited (variable limiter) by the vehicle.

Adopting a detected speed limit

▶ Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC.
If a traffic sign has been detected and is displayed in the instrument cluster: select RES/ ^® with the left rocker switch. The maximum permissible speed on the traffic sign is adopted as the stored speed. The vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the stored speed.

Pulling away with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and remove your foot from the brake pedal. Select RES _1 with the left rocker switch. or
Depress the accelerator pedal briefly and firmly. The functions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC continue to be carried out.

Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

⚠ WARNING Risk of an accident due to Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC being active when you leave the driver's seat

If you leave the driver's seat while the vehicle is being braked by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC only, the vehicle can roll away.
Always deactivate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away before you leave the driver's seat.

Select CNCL with the left rocker switch.
If you brake, deactivate ESP or if ESP intervenes, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated.

Increasing/decreasing the stored speed

1 km/h: press rocker switch ① up SET/+ or down SET/- to the pressure point, or press and hold (increments of 1 km/h).
or
10 km/h: press rocker switch ① up SET/+ or down SET/- beyond the pressure point, or press and hold (increments of 10 km/h).
or
Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed and press rocker switch ① up SET/+

Changing the specified distance to the vehicle in front

To reduce the specified distance: press the right rocker switch up (☐).
To increase the specified distance: press the right rocker switch down (☐).

Function of Active Speed Limit Assist

If speed limit change between 20 km/h and 130 km/h is detected and the automatic adoption of speed limits is active, it will be automatically adopted as the stored speed ( page 209).

The driven speed is adjusted when the vehicle is level with the traffic sign at the latest. In the case of signs indicating entry into an urban area, the speed is adapted according to the speed permitted within the urban area. The speed limit display in the Instrument Display is always updated when the vehicle is level with the traffic sign.

If there is no speed restriction on an unlimited stretch of road (e.g. on a motorway), the recommended speed is automatically adopted as the stored speed. The system uses the speed stored on an unlimited stretch of road as the recommended speed. If you do not alter the stored speed on an unlimited stretch of road, the recommended speed is 130 km/h.

If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has been put into passive mode by pressing the accelerator pedal, only speed limits which are higher than the set speed are adopted.

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( page 178).

System limits

The system limits of Traffic Sign Assist apply to the detection of traffic signs ( page 207).

Speed limits below 20 km/h are not automatically adopted by the system as the stored speed. Temporary speed restrictions (e.g. for a certain time or due to weather conditions) cannot be properly detected by the system. The maximum permissible speed applying to a vehicle with a trailer is not detected by the system.

Adjust the speed in these situations.

WARNING Risk of accident due to Active Speed Limit Assist adapting the vehicle's speed

The speed adopted by Active Speed Limit Assist may be too high or incorrect in some individual cases, such as:

• at speed limits below 20 km/h

• in wet conditions or in fog
- when towing a trailer
▶ Ensure that the driven speed complies with traffic regulations.
Adjust the driving speed to suit current traffic and weather conditions.

Function of route-based speed adaptation

When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated, the vehicle speed will be adapted accordingly to the route events ahead. Depending on the drive program selected, the vehicle negotiates a route event ahead in an economical, comfortable or dynamic manner. When the route event has been passed, the vehicle accelerates again to the stored speed. The set distance to the vehicle in front, vehicles detected ahead and speed restrictions ahead are taken into account.

You can activate and deactivate route-based speed adaptation in the multimedia system ( page 198).

The following route events are taken into account:

• Bends
  • T-junctions, roundabouts and toll stations
• Turns and exits
• Traffic jams ahead (only with Live Traffic Information)

When the toll station is reached, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC adopts the speed as the stored speed.

Also, the speed is reduced if the turn signal indicator to change lanes is switched on and one of the following situations is detected:

• Turning off at junctions
• Driving on slowing-down lanes
• Driving on lanes adjacent to slowing-down lanes

The driver is responsible for choosing the right speed and observing other road users. This applies in particular to junctions, roundabouts and traffic lights, as route-based speed adaptation does not brake the vehicle to a standstill.

When route guidance is active, the first speed adjustment is carried out automatically. If the turn signal indicator is switched on, the selected route is confirmed and further speed adjustment is activated.

Speed adaptation is cancelled in the following cases:

• If the turn signal indicator is switched off before the route event.
• If the driver depresses the accelerator or brake pedal during the process.

System limits

Route-based speed adaptation does not take right of way regulations into account. The driver is responsible for complying with road traffic regulations and driving at a suitable speed. The speed adaptation made by the system may not always be suitable, particularly in the following situations:

• the road's course not clearly visible
- road narrowing
• varying maximum permissible speeds in individual lanes

• wet road surfaces, snow or ice
• when towing a trailer

In these situations the driver must intervene accordingly.

⚠ WARNING Risk of accident in spite of route-based speed adaptation

Route-based speed adaptation can malfunction or be temporarily unavailable in the following situations:

• If the driver does not follow the calculated route
  • If map data is not up-to-date or available
  • In the event of roadworks
  • In bad weather or road conditions
  • If the accelerator pedal is depressed
• In the event of electronically displayed speed limitations

Adapt the speed to the traffic situation.

Setting route-based speed adaptation

Requirements:

• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated.
• ECO Assist is active.

Multimedia system:

Settings ▶ Assistance

▶ Route-based speed adapt.

Activate or deactivate the function. When the function is active, the vehicle speed is adjusted depending on the route events ahead.
i Further information on the route-based speed adaptation ( page 196).

Function of Active Traffic Jam Assist

Active Traffic Jam Assist helps you when in traffic jams on multi-lane roads with separate carriageways by automatically pulling away within 60 seconds and with moderate steering manoeuvres. It orients itself using the vehicle in front and lane markings. Active Traffic Jam Assist automatically maintains a safe distance from the vehicle in front and vehicles cutting in.

Active Traffic Jam Assist requires you, as the driver, to keep your hands on the steering wheel at all times so that you are able to intervene at any time to correct the course of the vehicle and keep it in lane. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( page 178).

Active Traffic Jam Assist activates automatically as soon as all of the requirements are met: The status display appears in the instrument cluster when the function is active.

Requirements:

• You are in a traffic jam on a motorway or high-speed major road.
• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated and active ( page 194).
  • Active Brake Assist is available ( page 201).
  • Active Steering Assist is activated and active ( page 200).
  • Active Traffic Jam Assist is activated ( page 198).
  • You are travelling no faster than 60 km/h.

System limits

The system limitations of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist apply to Active Traffic Jam Assist ( page 198).

Activating/deactivating Active Traffic Jam Assist

Multimedia system:

Active Steering Assist

Function of Active Steering Assist

Active Steering Assist is only available up to a speed of 210 km/h. The system helps you to stay in the centre of the lane by means of moderate steering interventions. Depending on the speed driven, Active Steering Assist uses the vehicles ahead and lane markings as a reference.

Depending on the country, in the lower speed range Active Steering Assist can use the surrounding traffic as a reference. If necessary, Active Steering Assist can then also provide assistance when driving outside the centre of the lane, for example, to form a rescue lane.

If the detection of lane markings and vehicles ahead is impaired, Active Steering Assist switches to passive mode. The system provides no support in this case.

Status display of Active Steering Assist in the multifunction display

• (grey): activated and passive
• (green): activated and active
• (red): system limits detected
- [A] (white, red hands): "hands on the steering wheel" prompt

During the transition from active to passive status, the symbol is shown as enlarged and flashing. Once the system is passive, the symbol is shown as the multifunction display.

(i) Depending on the selected vehicle settings, Active Steering Assist may be unavailable.

Steering and touch detection

The driver is required to keep their hands on the steering wheel at all times and be able to intervene at any time to correct the course of the vehicle and keep it in lane. The driver must expect a change from active to passive mode or vice versa at any time.

Diagram of a car steering wheel with hands holding the head, no text or symbols present

If the system detects that the driver has not steered the vehicle for a considerable period of time or has removed their hands from the steering wheel, display ① appears. If the driver still does not steer the vehicle, a warning tone

sounds in addition to the visual warning message.

If the driver does not react to this warning for a considerable period, an emergency stop is initiated ( page 201).

The warning is not issued or is stopped when the driver gives confirmation to the system:

• The driver steers the vehicle.
- Depending on the country: the driver presses a steering wheel button or operates Touch Control

If Active Steering Assist detects that a system limit has been reached, a visual warning is issued and a warning tone sounds.

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( page 178).

System limits

Active Steering Assist has a limited steering torque for lateral guidance. In some cases, the steering intervention is not sufficient to keep the vehicle in the lane or to drive through exits.

The system may be impaired or may not function the system does not provide assistance in the following instances: following conditions:

• There is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, greatly varying light conditions or strong shadows on the carriageway.
• There is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections.
  • Insufficient road illumination.
• The windscreen is dirty, misted up, damaged or covered in the vicinity of the camera, e.g. by a sticker.
• No, or several, unclear lane markings are present for one lane, or the markings change quickly, for example, in a construction area or junctions.
• The lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow.
• If the distance to the vehicle in front is too short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected.
  • The road is narrow and winding.

• There are obstacles on the lane or projecting out into the lane, such as object markers.

• On tight bends and when turning.

• When crossing junctions.
• At roundabouts or toll stations.
• When towing a trailer.
• When the tyre pressure is too low.

WARNING Risk of accident if Active

Steering Assist unexpectedly stops functioning

If the system limits of Active Steering Assist are reached there is no guarantee that the system will remain active or will keep the vehicle in lane.

Always keep your hands on the steering wheel and observe the traffic carefully.
Always steer the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions.

WARNING Risk of accident if Active

Steering Assist unexpectedly intervenes

The detection of lane markings and objects may malfunction and cause unexpected steering interventions.

Steer according to traffic conditions.

Activating/deactivating Active Steering Assist

Requirements:

• ESP® is activated, but is not intervening.
  • Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated.

Multimedia system:

Act. Steer. Asst.

Function of Active Emergency Stop Assist

Diagram of a car interior with hands holding a steering wheel, no text or symbols present

If the system detects that the driver has not steered the vehicle for a considerable period of time or has removed their hands from the steering wheel, display ① appears in the multif tion display. If the driver still does not steer the vehicle, or gives no confirmation to the system, a warning tone sounds in addition to the visual warning message.

If the driver still does not respond to the warning, the Beginning emergency stop message appears in the multifunction display. If the driver still does not respond, Active Distance Assist

DISTRONIC reduces the speed. The vehicle is decelerated in stages to a standstill.

Depending on the country, at speeds below 60 km/h the hazard warning lights switch on automatically.

When the vehicle is stationary, the following actions are carried out:

• The vehicle is secured with the electric parking brake.
  • Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is ended
  • The vehicle is unlocked.
• If possible, an emergency call is placed to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre

^c The driver can cancel the deceleration at any time by performing one of the following actions:

• Steering
• Braking or accelerating
• Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Active Brake Assist

Function of Active Brake Assist

Active Brake Assist consists of the following functions:

• Distance warning function
• Autonomous braking function
• Situation-dependent braking assistance
- Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: Evasive Steering Assist and cornering function

Active Brake Assist can help you to minimise the risk of a collision with vehicles, cyclists or pedestrians or to reduce the effects of such a collision.

If Active Brake Assist has detected a risk of collision, a warning tone sounds and the △ distance warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.

If you do not react to the warning, autonomous braking can be initiated in critical situations. In especially critical situations, Active Brake Assist can initiate autonomous braking directly.

In this case, the warning lamp and warning tone occur simultaneously with the braking application.

If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situation or apply the brake during autonomous braking, situation-dependent braking assistance occurs. The brake pressure increases up to maximum full-stop braking if necessary.

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( page 178).

Security warning icon with car silhouette and warning symbols including '1', '△', and 'i'

If autonomous braking or situation-dependent braking assistance has occurred, display ①

appears in the multifunction display and then automatically goes out after a short time.

WARNING Risk of an accident caused by limited detection performance of Active Brake Assist

Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations.

Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely on Active Brake Assist alone. Active Brake Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for maintaining a sufficiently safe distance to the vehicle in front, vehicle speed and for braking in good time.
Be prepared to brake or swerve if necessary.

Also observe the system limits of Active Brake Assist.

The individual subfunctions are available in various speed ranges:

The distance warning function can issue a warning in the following situations:

• From approximately 30 km/h, if over several seconds the distance maintained to the vehicle travelling in front is insufficient for the driven speed, the △ distance warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.
• From approximately 7 km/h, if your vehicle is critically close to a vehicle, cyclist or pedestrian, you will hear an intermittent warning tone and the distance warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.

Brake immediately or take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so and the traffic situation allows this.

Distance warning function (vehicles without Driving Assistance Package)

The distance warning function can aid you in the following situations with an intermittent warning tone and a warning lamp:

• at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching vehicles ahead
• at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching stationary vehicles, pedestrians walking in the direction of travel and cyclists ahead
• at speeds up to approximately 60 km/h when approaching crossing pedestrians

Distance warning function (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package)

The distance warning function can aid you in the following situations with an intermittent warning tone and a warning lamp:

• at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching vehicles ahead

• at speeds up to approximately 100 km/h when approaching stationary vehicles

• at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching moving pedestrians and cyclists ahead

• at speeds up to approximately 70 km/h when approaching stationary pedestrians, crossing vehicles and stationary and crossing cyclists

Autonomous braking function (vehicles without Driving Assistance Package)

If the vehicle is travelling at speeds above approximately 7 km/h, the autonomous braking function may intervene in the following situations:

• at speeds up to approximately 200 km/h when approaching vehicles ahead
• at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching cyclists ahead
• at speeds up to approximately 60 km/h when approaching stationary vehicles or moving pedestrians

Autonomous braking function (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package)

If the vehicle is travelling at speeds above approximately 7 km/h, the autonomous braking function may intervene in the following situations:

• at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching vehicles ahead
• at speeds up to approximately 100 km/h when approaching stationary vehicles
• at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching cyclists ahead
• at speeds up to approximately 70 km/h when approaching stationary and moving pedestrians, crossing vehicles and stationary and crossing cyclists

Situation-dependent braking assistance (vehicles without Driving Assistance Package)

The situation-dependent braking assistance can intervene from a speed of approximately 7 km/h in the following situations:

• at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching vehicles ahead
• at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching stationary vehicles and vehicles ahead
• at speeds up to approximately 60 km/h when approaching moving pedestrians

Situation-dependent braking assistance (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package)

The situation-dependent braking assistance can intervene from a speed of approximately 7 km/h in the following situations:

• at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching vehicles ahead

• at speeds up to approximately 100 km/h when approaching stationary vehicles

• at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching cyclists ahead

• at speeds up to approximately 60 km/h when approaching stationary and moving pedestrians, crossing vehicles and stationary and crossing cyclists

Cancelling a brake application of Active Brake Assist

You can cancel a brake application of Active Brake Assist at any time by:

• sharply depressing the accelerator pedal or with kickdown
  • releasing the brake pedal

Active Brake Assist may cancel the brake application when one of the following conditions is fulfilled:

• You manoeuvre to avoid the obstacle.
  • There is no longer a risk of collision.
• An obstacle is no longer detected in front of your vehicle.

Evasive Steering Assist (only vehicles with Driving Assistance Package)

Evasive Steering Assist has the following characteristics:

• The ability to detect stationary or moving pedestrians.
• Assistance through power-assisted steering if it detects a swerving manoeuvre.
• Activation by an abrupt steering movement during a swerving manoeuvre.
• Assistance during swerving and straightening of the vehicle.
• Reaction from a speed of approximately 20 km/h up to a speed of approximately 70 km/h.

You can prevent the assistance at any time by actively steering.

Cornering function (only vehicles with Driving Assistance Package)

If a danger of collision from an oncoming vehicle is detected when turning across an oncoming lane, autonomous braking can be initiated at

speeds below 15 km/h before you have left the lane in which you are driving.

WARNING Risk of accident despite Evasive Steering Assist

Evasive Steering Assist cannot always recognise objects or complex traffic situations clearly.

Moreover, the steering support provided by Evasive Steering Assist is not sufficient to avoid a collision.

▶ Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely on Evasive Steering Assist alone.
Be prepared to brake or swerve if necessary.
End the support by actively steering in non-critical situations.
▶ Drive at an appropriate speed if there are pedestrians close to the path of your vehicle.

System limits

Full system performance is not available for a few seconds after switching on the ignition or after driving off.

If Active Brake Assist is impaired or inoperative due to a malfunction, the warning lamp appears in the multifunction display.

The system may be impaired or may not function, particularly in the following situations:

• In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying light conditions.
• If the sensors are dirty, misted up, damaged or covered.
• If the sensors are impaired due to interference from other radar sources, e.g. strong radar reflections in multi-storey car parks.
• If a loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre has been detected and displayed.
• In complex traffic situations where objects cannot always be clearly identified.
• If pedestrians or vehicles move quickly into the sensor detection range.

• If pedestrians are hidden by other objects.
- If the typical outline of a pedestrian cannot be distinguished from the background.
- If a pedestrian is not detected as such, e.g. due to special clothing or other objects.
• If the driver's seat belt is not fastened.
- On bends with a tight radius.

The Active Brake Assist sensors adjust automatically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered. Active Brake Assist is unavailable or only partially available during the teach-in process.

Setting Active Brake Assist

Requirements:

• The ignition is switched on.

Multimedia system:

Settings Assistance

▶ Active Brake Assist

Select the desired setting. The setting is retained when the drive system is next started.

Deactivating Active Brake Assist

① It is recommended that you always leave Active Brake Assist activated.

Select Off. The distance warning function, the autonomous braking function and the Evasive Sing Assist are deactivated. When the vehicle is next started, the middle setting is automatically selected.

If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the symbol appears in the status bar of the multifunction display.

Speed Limit Assist

Function of Speed Limit Assist

Speed Limit Assist detects speed limits with multifunction camera and displays them in the instrument cluster and optionally in the head-up display. The camera also detects speed limits with a restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. when wet). The system detects stop signs, thereby preventing the engine from being switched off by the ECO start/stop function.

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( page 178).

Warning when the maximum permissible speed is exceeded

The system can warn you if you unintentionally exceed the maximum permissible speed. To do this, you can specify in the multimedia system by how much the maximum permissible speed can be exceeded before a warning is issued. You can specify whether the warning is to be just a visual warning or an acoustic one as well.

Display in the Instrument Display

The illustrations show the Instrument Display in the widescreen cockpit.

graph TD
    A["1"] --> B["120"]
    B --> C["80"]
    C --> D["Software unit"]
    D --> E["3"]

① Permissible speed
2 Permissible speed when there is a restriction
3 Additional sign with restriction

Speed Limit Assist is not available in all countries. If it is unavailable, the following display is shown in the speedometer:

System limits

The system may be impaired or may not func in the following situations:

• If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, if there are highly variable shade conditions or in rain, snow, fog or heavy spray.
• If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections.
• If the windscreen in the area of the multifunction camera is dirty, or if the camera misted up, damaged or covered.
• If the traffic signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to dirt or snow, because they are covered, or due to insufficient lighting.
• If you turn sharply when passing traffic signs outside the camera's field of vision.

Setting Speed Limit Assist

;Multimedia system:

Adjusting the type of warning

▶ Select Visual & audible, Visual or None.

Adjusting the warning threshold

This value determines the speed at which a warning is issued when exceeded.

is▶ Select Warning threshold.

Set the desired speed.

If one of the following systems is activated, the speed detected can be manually adopted as the speed limit:

• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
- Cruise control
- Variable limiter

Further information ( page 194).

Traffic Sign Assist

Function of Traffic Sign Assist

Traffic Sign Assist detects traffic signs with the multifunction camera ( page 178). It assists you by displaying detected speed limits and overtaking restrictions in the instrument cluster.

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( page 178).

Since Traffic Sign Assist also uses the data stored in the navigation system, it can update the display in the following situations without detecting traffic signs.

If the system detects that you are driving onto a section of road in the wrong direction of travel, it triggers a warning.

The camera also detects traffic signs with a restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. when wet). These are only displayed if a restriction applies or if the system cannot clearly determine whether the restriction applies.

Warning when the maximum permissible speed is exceeded

The system can warn you if you unintentionally exceed the maximum permissible speed. To do this, you can specify in the multimedia system by how much the maximum permissible speed can be exceeded before a warning is issued. You can specify whether the warning is to be just a visual warning or an acoustic one as well.

Display in the Instrument Display

graph TD
    A["1"] --> B["120"]
    B --> C["80"]
    C --> D["after user"]
    D --> E["3"]

Instrument Display in the widescreen cockpit

① Maximum permissible speed
② Maximum permissible speed when there is restriction
③ Additional sign with restriction

Vehicles with a standard Instrument Display: a + symbol next to a traffic sign in the Instrument Display indicates that additional traffic signs have been detected. These can also be displayed in the media display and optionally in the head-up display.

If Traffic Sign Assist cannot determine the maximum permissible speed (e.g. due to missing signs), the following display appears in the Instrument Display:

This is displayed continuously if the vehicle is in a country where Traffic Sign Assist is not supported. Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all countries.

Also observe the information on display messages in Traffic Sign Assist ( page 365).

Warning when approaching pedestrian crossings (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package)

The system can warn you if you approach a pedestrian crossing with your vehicle. The Watch for pedestrians message appears in the instrument cluster.

The warning occurs only if appropriate traffic signs or lane markings are detected and pedestrians are present in the danger zone.

System limits

The system may be impaired or may not functi particularly in the following situations:

• If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, if there are highly variable shade conditions or in rain, snow, fog or heavy spray.
• If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections.
• If the windscreen in the area of the multifunction camera is dirty, or if the camera misted up, damaged or covered.
• If the traffic signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to dirt or snow, because they are covered, or due to insufficient lighting.
• If the information in the navigation system's digital map is incorrect or out-of-date.
• If the signs are ambiguous, e.g. traffic signs on construction sites or in adjacent lanes.
• If you turn sharply when passing traffic signs outside the camera's field of vision.

Setting Traffic Sign Assist

Requirements:

- Only vehicles with Driving Assistance Package:

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and ECO Assist must be activated for the automatic adoption of speed limits.

Multimedia system:

Activating or deactivating automatic adoption of speed limits (only vehicles with Driving Assistance Package)

▶ Select Adopt limit.
▶ Activate or deactivate the function. The speed limits detected by Traffic Sign Assist are automatically adopted by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC.
If one of the following systems is activated, the detected speed can be manually adopted as the speed limit:

• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

• Cruise control
• Variable limiter

Further information ( page 194).

Displaying detected traffic signs in the media display

▶ Select Display in head unit.
▶ Activate or deactivate the function.

Setting the type of warning

▶ Select Visual & audible, Visual or Off.

Setting the warning threshold

This value determines the speed at which a warning is issued when exceeded.

▶ Select Warning threshold.
Set the desired speed.

Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning

Function of Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning

Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist use two lateral, rear-facing radar sensors to monitor the area up to 40 m behind and 3 m next to your vehicle.

If a vehicle is detected at speeds above approximately 12 km/h and this vehicle subsequently enters the monitoring range directly next to your vehicle, the warning lamp in the outside mirror lights up red.

Permanent status display in the instrument cluster:

• (grey): system is activated but inoperative
- (green): system is activated and tional

If a vehicle is detected close to your vehicle and you switch on the turn signal indicator in the corresponding direction, a double warning tone sounds and the red warning lamp in the outside mirror flashes. If the turn signal indicator remains switched on, all other detected vehicles are indicated only by the flashing of the red warning lamp.

If you overtake a vehicle quickly, no warning is given.

⚠ WARNING Risk of accident despite Blind Spot Assist

Blind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles approaching and overtaking you at a greatly different speed.

Blind Spot Assist cannot warn drivers in this situation.

▶ Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and maintain a safe distance at the side of the vehicle.

opera- Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( page 178).

Exit warning

The exit warning is an additional function of Blind Spot Assist and can warn vehicle occupants about approaching vehicles when leaving the vehicle when stationary.

⚠ WARNING Risk of accident despite exit warning

The exit warning neither reacts to stationary objects nor to vehicles approaching you at a greatly differing speed.

The exit warning cannot warn drivers in these situations.

▶ Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation when opening the doors and make sure there is sufficient clearance.

If there is a vehicle in the monitoring range, this is indicated in the outside mirror. If a vehicle occupant opens the door on the side with the warning, a warning tone sounds and the warning lamp in the outside mirror starts to flash.

This additional function is only available when Blind Spot Assist is active. When the exit warning is activated, it can warn vehicle occupants for up to three minutes after switching the igni-

tion off. The exit warning is no longer available once the warning lamp in the outside mirror flashes three times.

The exit warning is only an aid and not a substitute for the attention of vehicle occupants. The responsibility for opening and closing the doors and for leaving the vehicle remains with the vehicle occupants.

System limits

Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist may be limited in the following situations, in particular:

• if there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured
• in poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow
• if there are narrow vehicles, e.g. bicycles or motorbikes
  • if the road has very wide or narrow lanes
• if vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane

Warnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar continuous lane borders. Always make sure that there is sufficient distance to the side for other traffic or obstacles.

Warnings may be interrupted when driving alongside long vehicles, for example lorries, for a prolonged time.

Blind Spot Assist is not operational when reverse gear is engaged.

Blind Spot Assist and the exit warning are not operational when a trailer is coupled to the vehicle and the electrical connection has been correctly established.

The exit warning may be limited in the following situations:

• when the sensors are covered by adjacent vehicles in narrow parking spaces
• when people approach the vehicle
• in the event of stationary or slowly moving objects

Function of brake application (Active Blind Spot Assist)

If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a side impact in the monitoring range, a course-correcting brake application is carried out. This is designed to help you avoid a collision.

The course-correcting brake application is available in the speed range between approximately 30 km/h and 200 km/h.

WARNING Risk of accident despite brake application of Active Blind Spot Assist

A course-correcting brake application cannot always prevent a collision.

Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns you or makes a course-correcting brake application.
Always maintain a safe distance at the sides.

Top-down view of two cars with a circular icon labeled '1' and a play button (no text or symbols on the cars themselves)

If a course-correcting brake application occurs, the red warning lamp flashes in the outside mirror and a warning tone sounds. In addition, a display ① indicating the danger of a side collision appears in the multifunction display. In rare cases, the system may make an inappropriate brake application. This brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction or accelerate.

System limits

Note the system limitations of Active Blind Spot Assist; you may otherwise not recognise the dangers ( page 210).

Either a course-correcting brake application appropriate to the driving situation, or none at all, may occur in the following situations:

• Vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, are located on both sides of your vehicle.
  • A vehicle approaches too closely on the side.
• You have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds.
• You brake or accelerate significantly.
• A driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP ^ or Active Brake Assist.
• ESP® is deactivated.
• A loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre detected.
• You are driving with a trailer and the electrical connection to the trailer hitch has been correctly established.

Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist

Multimedia system:

Settings

Assistance

Activate or deactivate Blind Spot Assist.

or

Activate or deactivate Act. Blind Spot Assist.

Active Lane Keeping Assist

Function of Active Lane Keeping Assist

Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of the multifunction camera ( page 178). It serves to protect you against unintentionally leaving your lane. You will be warned by vibration pulses in the steering wheel and guided by a course-correcting brake application back into your lane.

Active Lane Keeping Assist is available in the speed range between 60 km/h and 200 km/h.

Active Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Active Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane.

The status of Active Lane Keeping Assist is displayed in the on-board computer:

• // (green): Active Lane Keeping Assist is active and operating.
• // (grey): Active Lane Keeping Assist is active but not operating.
  • ☐: Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated or there is a malfunction.

Top-down view of a car with a numbered indicator (1) and control buttons, no visible text or symbols on the car itself.

If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, display ① appears in the multifunction display.

The system does not apply the brake if you activate the turn signal indicator.

Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: if the system detects an obstacle, such as another vehicle in the adjacent lane, it will apply the brake regardless of the turn signal indicator. You are warned by vibrations in the steering wheel in the following circumstances:

Active Lane Keeping Assist detects a lane marking.
- A front wheel drives over this lane marking.

Conditions for a course-correcting brake application (vehicles without Driving Assistance Package)

Depending on the setting, a course correcting brake application occurs in the following situations ( page 215).

The availability of this setting is dependent on the country. If the function is activated in countries in which this setting is not available, a lane-correcting brake application is initiated in the following situations:

Lane markings were detected on both sides of the lane. The front wheel drives over a continuous lane marking.

Standard Setting

• Lane markings were detected on both sides of the lane. The front wheel drives over a continuous lane marking.
• A lane marking and the edge of a firm road surface were detected. The front wheel drives over a lane marking on the edge of the firm road surface.
• A lane marking and an oncoming vehicle were detected. The front wheel drives over the lane marking.

Sensitive Setting

• All situations described under the Standard setting.
• A continuous lane marking was detected and driven over with the front wheel.

i A brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction.

Conditions for a course-correcting brake application (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package)

Depending on the setting, a course correcting brake application occurs in the following situations ( page 215).

The availability of this setting is dependent on the country. If the function is activated in countries in which this setting is not available, a lane-correcting brake application is initiated in all situations described under Sensitive.

Standard Setting

- A lane marking and an approaching vehicle, an overtaking vehicle or vehicles driving parallel to your vehicle were detected in the adjacent lane. The front wheel drives over the lane marking.

Sensitive Setting

• The situations described under the Standard setting.
• A continuous lane marking was detected and driven over with the front wheel.

A brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction.

System limits

No lane-correcting brake application occurs in the following situations:

• You clearly and actively steer, brake or accelerate.
• If a driving safety system intervenes, such as ESP ^ , Active Brake Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist.
• You have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration.
• When ESP ^ is deactivated.
• When driving with a trailer, the electrical connection to the trailer has been correctly established.
• If a loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre has been detected and displayed.

If you deactivate the Active Lane Keeping Assist warning and the lane markings cannot be clearly

detected, it is possible that no lane correcting brake application takes place ( page 215).

The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations:

• If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, if there are highly variable shade conditions or in rain, snow, fog or heavy spray.
• If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflections.
• If the windscreen in the area of the multifunction camera is dirty, or if the camera is misted up, damaged or covered.
• If there are no lane markings, or several unclear lane markings are present for one lane, e.g. around roadworks.
• If the lane markings are worn, dark or covered.

• If the distance from the vehicle in front is too short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected.

• If the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge.

• If the carriageway is very narrow and winding.
• Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: if the radar sensors in the rear bumper are dirty or covered in snow and an obstacle is detected in your lane, no lane-correcting brake application takes place.

Activating/deactivating Active Lane Keeping Assist

▶ Activate or deactivate the function.

Setting Active Lane Keeping Assist

Multimedia system:

Setting the sensitivity

The availability of this function is dependent on the country.
▶ Select Standard, Sensitive or Off.

Activating or deactivating the haptic warning

▶ Select Warning. Activate or deactivate the function.

AMG RIDE CONTROL

Characteristics of AMG RIDE CONTROL

AMG RIDE CONTROL is an electronically controlled damping system for improved driving comfort and increased driving safety.

The damping is adjusted individually to each wheel and depends on the following factors:

• driving style, e.g. sporty
  • road condition, e.g. bumps

- the suspension setting selected: COMFORT, SPORT or SPORT PLUS

AMG RIDE CONTROL includes the following components and functions:

• electronically controlled damping system
- ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System with constant damping force adjustment)
• DYNAMIC SELECT switch
• the suspension setting button (→ page 216)

AMG RIDE CONTROL +

Function of AMG RIDE CONTROL +

AMG RIDE CONTROL + is an air suspension system with variable damping for improved driving characteristics. The all-round level control system ensures the best possible suspension and constant ground clearance, even with a laden vehicle. When driving at speed, the vehicle is lowered automatically to improve driving safety and to reduce fuel consumption. You also have the option of manually adjusting the vehicle level.

The damping is set individually for each wheel and is affected by the following factors:

• Driving style, e.g. sporty
  • Road condition, e.g. bumps
• The individual selection of Sport, Sport + or COMFORT

AMG RIDE CONTROL + includes the following components and functions:

• Air suspension with variable spring rate and automatic level control
- speed-dependent lowering to reduce fuel consumption
- Manually selectable high-level setting for greater ground clearance
- ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System with constant damping force adjustment)
• DYNAMIC SELECT switch and level button
- Suspension setting button

Suspension setting and vehicle level per drive program

Drive programs 📄, 📅 and ⓢ:

• The suspension setting is comfortable (☐ and ☐).
  • The suspension setting is firmer (S).
  • The vehicle is set to the normal level.
• When driving at speeds of 210 km/h or above, the vehicle is lowered.
• When driving at speeds below 120 km/h, the vehicle is raised again.

Drive programs S ^+ and :

• The suspension setting is even firmer.
• The vehicle is set to the low level.
- The vehicle is not lowered any further if you are travelling at higher speeds.

When the engine is started again, the COM-FORT setting is activated automatically.

Selecting the suspension setting

You can select from three different suspension settings:

- COMFORT ensures a comfortable suspension setting. Select this suspension setting if you prefer a comfortable driving style.

- SPORT ensures a firmer suspension setting. Select this suspension setting when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country roads.

e SPORT PLUS ensures a very firm suspension setting.

Diagram showing a car interior with labeled buttons and a sensor icon, likely from a diagnostic or safety system interface.

Press display button ①.

The display button shows currently selected suspension setting ②:

•
•
•

C (blue): COMFORT

S (yellow): SPORT

S+ (red): SPORT PLUS

The selected suspension setting is shown in the multifunction display as a message.

Setting the vehicle level

WARNING Risk of accident because vehicle level is too high

Driving characteristics may be impaired. The vehicle can drift outwards, for example, when steering or cornering.

Choose a vehicle level which is suited to the driving style and the road surface conditions.

WARNING Risk of entrapment from vehicle lowering

When lowering the vehicle, other people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tyres or underneath the vehicle.

Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when the vehicle is being lowered.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due to the vehicle lowering

Vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL or level control system: when you unload luggage or leave the vehicle, the vehicle first rises slightly and then returns to the set level shortly afterwards.

You or anyone else in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody could thus become trapped.

The vehicle can also be lowered after being locked.

When leaving the vehicle, make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody.

This function is only available for vehicles with AMG RIDE CONTROL + (air suspension) ( page 215).

Requirements:

• The vehicle has been started.
- The vehicle must not be moving faster than 65 km/h.

Multimedia system:

→ Settings ▶ Quick access

Raising the vehicle

Select . The vehicle is raised to the high level.

Your selection is saved.

The vehicle lowers itself back down to the height of the most recently active drive program:

• When driving faster than 120 km/h.
• When driving between 80 km/h and 120 km/h for approximately three minutes.
• After selecting a drive program using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch.

Lowering the vehicle

Select 📄. The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the last active drive program.

Function of the AMG steering-wheel buttons

Diagram of a car interior with numbered components for identification

The AMG steering-wheel buttons are two additional control elements on the steering wheel.

You can assign two vehicle functions of your choice to the left control element. You can change between the available functions by pressing the display switches ② repeatedly. The display switch ② shows the currently selected functions.

The following functions are available:

• ESP ^® (→ page 181)
  • AMG RIDE CONTROL + (→ page 215)

• AMG Performance exhaust system ( page 162)
• manual gearshifting ( page 167)
• AMG Dynamics ( page 162)
• rear wing (→ page 221)
• ECO start/stop function (see the vehicle's Operating Instructions)

If you have assigned a function to one of the display switches ②, you can operate this function with the corresponding button ①.

The assignment of the display switch ② remains stored even after a new engine start, but the operating status of the respective function is reset to the basic setting.

You can change between the drive programs with the control knob ③. The drive program selected appears in the display switch ④. Press the display switch ④ to go directly to the drive program ① (→ page 162).

Plug-in Hybrid: depending on the drive program, you can also set the strength of the recuperation with the control knob ③. Observe the Supplement.

RACE START

Information on RACE START

RACE START is available only for the Mercedes-AMG GT 63 S 4MATIC+ model or for vehicles with AMG DYNAMIC PLUS package.
RACE START enables optimal vehicle acceleration from a standstill. For this, a suitably high-grip road surface is required, the tyres and vehicle must also be in good condition.
(i) Use RACE START only after the vehicle has been run in.
i RACE START may not be used on normal roads. RACE START must only be activated and used on dedicated race circuits, not on public roads. Read the safety notes and information on ESP® (→ page 181).

⚠ WARNING Risk of skidding and having an accident from wheels spinning

If you use RACE START, depending on the ESP® mode selected, there is an increased risk of skidding and having an accident.

Make sure that no persons or obstacles are in the close vicinity of your vehicle.

Activating RACE START

Requirements:

• the driver's door is closed.
- the engine is running and the transmission and engine are at normal operating temperature.
- the front wheel is in the straight-ahead position.
• the vehicle is on level ground.
- the vehicle is stationary, the brake pedal is depressed (left foot) and the parking brake is released.
- the transmission is in position D.
• the DRIFT MODE is deactivated.

• one of the drive programs , ^+ or ^- is selected (→ page 162).
  Rapidly depress the accelerator pedal fully. The engine speed increases.
  If the activation conditions are not fulfilled, RACE START cannot be activated. The RACE START not possible See Owner's Manualmessage appears in the multifunction display.
  The RACE START Release brake to startme sage appears in the multifunction display.
  In this phase you can adjust RACE START depending on the road conditions: you can vary the engine speed by pulling on one of the steering wheel gearshift paddles. The segments in the multifunction display flicker rapidly.
  If the brake pedal is not released after a short while, RACE START is cancelled. The RACE START cancelled message appears in the multifunction display.

Take your foot off the brake, but keep the accelerator pedal depressed. The vehicle pulls away at maximum acceleration. The RACE START activemessage appears in the multifunction display.

RACE START is deactivated immediately if you release the accelerator pedal during RACE START or if any of the activation conditions are no longer fulfilled. The RACE START cancelled message appears in the multifunction display.

① After using it several times in short succession, RACE START is unavailable until a certain distance has been driven.

DRIFT MODE

Functions of DRIFT MODE

i DRIFT MODE is available only for the Mercedes-AMG GT 63 S 4MATIC+ model or for vehicles with AMG DYNAMIC PLUS package.

DRIFT MODE enables intentional unstable movement (drifting) and oversteering of the vehicle.

All activation conditions must be fulfilled for this (ESP® deactivated, for example).

Only a highly qualified and experienced driver should drive in DRIFT MODE. Read the safety notes and information on ESP® (→ page 181).

⚠ WARNING Risk of skidding and having an accident from wheels spinning

When you use DRIFT MODE, ESIs not available.

There is an increased risk of skidding and having an accident.

Do not use DRIFT MODE on normal roads.
DRIFT MODE may only be activated and used on closed race circuits, not on public roads.
Make sure that no persons or obstacles are in the close vicinity of your vehicle.

When DRIFT MODE is active, the vehicle drive occurs only at the rear and 4MATIC+ is deactivated.

From a speed of approximately 115 km/h up to 150 km/h 4MATIC+ is continuously reactivated. From a speed of 150 km/h 4MATIC+ is fully active again, ESP however, remains deactivated. Below a speed of 150 km/h to approximately 115 km/h 4MATIC+ is continuously deactivated again.

i DRIFT MODE is only available after the vehicle has been run in.

Activating and deactivating DRIFT MODE

Requirements:

• ESP ^ is deactivated (→ page 184).
• drive program is selected (→ page 162).
• the doors, the bonnet and the boot lid/tail-gate are closed.
• the engine is running and the transmission and engine are at normal operating temperature.

- the transmission is in manual mode - manual shifting is activated (→ page 167).

Activating DRIFT MODE

Diagram of a car steering wheel with numbered indicators for lane and hub positioning

Pull steering wheel gearshift paddles ① and ② and hold for half a second. If all activation conditions are fulfilled, the multifunction display shows the message DRIFT MODE Confirm: Paddle UP Cancel: Paddle DOWN and the warning lamp DRIFT flashes.

To cancel: pull the steering wheel gearshift paddle Ⓞ. The multifunction display shows the message DRIFT MODE cancelled and the warning lamp DRIFT goes out.

To confirm: pull the steering wheel gearshift paddle ②. The multifunction display shows the message DRIFT MODE active and the warning lamp DRIFT lights up.

Deactivating DRIFT MODE

Pull steering wheel gearshift paddles ① and ② and hold for half a second. The message DRIFT MODE active and the warning lamp DRIFT go out.

DRIFT MODE is automatically deactivated in the following situations:

• ESP ^50 is activated.
• manual shifting is deactivated - the gearbox is in position D.
• the drive program is switched off.
  • the vehicle is switched off.

- automatic switch off is required by the vehicle.

After drifting and before continuing the journey, check the wheels and tyres for damage. In particular, check the tyre tread depth and tyre contact surface over the entire width of the tyres (see the vehicle Owner's Manual).

Rear wing

Function of the rear wing

The rear wing improves the vehicle's driving stability and automatically retracts and extends while the vehicle is in motion. Depending on the vehicle speed, it adopts different positions and thus adapts the vehicle's aerodynamics to the

Vehicles with the AMG Aerodynamic package are fitted with a stationary rear wing ( page 223).

Depending on which drive program has been selected, the rear wing automatically extends at a speed greater than 70 km/h.

Depending on the drive program, the rear wing automatically retracts below a speed of approximately 80 km/h.

You can retract and extend the rear wing manually for cleaning ( page 222).

Extending and retracting the rear wing for cleaning

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when you extend and retract the rear wing manually

Parts of the body could become trapped.

▶ Ensure that there is no one in the sweep of the rear wing when you extend the rear wing.
If someone does become trapped when the rear wing is extended, press the display switch again immediately.

NOTE Damage to the rear wing during washing at an automatic car wash

If the rear wing is extended, it may be damaged if the vehicle is washed at an automatic car wash.

▶ Extend the rear wing manually only when washing the vehicle by hand.
Before entering an automatic car wash, ensure that the rear wing is retracted.

Requirements:

• The ignition is switched on.
• The tailgate is closed.

Diagram showing a device panel with labeled buttons and navigation icons, likely from an automotive or electronics system interface.

To extend: press display switch ①.

To retract: press and hold display switch ①. The rear wing will extend or retract.

Display button symbol ② and its colour indicate the following positions of the rear wing:

• Rear wing retracted (blue)
• Rear wing extended in different positions (red)

- Rear wing extending or retracting (yellow)

The different positions of the rear wing are also shown on the instrument cluster.

Adjusting the stationary rear wing

Requirements:

• There is a socket wrench available for the rear wing's bolts.
• There is a releasable, medium-strength bolt lock to hand.

Vehicles with the AMG Aerodynamics package are fitted with a stationary rear wing. The position of this rear wing is not adjustable.

The rear wing improves the rear axle output and, therefore, the vehicle's driving stability. You can move the rear wing into an inclined and a flat position.

When you move the rear wing into the inclined position, the rear axle output and the air resistance increase.

Diagram of a car steering wheel with two labeled parts and directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

Unscrew the bolts ① with a socket wrench.
Tilt the rear wing as far as it will go, upwards into an inclined position, or downwards into a flat position.
▶ Equip the bolts ① with a releasable, medium-strength bolt lock and tighten them. Specified tightening torque: 10 Nm.

Reversing camera

Function of the reversing camera

If you have activated the function in the multimedia system ( page 230), the image from reversing camera is shown in the media display when the reverse gear is engaged. Dynamic

guide lines show the path the vehicle will take with the current steering angle. This helps you to orient yourself and to avoid obstacles when reversing.

The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and parking.

i You can open the cover of the reversing camera manually ( page 230).

The guide lines in the media display show the distances to your vehicle. The distances displayed only apply to road level.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can select from the following views:

• Normal view
• Wide-angle view
• Trailer view

The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the inside rearview mirror.

Vehicles without Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

The following camera views are available in the multimedia system:

graph TD
    1["1"] --> 2["2"]
    2 --> 3["3"]
    3 --> 4["4"]
    5["5"] --> 2
    style 1 fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style 2 fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style 3 fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style 4 fill:#fff,stroke:#000
    style 5 fill:#fff,stroke:#000

Normal view

Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven surface) depending on the current steering angle (dynamic)
② Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 m from the rear area
3 Yellow lanes marking the course the tyres will take with the current steering angle (dynamic)

4 Bumper
5 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the rear area

Black-and-white fisheye view of an industrial facility with buildings and a clear sky (no visible text or symbols)

Wide-angle view

1 2 3

Trailer view (vehicles with a trailer hitch)

① Yellow guide line, locating aid
2 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the ball head of the trailer hitch
Ball head of the trailer hitch

Vehicles with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

The following camera views are available in the multimedia system:

Diagram showing a car with numbered components and a surveillance camera view of a highway ahead.

Normal view
Yellow lanes marking the course the tyres will take with the current steering angle (dynamic)
2 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven surface) depending on the current steering angle (dynamic)
3 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the rear area
4 Yellow warning indicator of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles at a distance between approximately 0.6 m and 1.0 m
5 Red warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles are very close (approximately 0.3 m or less)
6 Orange warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles are a medium distance away (between approximately 0.3 m and 0.6 m)

Black-and-white fisheye view of a parked car at an airport gate, no visible text or symbols

Wide-angle view

Diagram showing a car on a road with three labeled points and directional arrows, likely illustrating vehicle navigation or sensor placement.

Trailer view (vehicles with a trailer hitch)
① Yellow guide line, locating aid
2 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the ball head of the trailer hitch
③ Ball head of the trailer hitch

System failure

If the reversing camera is not operational, the following display appears in the multimedia system.

System limits

The reversing camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situations:

• There is heavy rain, snow or fog.
  • The light conditions are poor, e.g. at night.
• Cameras, or vehicle components in which the cameras are fitted, are damaged, dirty or covered. Observe the information on vehicle sensors and cameras ( page 178).

Do not use the reversing camera in these types of situations. You could otherwise injure others or collide with objects when parking the vehicle.

The contrast of the display may be impaired by direct sunlight or by other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case, pay particular attention.

i Have the display repaired or replaced if, for example, pixel errors considerably restrict its use.

Calling up the view of the reversing camera

Diagram showing a car interior with a parking pad icon and a location pin, likely indicating parking or navigation.

Press button ①. The image from the reversing camera is shown in the media display.

If you have activated the function, the image from the reversing camera is automatically displayed when reverse gear is selected (→ page 230).

i Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: pressing button i immediately displays the Active Parking Assist view (→ page 236).

360° Camera

Function of the 360° Camera

The 360° Camera is a system that consists of four cameras. The cameras cover the immediate vehicle surroundings. The system assists you when you are parking or at exits with reduced visibility, for example.

The views of the 360° Camera are always available when driving forwards up to a speed of approx. 16 km/h and when reversing.

The 360° Camera is only an aid and may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not show them at all. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and parking.

The system evaluates images from the following cameras:

• Reversing camera
• Front camera
• Two side cameras in the outside mirrors

(i) You can open the cover of the reversing camera manually ( page 230).

Views of the 360° Camera
You can select from different views:

Camera navigation interface screenshot showing a car on a road with numbered annotations pointing to the lane.

① Wide-angle view, front
2 Top view with image from the front camera

3 Top view with images from the side camera in the outside mirrors
④ Wide-angle view, rear
5 Top view with image from the reversing camera
6 Top view with trailer view (vehicles with a trailer hitch)

Top view

Screenshot of a car navigation interface with numbered annotations pointing to the vehicle's lane and driving area.

Lane indicating the route the vehicle will take at the current steering wheel angle
2 Warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
3 Your vehicle from above

The colour of the individual segments of warning display ② is based on the distance to the detected obstacle:

• Yellow segments: obstacles at a distance between approx. 0.6 m and 1.0 m
• Orange segments: obstacles at a distance between approx. 0.3 m and 0.6 m
• Red segments: obstacles at a very short distance of approx. 0.3 m or less

When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational and no object is detected, the segments of the warning display are shown in grey.

Guide lines

Diagram showing a car detection system with numbered components and a vehicle image, likely for navigation or tracking.

Yellow lane marking the course the tyres will take at the current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
② Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven surface) depending on the current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
3 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the rear area
4 Mark at a distance of approx. 1.0 m
When Active Parking Assist is active, lane markings are displayed in green.

The guide lines in the media display show the distances to your vehicle. The distances apply to road level.

In trailer mode, the guide lines are shown at the level of the trailer hitch.

Trailer view (vehicles with a trailer hitch)

If you select trailer view and no trailer is coupled to the vehicle, the following display appears:

Diagram showing a car interior with three labeled points (1, 2, 3) pointing to a curved road or path.

Yellow guide line, locating aid
2 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the ball head of the trailer hitch
③ Ball head of the trailer hitch

Top-down view of a car parked in front of a large refrigerator (no visible text or symbols)

When the electrical connection is established between the vehicle and the trailer, the display changes to the side camera view.

This view supports manoeuvring procedures with a trailer.

Side view of the mirror cameras

The sides of the vehicle can be seen in this view.

graph TD
    A["Top Left: Car"] --> B["Step 1: Node 1"]
    B --> C["Step 2: Node 2"]
    C --> D["End"]

① Guide line of external vehicle dimensions with outside mirrors folded out
② Marker of the wheel contact points

System failure

If the system is not ready for operation, the following message appears in the media display:

System limits

The 360° Camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situations:

• The doors are open.
• the outside mirrors are folded in.
• There is heavy rain, snow or fog.
• The light conditions are poor, e.g. at night.
- Cameras, or vehicle components in which the cameras are fitted, are damaged, dirty or covered. Observe the information on vehicle sensors and cameras ( page 178).

Do not use the 360° Camera under such circumstances. You could otherwise injure others or collide with objects when parking the vehicle.

For technical reasons, the standard height of the vehicle may be altered if the vehicle is carrying a heavy load and can result in inaccuracies in the guide lines and in the display of the generated images.

① The contrast of the display may be impaired by abrupt, direct sunlight or by other light

sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case, pay particular attention.

i Have the display repaired or replaced if, for example, pixel errors considerably restrict its use.

See the notes on cleaning the 360^ Camera ( page 310).

Calling up the 360° Camera view using the button

Diagram showing a car interior with a parking control panel and a location pin icon, likely for navigation or security.

• Press button The image from the 360° Camera is shown the media display.
• In the multimedia system, select the desired view.

① Vehicles with Active Parking Assist:

pressing button ① immediately displays Active Parking Assist view (→ page 236).

Calling up the view of the 360° Camera using reverse gear

Requirements:

- The Auto reversing camera function is a ted in the multimedia system (→ page 230).

Shift to reverse gear.
Select the desired view in the multimedia system ( page 226).
If, after shifting to reverse gear, the image of the reversing camera is not shown: switch off the ignition, press and hold the P button but switch on the ignition and engage reverse gear again.

Switching reversing camera automatic mode on/off

The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the

manoeuvring range. Pay attention to your sur- boundings and be ready to brake at all times.

Multimedia system:

Settings Assistance
▶ Camera & parking
▶ Switch Auto reversing camera on or off.

Opening the camera cover of the reversing camera

Multimedia system:

Settings Assistance
▶ Camera & parking
▶ Select Open camera cover.
The camera cover closes automatically after on, some time or after an ignition cycle.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Function of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking assistance system with ultrasound. It monitors the area around your vehicle using multiple sensors on the front bumper and on the rear bumper. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC shows

you the distance between your vehicle and a detected obstacle visually and audibly.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and parking in/exiting parking spaces.

In the standard setting, an intermittent warning tone sounds from a distance of approximately 0.3 m to an obstacle in front and approximately 1.0 m to an obstacle behind. A continuous warning tone sounds from a distance of approximately 0.2 m. Using the Warn early all-round setting in the multimedia system, the warning tones for front and side impact protection can be set to sound at a greater distance of approximately 1.0 m in front and 0.6 m on the sides ( page 234).

① The Warn early all-round setting is always active in the rear of the vehicle.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display in the multimedia system

Play 1 Bluetooth USB Mercedes Music Sounds Music

Vehicles without 360° Camera

Radio 67.5 long

Vehicles with 360° Camera

If you have not selected the Camera & parking menu and an obstacle is detected in the path of the vehicle, a pop-up window for Parking Assist PARKTRONIC 📄 appears in the multimedia system at speeds below 10 km/h.

The colour of the individual segments of the warning display is based on the distance to the detected obstacle:

• Yellow segments: obstacles at a distance between approx. 0.6 m and 1.0 m
• Orange segments: obstacles at a distance between approx. 0.3 m and 0.6 m

- Red segments: obstacles at a very short distance of approx. 0.3 m or less

Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC in the head-up display

Diagram of a car interior with numbered labels pointing to the seating area and roof structure.

Optionally, obstacles detected by Parking Assist PARKTRONIC from a distance of approximately 1.0 m in front ② and 0.6 m on the sides ③ can also be displayed in the head-up display.

System limits

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not necessarily take into account the following obstacles:

- Obstacles below the detection range, e.g. persons, animals or objects.

- Obstacles above the detection range, e.g. overhanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of lorries.

The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and slush. Otherwise, they may not function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them ( page 178).

Vehicles with trailer hitch: Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear zone when you establish an electrical connection between your vehicle and a trailer.

Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Two identical 3D-rendered car illustrations shown in top and side views, no text or symbols present.

Example: vehicles with 360° Camera

When rear segments ① or all-round segments ② light up red and the _avg^Off symbol appears in the multifunction display, Parking Assist

PARKTRONIC may have been deactivated due to signal interference. Start the vehicle again and check if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is working at a different location.

If a warning tone also sounds for approximately two seconds every time the vehicle is started, it may be due to one of the following causes:

• The sensors are dirty: clean the sensors and observe the notes on care of vehicle parts (→ page 310).
• Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has been deactivated due to a malfunction: restart the vehicle. If the problem persists, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Function of the passive side impact protection

Passive side impact protection is an additional Parking Assist PARKTRONIC function which warns the driver about obstacles at the side of the vehicle. A warning is issued when obstacles are detected between the front and rear detec-

tion range. In order for an object on the side to be detected, the sensors in the front and rear bumper must first detect the object while you are driving past it.

During the parking procedure or manoeuvring, objects are detected as the vehicle drives past. If you steer in the direction of a detected obstacle and there is a risk of a lateral collision, a warning is issued and the segments light up in colour in the display.

The segment colour changes depending on the distance to the detected obstacle:

• Yellow: approximately 30 - 60 cm
• Red: less than approximately 30 cm

In order for lateral front or rear segments to be displayed, the vehicle must first travel a distance of at least half of the vehicle length. Once the vehicle has travelled the length of the vehicle, all of the lateral front and rear segments can be displayed.

Three identical car top-down diagrams showing front, side, and perspective views of a vehicle with no text or symbols.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display: vehicles without a 360° Camera

① Operational front and rear
② Operational front, rear and sides
3 Obstacle detected at the front right (yellow) and rear (red)

Three identical car parking lot views labeled 1, 2, and 3, showing no text or symbols on the cars themselves.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display: vehicles with a 360° Camera

① Operational front and rear
② Operational front, rear and sides
③ Obstacles detected at the front right (red)

Saved obstacles on the sides are deleted in the following situations, for example:

• You park the vehicle and switch off the ignition.
• You open the doors.

After the engine is restarted, obstacles on the sides must be detected again before a new warning can be issued.

System limits

The system limits for Parking Assist PARKTRONIC apply to passive side impact protection.

The following objects are not detected, for example:

• Pedestrians who approach the vehicle from the side
- Objects placed next to the vehicle

Activating/deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC using the multimedia system

NOTE Risk of an accident from objects at close range

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect certain objects at close range.

When parking or manoeuvring the vehicle, pay particular attention to any objects which are above or below the sensors, e.g. flowerpots or drawbars. The vehicle or other objects could otherwise be damaged.

Requirements:

• The camera menu is open.
  • Or: Active Parking Assist is active.
• Or: the PARKTRONIC pop-up window appears.

Tap P in the media display.

If the indicator lamp is lit, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is active. If the indicator lamp is not lit or the _2^ symbol appears in the instrument cluster, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not active.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when the vehicle is started.

Alternatively, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC can be activated or deactivated in the quick access menu.

Setting the warning tones of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Multimedia system:

Adjusting the volume of the warning tones

▶ Select Warning tone volume.
Set a value.

Adjusting the pitch of the warning tones

▶ Select Warning tone pitch.
Set a value.

Specifying the starting point for the warning tones

You can specify whether the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning tones should commence when the vehicle is further away from an obstacle.

▶ Select Warn early all-round.
▶ Activate or deactivate the function.

Activating/deactivating audio fadeout

You can specify whether the volume of a media source in the multimedia system is to be reduced when Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sounds a warning tone.

▶ Select Audio fadeout during warning tones

▶ Activate or deactivate the function.

Active Parking Assist

Function of Active Parking Assist

Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking assistance system, which uses ultrasound with the assistance of the reversing camera and 360° Camera. When you are driving forwards up to approximately 35 km/h, the system automatically measures parking spaces on both sides the vehicle.

As soon as all requirements are met for searching for parking spaces, the □ display appears in the multifunction display.

When Active Parking Assist has detected parking spaces, the ◀P ▶ display appears in the multifunction display. The arrows show on which side

of the road detected parking spaces are located. They are then shown in the media display.

The parking space can be selected as desired. Depending on the location of the parking space, the parking direction (rearwards or forwards). can also be selected as desired.

When Active Parking Assist is activated, the turn signal indicators are activated based on the calculated path of your vehicle.

When you are entering or exiting a parking space, the procedure is assisted by acceleration, braking, steering and gear changes.

Active Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring range.

Active Parking Assist will be cancelled in the following situations:

• Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated.
• You begin steering.
• You apply the parking brake.

• You engage transmission position P.
- ESP® intervenes.
- You open the doors or the boot lid while driving.

System limits

If the exterior lighting is malfunctioning, Active Parking Assist is not available.

Objects located above or below the detection range of the sensors, e.g. overhanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of goods vehicles, or the borders of parking spaces, are not detected during measurement of the parking space. These are also then not taken into account when calculating the parking procedure. In some circumstances, Active Parking Assist may therefore guide you into the parking space incorrectly.

WARNING Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detection range of Active Parking Assist

If there are objects above or below the detection range, the following situations may arise:

• Active Parking Assist may steer too early.
- The vehicle may not stop in front of these objects.

This could cause a collision.

In these situations, do not use Active Parking Assist.

Extreme weather conditions, such as snow or heavy rain, may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. Parking spaces that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be identified as such or be measured incorr. Only use Active Parking Assist on level, high-grip ground.

Do not use Active Parking Assist in the following situations:

• In extreme weather conditions such as ice, packed snow or in heavy rain.
• When transporting a load that protrudes beyond the vehicle.
• On steep uphill or downhill gradients of more than approximately 15%.
• When snow chains are fitted.
• When a trailer or bicycle rack is attached.
• Directly after a tyre change or when spare tyres are fitted.
  • If the tyre pressure is too low or too high.
• If the suspension is out of alignment, e.g. after bottoming out on a kerb.

Active Parking Assist may also display parking spaces that are not suitable for parking, such as:

• Parking spaces where parking is prohibited.
• Parking spaces on unsuitable surfaces.

Parking with Active Parking Assist

Diagram showing car interior with a parking pad icon and a blue location pin, likely indicating a parking or security control interface.

Press button ①.

2 3 4 P P P P

The media display shows the view of Active Parking Assist. Area ② displays detected parking spaces ④ and vehicle path ③.

i Vehicle path ③ shown on the media display may differ from the actual vehicle path.

If a parking space is displayed: stop the vehicle.
Select desired parking space ④ and confirm.
If necessary, select the parking direction: forwards or reverse, and confirm. Vehicle path ③ is shown, depending on selected parking space ④ and the parki direction.

The turn signal indicator is switched on automatically when the parking procedure begins.

You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the traffic conditions. If necessary, select the turn signal indicator accordingly.

WARNING Risk of accident due to vehicle swinging out while parking or pulling out of a parking space

While parking or exiting a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane.

This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users.

Pay attention to objects and other road users.
▶ Where necessary, stop the vehicle or cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist.

If, for example, the Please engage reverse gear message appears in the media display:

select the corresponding transmission position. The vehicle drives into the selected parking space.

During the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist, the lane markings are displayed in green in the camera image. On completion of the parking procedure, the Parking Assist finished, take control vehicle display message appears. Further manoeuvring may still be necessary.
After completion of the parking procedure, safeguard the vehicle against rolling away. When required by legal requirements or local conditions: turn the wheels towards the kerb. ① You can stop the vehicle and change the transmission position during the parking procedure. The system then calculates a new vehicle path. If no new vehicle path is available, the system can change the transmission position again or cancel the parking procedure.

Exiting a parking space with Active Parking Assist

Requirements:

- The vehicle has been parked with Active Parking Assist.

Please note that you are responsible for the vehicle and surroundings during the entire parking procedure.

Start the vehicle.

Diagram showing a car interior with a parking pad icon and a location pin, likely indicating vehicle access or navigation.

Press button ①. The media display shows the view of Active Parking Assist.

Diagram showing car positioning and sensor placement with numbered annotations for visibility and detection points

If the vehicle has been parked perpendicular to the direction of travel: in area ②, select direction of travel ③ Left or Right.
The vehicle path shown on the media display may differ from the actual vehicle path.
Confirm direction of exit ③ to drive out of the parking space.
The turn signal indicator is switched on automatically when the exiting procedure begins.

You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the traffic conditions. If necessary, select the turn signal indicator accordingly.

WARNING Risk of accident due to vehicle swinging out while parking or pulling out of a parking space

While parking or exiting a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane.

This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users.

Pay attention to objects and other road users.
Where necessary, stop the vehicle or cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist.

If, for example, the Please engage forward gear message appears in the media display: select the corresponding transmission position.

The vehicle moves out of the parking space. The turn signal indicator is switched off automatically.

After the parking space has been exited, a warning tone and the Parking Assist finished,

take control of vehicle message prompt you to take control of the vehicle.

The vehicle is not automatically braked and can roll away. You have to accelerate, brake, steer and change gear yourself again.

Manoeuvring assistant

Function of Drive Away Assist

Drive Away Assist can reduce the severity of an impact when pulling away. If an obstacle is detected in the direction of travel, the vehicle's speed is briefly reduced to approx. 2 km/h. If a critical situation is detected, the symbol appears in the media display.

You can cancel an intervention by Drive Away Assist at any time by deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC ( page 234).

WARNING Risk of accident caused by limited detection performance of Drive Away Assist

Drive Away Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and traffic situations.

▶ Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely on Drive Away Assist alone.
Be prepared to brake or swerve as necessary, provided the traffic situation permits and that it is safe to take evasive action.

Drive Away Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring range.

A risk of a collision may arise in the following situations, for example:

• If the accelerator and brake pedals are interchanged.
• If an incorrect transmission position is engaged.

Drive Away Assist is active under the following conditions:

• If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated.

• If you shift the transmission position to R or D when the vehicle is stationary.
• If the detected obstacle is less than approx. 1.0 m away.
• If the manoeuvring assistant function is activated in the multimedia system.

System limits

The performance of Drive Away Assist is limited on inclines.

When driving with a trailer, Drive Away Assist is not available.

Also observe the system limits of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC ( page 230).

Function of Cross Traffic Alert

Cross Traffic Alert is only available for vehicles with Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist.

Cross Traffic Alert can warn drivers of any crossing traffic when reversing and manoeuvring out of a parking space. The radar sensors in the bumper also monitor the area adjacent to the vehicle. If a critical situation is detected, the

Symbol appears in the media display and the vehicle can be braked automatically. If the radar sensors are obstructed by vehicles or other objects, detection is not possible.

Cross Traffic Alert is active under the following conditions:

• if the vehicle is reversing at a walking pace.
• manoeuvring assistance is activated (→ page 240).

Also observe the instructions on Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist ( page 210).

System limits

Cross Traffic Alert is not available on inclines. Cross Traffic Alert is not available when driving with a trailer.

Activating/deactivating manoeuvring assistant

Multimedia system:

▶ Activate/deactivate Manoeuvring assistance.

① Manoeuvring assistant must be active for the function of Drive Away Assist ( page 239) and Cross Traffic Alert ( page 240).

Trailer hitch

Notes on trailer operation

NOTE Plug-in hybrid

Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers.

Observe the following notes on the tongue weight:

• Do not use a tongue weight that exceeds or falls below the permissible tongue weight
• Use a tongue weight as close as possible to the maximum tongue weight

Do not exceed the following values:

• Permissible towing capacity
- Permissible rear axle load of the towing vehicle

• Permissible gross weight of the towing vehicle
  • Permissible gross weight of the trailer
  • Maximum permissible speed of the trailer

Ensure the following before starting a journey:

• The tyre pressure on the rear axle of the towing vehicle is set for a maximum load
• The lighting of the connected trailer is operational
• Vehicles without LED headlamps or MULTIBEAM LED headlamps: the headlamps have been set correctly

In the event of increased rear axle load, the car/trailer combination must not exceed a maximum speed of 100 km/h for reasons concerning the operating permit. This also applies in countries in which the permissible maximum speed for car/trailer combinations is above 100 km/h.

Extending and retracting the ball neck fully electrically

⚠ WARNING Risk of accident due to the ball neck not being engaged
If the ball neck is not engaged, the trailer may come loose.
Make sure that the ball neck securely engages and locks into place.
NOTE Damage to the all-electric trailer hitch due to additional pressure

The all-electric trailer hitch could be mechanically damaged by applying additional pressure when the ball neck is being extended or retracted.

Do not make the ball neck extend/retract faster by applying additional pressure.

Requirements:

• The vehicle is secured against rolling away.
• The swivel range is clear.

- The trailer cables or adapter plugs have been removed.

Extending the ball neck fully electrically

Diagram of a car interior with labeled parts, showing a highlighted device and a zoomed-in view of the interior space.

To extend: pull button ①. Indicator lamp ② will flash and the message Trailer coupling extending... will appeal on the multifunction display. The ball neck will extend fully electrically.

Wait until the ball neck has locked in place. When indicator lamp ② is continuously lit, the ball neck is securely locked in place. If the ball neck is not securely locked in place, indicator lamp ② will flash and the message Check trailer hitch lock will appear on the multifunction display.

Side profile of a car with a close-up inset showing a mechanical component (no text or symbols visible)

Retracting the ball neck fully electrically

Pull button ①. Indicator lamp ② will flash and the message Trailer coupling extending... will appear on the multifunction display. The ball neck will retract fully electrically. Wait until the ball neck has locked in place. When indicator lamp ② goes out, the ball neck is securely locked in place. If the ball neck is not securely locked in place, indicator lamp ② will flash and the message Check trailer hitch lock will appear on the multifunction display.

Observe the information about the displays on the instrument cluster:

• Indicator and warning lamps (→ page 417)
• Display messages ( page 365)

Folding the ball neck in/out fully electrically (multimedia system)

⚠ WARNING Risk of accident due to the ball neck not being engaged

If the ball neck is not engaged, the trailer may come loose.

Always engage the ball neck as described.
! NOTE Damage to the all-electric trailer hitch due to additional pressure

The all-electric trailer hitch could be mechanically damaged by applying additional pressure when the ball neck is being extended or retracted.

Do not make the ball neck extend/retract faster by applying additional pressure.

Requirements:

• The vehicle is secured against rolling away.
• The swivel range is clear.

- The trailer cables or adapter plugs have removed.

beef the ball neck is not securely locked in place, the Check trailer hitch lock message will on the multifunction display.

▶ Do not lock or unlock the vehicle. appear

Multimedia system:

→ Settings ▶ Quick access

Extending the ball neck fully electrically

Select . The Trailer coupling extending... display message will appear on the multifunction display. The ball neck will extend fully electrically.
▶ Wait until the ball neck has locked in place.

If the ball neck is not securely locked in place, the Check trailer hitch lock message will on the multifunction display.

Retracting the ball neck fully electrically

Select 📄. The Trailer coupling extending... display message will appear on the multifunction display. The ball neck will retract fully electrically.
▶ Wait until the ball neck has locked in place.

Coupling/uncoupling a trailer

⚠ WARNING Risk of injury from the vehicle level being changed

Vehicles with level control system: the vehicle level may be changed unintentionally, e.g. by other persons. You may become trapped if you couple up or uncouple a trailer while the vehicle level is changing. In addition, other people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tyres or underneath the vehicle.

When coupling up or uncoupling a trailer, make sure that:

The doors or tailgate are not opened or closed.
You do not initiate the level control system and do not operate the DYNAMIC SELECT switch.

Requirements:

- The ball neck is extended and engaged in a securely locked position.

Trailers with a 7-pin plug can be connected to the vehicle with the following adapters:

• Adapter plug
• Adapter cable

The trailer will be correctly detected by the vehicle only if the following conditions are met:

• The trailer is connected correctly.
- The trailer lighting system is in working order.

The functions of the following systems will be affected by a correctly connected trailer:

• ESP® trailer stabilisation
  • Active Lane Keeping Assist
  • Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
  • Active Parking Assist

• Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist

• Drive Away Assist

• Cross Traffic Alert
• Reversing camera
• 360^ camera
  • AMG RIDE CONTROL +

Coupling up a trailer

! NOTE Damage to the starter battery due to full discharge

Charging the trailer battery using the power supply of the trailer can damage the starter battery.

Do not use the vehicle's power supply to charge the trailer battery.

Remove the cover cap from the ball head and store it in a safe place.
▶ Position the trailer on a level surface behind the vehicle and couple it up to the vehicle.

Technical diagram of a connector with numbered parts, likely illustrating internal structure or assembly.

▶ Open the socket cap.
Insert the plug with lug ① in groove ③ on the socket.
Turn bayonet coupling ② to the right as far as it will go.
Let the cap engage.
Secure the cable to the trailer with cable ties (only if you are using an adapter cable).
Make sure that the cable is always slack for ease of movement during cornering.

Under the following conditions, a message may appear on the multifunction display even if the trailer has been connected correctly:

• LEDs have been installed in the trailer lighting system.
- The current has fallen below the trailer lighting system's minimum current (50 mA).

i Accessories can be connected to the permanent power supply up to 180 W and to the power supply that is switched on via the ignition lock.

Uncoupling a trailer

⚠ WARNING Risk of being crushed and becoming trapped when uncoupling a trailer

When uncoupling a trailer with an engaged inertia-activated brake, your hand may become trapped between the vehicle and the trailer drawbar.

Do not uncouple trailers with an engaged overrun brake.

NOTE Damage when uncoupling in a state of overrun

Uncoupling in a state of overrun can damage the vehicle.

Do not uncouple trailers with an engaged overrun brake.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when disconnecting the trailer cable

Vehicles with level control system: The vehicle may lower when the trailer cable is disconnected.

This could result in you or other people becoming trapped if your or their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tyres or underneath the vehicle.

Make sure that nobody is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when you disconnect the trailer cable.

NOTE Damage to the rear bumper from installing adapter cables or adapter plugs

The following parts could be damaged when swiveling the ball neck fully electrically:

• Bumper
• Adapter cable
• Adapter plug
  ▶ Always remove the adapter cable or adapter plug before swiveling the ball neck fully electrically.

▶ Secure the trailer against rolling away.
▶ Disconnect the electrical connection between the vehicle and the trailer.
▶ Uncouple the trailer.
Place the cover cap on the ball head.

Bicycle rack function

⚠ WARNING Risk of an accident when using the bicycle rack incorrectly

The bicycle rack may become detached from the vehicle in the following cases:

• the permissible load capacity of the trailer hitch is exceeded.
  • the bicycle rack is used incorrectly.
• the bicycle rack is secured to the ball neck beneath the ball head.

Observe the following for your own safety and that of other road users:

• always adhere to the permissible load capacity of the trailer hitch.
- only use the bicycle rack to transport bicycles.
- always mount the bicycle rack properly by attaching to the ball head and the ball neck guide pin, if possible.

• when transporting four bicycles, always use bicycle racks which have additional support on the ball neck guide pin.
• only use bicycle racks approved by Mercedes-Benz.
• always observe the bicycle rack operating instructions.

NOTE Damage to, or cracks on, the trailer hitch due to unsuitable bicycle racks or bicycle racks being used incorrectly

use only bicycle racks approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Diagram of a car's rearview and side profile with labeled parts, showing mechanical components and a highlighted section.

Trailer hitch (example with additional guide pin)

Depending on the bicycle rack's design, different numbers of bicycles can be transported.

The following bicycle rack designs are possible:

- When mounted by attaching to ball head Ⓤ, the maximum load capacity is 75 kg. Up to three bicycles can be transported.

- When mounted on ball head ① and guide pin ②, the maximum load capacity is 100 kg. Up to four bicycles can be transported.

The load capacity is calculated from the weight of the bicycle rack and the bicycle rack load.

The vehicle's driving characteristics will change when a bicycle rack is fitted. Adapt your driving style accordingly. Drive carefully and maintain a safe distance.

When using a bicycle rack, set the tyre pressure for increased load on the rear axle of the vehicle. Further information on the tyre pressure can be found in the tyre pressure table ( page 337).

Notes on loading

The larger the distance between the load's centre of gravity and the ball head, the greater the load on the trailer hitch.

Observe the following notes:

- Mount heavy bicycles as close to the vehicle as possible.

- Always distribute the load on the bicycle rack as evenly as possible across the vehicle's longitudinal axis.

Mercedes-Benz recommends removing all detachable parts from bicycles (e.g. baskets, child seats, rechargeable batteries) before loading them onto the bicycle rack. This will improve the aerodynamic resistance and centre of gravity of the bicycle rack.

Always secure the bicycles to prevent them from moving around and check them at regular intervals to ensure that they are secure.

Do not use tarpaulins or other covers. The driving characteristics and rear view may be impaired. In addition, aerodynamic resistance and the load on the trailer hitch will increase.

Diagram illustrating bicycle usage modes with labeled components and vehicle front view

Load distribution on the bicycle rack

1 Vertical distance between centre of gravity and ball head
2 Horizontal distance between centre of gravity and ball head
③ The centre of gravity is on the vehicle's centre axis

Observe the following information when loading the bicycle rack:

Loading the bicycle rack

3 bicycles 4 bicycles
Total weight of bicycle rack and load	Up to 75 kg	Up to 100 kg
Max. distance1	420 mm	420 mm
Max. distance2	300 mm	400 mm

When transporting four bicycles or with a total weight between 75 kg and 100 kg, always use bicycle racks with additional support on the trailer hitch guide pin.

Vehicle towing instructions

The vehicle is not suitable for the use of tow bar systems that are used for flat towing or dinghy towing, for example. Attaching and using tow bar systems can lead to damage on the vehicle. When you are towing a vehicle with tow bar systems, safe driving characteristics cannot be

guaranteed for the towing vehicle or the towed vehicle. The vehicle-trailer combination may swerve from side to side. Comply with the permitted towing methods ( page 326) and the instructions for towing with both axles on the ground ( page 327).

Notes on the instrument display and on-board computer

WARNING Risk of accident due to an instrument display malfunction

If the instrument display has failed or malfunctioned, the function restrictions applying to safety relevant systems are not visible.

The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired.

Drive on carefully.
Have the vehicle checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

WARNING Risk of distraction from information systems and communications equipment

If you operate information and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

▶ Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer.

The on-board computer shows only display messages and warnings from specific systems on the multifunction display. You must therefore ensure that your vehicle is always reliable.

If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle immediately and safely. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Instrument display overview

16.5°C 97 km/h 125.3 24967 13:50 568 km 1/2 D C AMG R N P 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 130 6 7 8 9 10 11 120 km/h km/h km/h km/h km/h km/h km/h

0 Index points These show the selected display or menu content.
2 Left-hand area for additional values (example: speedometer): speedometer / time / date / trip computer From start and From reset / audio / AMG TRACK PACE

The segments on the speedometer indicate the statuses of the following systems: cruise control / limiter / Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

3 Outside temperature
4 Digital speedometer
5 Time

Right-hand area for additional values (example: rev counter): rev counter / navigation / ECO display / consumption / G-meter / date
The fuel supply will be interrupted to protect the engine when the red mark on the rev counter (overrevving range) is reached.
⑦ Gear display

B Coolant temperature display The coolant temperature display is permitted to rise to 120°C during normal operation. Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system: POWER and CHARGE display (electrical drive support and recuperation power of the electric motor)
9 Selected drive program
10 Selected transmission position
⑪ Multifunction display (example: standard display for a trip): assistance / telephone / navigation / trip / media / radio / styles and displays / service / possible settings for head-up display
12 Fuel level and fuel filler flap location indicator

Overview of the buttons on the steering wheel

Diagram of car interior showing numbered components and a close-up view of the steering wheel with labeled parts 6, 7, and 8.

① Back/Home button (press and hold), on-board computer

② Touch Control, on-board computer

3 Control panel for cruise control/limiter or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Control panel for the MBUX multimedia system ( page 257)

LINGUATRONIC

5 To call up the home screen of the multimedia system

6 Touch Control multimedia system

7 Back button (multimedia system)

Brightness control to adjust the lighting in the Instrument Display and in the control elements of the vehicle interior

Operating the on-board computer

Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer.

HEAD-UP DISPLAY Trip Navigation Radio

The on-board computer is operated using the left-hand Touch Control and the left-hand back/home button.

When the on-board computer is being operated, different acoustic signals will sound as operating feedback, e.g. when the end of a list is reached or when you are scrolling through a list.

The following menus are available:

• Assistance
• Telephone
• Navigation
• Trip
• Radio

Media
• Service
- Performance
- Design

You can find information about the possible settings and selections on the menus in the Digital Owner's Manual.

To call up the menu bar: press the left-hand back button until the menu bar is displayed.
① Vehicles without Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: press the 📋 button to call up the menu bar of the on-board computer.

To scroll in the menu bar: swipe left or right on the left-hand Touch Control.
To call up a menu, submenu or possible settings on the menu, or confirm a selection or setting: press the left-hand Touch Control.
To scroll through displays or lists on the menu, or select display content, a function, an entry or a display: swipe upwards

or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.

To switch between displays: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.
To exit a submenu: press the left-hand back button.

Selecting the head-up display

To switch on the head-up display: switch on the head-up display via the multimedia system or activate it in the menu bar by swiping upwards on the left-hand Touch Control. The head-up display menu will be selected on the head-up display.
To switch to the head-up display: press the left-hand Touch Control or swipe upwards on the left-hand Touch Control.
To set the three display ranges of the head-up display: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.

Full-screen menus

You can display the following menus full-screen on the instrument display:

• Assistance
• Trip
• Navigation
  On the corresponding menu, use the left-hand Touch Control to scroll to the end of the list.
  Press the left-hand Touch Control. The selected menu will be displayed full-screen.

Overview of displays on the multifunction display

Displays on the multifunction display

Active Parking Assist activated ( page 236)
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC deactivated (→ page 234)
Cruise control ( page 188)

LIM Limiter ( page 189)
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (→ page 191)
Active Traffic Jam Assist ( page 198)
Active Brake Assist ( page 205)
Active Steering Assist ( page 198)
Active Lane Keeping Assist (→ page 212)
(A) ECO start/stop function ( page 157)
READY Mercedes-AMG GT 43/53: operational readiness established
Mercedes-AMG GT 63: four-cylinder operation
HOLD HOLD function (→ page 185)
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus ( page 129)
120km/s Maximum permissible speed exceeded (for certain countries only)

Vehicles with Speed Limit Assist: detected instructions and traffic signs ( page 206).

Vehicles with Traffic Sign Assist: detected instructions and traffic signs ( page 207).

Head-up display

Function of the head-up display

The head-up display projects the following into the driver's field of vision:

• Information from the navigation system
• Information from the driver assistance systems
- Some warning messages

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, different content can be shown in the three areas of the head-up display.

Display content

① ⑤ ④ ③ ② 120 120

① Protection from reaching the overrevving range
② Detected instructions and traffic signs
3 Current speed
4 Currently selected gear; gearshift options for manual shifting
5 Current engine speed

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, you can select further AMG displays in addition to the standard displays on the Display content menu.

In vehicles with AMG TRACK PACE, you can display further content depending on the setting, e.g.:

• Speed and gear display
- Lap and sector times
- Acceleration and braking
- Track layout graphics

The content that can be displayed will vary depending on the settings.

When you receive a call, the Incoming call message will appear on the head-up display. In audio mode, the station name or track will be shown temporarily when the audio source is being actively operated.

System limits

The visibility is influenced by the following conditions:

• Seat position
  • Image position setting
• Light conditions

• Wet road surfaces

• Objects on the display cover
  • Polarisation in sunglasses

In extreme sunlight, sections of the display may appear washed out. You can correct this by switching the head-up display off and on again.

Setting the head-up display using the on-board computer

On-board computer:

HEAD-UP DISPLAY

The following head-up display settings or displays can be selected or shown:

• Position
• Brightness
• Messages
• Assistance status
• Telephone
• Audio
  • LINGUATRONIC

To select the Settings menu: swipe to the right on the left-hand Touch Control. The Settings menu ⑤ will be selected.
To call up the Settings menu: press the left-hand Touch Control.
To adjust the position: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.
To adjust the brightness: swipe to the left or right on the left-hand Touch Control.

Setting messages, assistance status, telephone, audio and LINGUATRONIC

Press the left-hand Touch Control. The list of setting options will be displayed.

Swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control and select a setting by pressing the left-hand Touch Control.

Selecting what the head-up display shows

1 2 M25 LONDON 600 pvt 7 3 60 mph HOLD 4 5 Deutschlandfunk

(Example)

To switch the head-up display on/off

② Left display area
Navigation system
Average consumption G-meter

③ Central display area Speedometer

Set speed in the driver assistance system, e.g. cruise control

Warnings from driver assistance systems, e.g. distance warning

④ Right display area Traffic Sign Assist Assistant display
To adjust the position, brightness and lower display area
6 Index points
7 Lower display area (example: left display area)

Display areas ② to ④ that are not required can be hidden.

In audio mode, the station name or track will be shown temporarily when the audio source is being actively operated. In addition, the latest calls will be displayed when the telephone list on the instrument display is actively operated.

To select a display: swipe upwards on the left-hand Touch Control.

Press the left-hand Touch Control.

To select a display: swipe upwards on the left-hand Touch Control. Press the left-hand Touch Control.

Switching the head-up display on/off via the multimedia system

Multimedia system:

→ Settings ▶ Quick access

Select HUD. The head-up-display is activated.

Overview and operation

Notes on the MBUX multimedia system

WARNING Risk of distraction from information systems and communications equipment

If you operate information and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system.

Overview of the MBUX multimedia system

Diagram of car interior showing steering wheel, dashboard, and steering wheel with numbered labels pointing to key components.

Equipment with touchpad

① Touch Control and control panel for the MBUX multimedia system
2 Media display
Control panel for telephone, navigation, radio/media, vehicle functions/system settings and favourites/themes

4 Press the rocker switch up or down: increases or decreases the volume
⑤ Display button shows volume, current volume when setting the volume or mute Press the display button: switches the multimedia system on/off
6 Touchpad
You can find further information about operation as well as about applications and services in the Digital Owner's Manual.

Anti-theft protection

This device is equipped with technical provisions to protect it against theft. More detailed information about anti-theft protection can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Home screen overview

Profiles Search 23:50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Telephone No device connected Navigation 10 FM/DAB Radio 87.5 MHz 13 LOW 14 SUGGESTIONS 11 12 13 LOW

Depending on the display, calls up the first three applications or the home screen
② Calls up the profile
③ Calls up the global search
④ SOS NOT READY (only when the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is not available)
5 Mercedes me connect active

6 Transmission of vehicle position active
7 Signal strength of the mobile phone network, network display, battery status of the mobile phone connected, time
Calls up the Notifications Centre
⑨ Calls up an application using the symbol
Application and current information

⑪ Quick-access, e.g. enter home address
⑫ Index points and selected display area
⑬ Calls up the air conditioning menu
14 Calls up SUGGESTIONS, THEMES and FAVOURITES

If Mercedes me connect is active ⑤, the vehicle is linked with Mercedes me connect. Vehicle data is then transmitted to the back-end system. What data is transmitted depends on which services are activated. Further details can be found in the Mercedes me connect terms and conditions and data protection information. The function is country-dependent.

If Transmission of vehicle position is active ⑥, Mercedes me connect services have been activated for this vehicle which access the vehicle's geoposition. In which instances the geoposition is transmitted depends on the particular services. Further details can be found in the Mercedes me connect terms and conditions and data protection information. The function is country-dependent.

Operating the MBUX multimedia system

Using Touch Control

Diagram of a car interior showing labeled components including air filters, switches, and a central device with directional arrows.

① Shows the home screen
② Touch Control

Swipe up, down, to the left and right (to navigate) and press (to confirm)

Returns to the previous display

Navigation through the menus is carried out with Touch Control ② with single-finger swipes.

To select a menu option: swipe and press.
To move the digital map: swipe in any direction.

Using the touchscreen

Select menu options, symbols or characters by pressing briefly.
To navigate in menus: swipe up, down, left or right.
To use handwriting to enter characters: write the character with one finger on the touchscreen.
To zoom in and out of the map: move two fingers together or apart.
To call up the global menu: press and hold on the touchscreen until the OPTIONS menu appears.

Using the touchpad

Diagram showing car steering wheel and dashboard with labeled parts, including a 3D object and a close-up of the dashboard.

Returns to the previous display

Calls up the audio control menu

Calls up the home screen

Touchpad

To select a menu option: swipe and press.

To use handwriting recognition: write a character on the touchpad.

To open or close the Notifications

Centre: swipe down or up with two fingers.

To zoom in and out of the map: move two fingers together or apart.

Calling up applications using buttons

1 2 3 4 5 TEL NAVI RADIO 5 MAP MEDIA ★ ON PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF

button calls up the telephone

button calls up navigation

button calls up radio or media

button calls up vehicle functions

button

Press briefly: calls up favourites

Press and hold: adds a favourite or creates a new theme

Alternatively, tap 📋 on the touchscreen.

Call up the application ( page 258).

Functions of LINGUATRONIC

With LINGUATRONIC, various applications in the MBUX multimedia system are operable using voice input. LINGUATRONIC is operational approximately thirty seconds after the ignition is switched on and is available for the driver's seat and front passenger seat.

The following multimedia system applications can be operated:

• Navigation
• Telephone
• Radio and TV
• Media player
• Messages
• Vehicle functions

Starting LINGUATRONIC

Diagram showing car steering wheel and dashboard with a close-up of the dashboard panel labeled with icons and number 1

Press rocker switch ① up.

or ▶ Say "Hello Mercedes".

Information on profiles, themes, suggestions and favourites

For electrically adjustable seats observe the following notes.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the driver's seat after calling up a driver profile

Selecting a user profile may trigger an adjustment of the driver's seat to the position saved under the user profile. You or other vehicle occupants could be injured in the process.

Make sure that when the position of driver's seat is being adjusted using the multimedia system, no people or body parts are in the seat's range of movement.

If there is a risk of someone becoming trapped, stop the adjustment process immediately:

a) Tap the warning message on the media display.

or

b) Press a memory position button or a seat adjustment switch on the driver's door. The adjustment process will be stopped.

The driver's seat is equipped with an access point venter.

If the driver's door is open, the driver's seat will not be set after calling up the driver's profile.

Profiles store your vehicle settings and settings for the multimedia system. If the vehicle is used by several drivers, the driver can select their own profile without changing the stored profile settings of other drivers.

Information on profiles from Mercedes me connect can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual.

Vehicle settings are, for example, driver's seat, steering wheel and mirror settings, climate control and ambient lighting. For the settings of the multimedia system, you can select, for example,

radio stations, previous destinations as well as themes, suggestions and favourites.

For recurring driving situations, such as long drives on the motorway, you can save your preferred settings in a theme in the vehicle. In a theme you can save the display of the digital map, your preferred radio station and preferred drive program, for example.

The vehicle can learn the habits of the driver. It then offers suggestions for the most probable navigation destinations, media sources, radio stations or contacts. The pre-requirements for that are the selection of a profile, your consent to the recording of data and sufficient collected data.

Favourites provide quick access to applications that are used often. You can select favourites from categories or add them directly to an application.

Configuring profiles, themes and suggestions

Multimedia system:

Profiles

Creating a new profile

Select + Create profile .
Select an avatar.
Enter the name and confirm with OK.
Select Continue
Select Current settings.
Select Save.
Activate Bluetooth® and select Connect phone, to connect a mobile phone with the user profile.
▶ Select Finished.

Selecting profile options

Select ⋯ for a profile.

The following functions are available:

• Editing, resetting or deleting a profile
- Resetting themes or favourites

- Configuring suggestions

Configuring suggestions

Select ⋯ for a profile.
▶ Select Suggestions settings.
Switch Allow destination suggestions, Allow music suggestions and Allow contact suggestions on or off.
To deactivate the learning function for one day: activate Deact. learn. for 24h.

For 24 hours no new actions will be trained and no data recorded for the active profile. Suggestions will continue to be shown.

Example: if the option is switched on and a route to a new destination has been calculated, this destination would not be taken into account for the learning function.

Creating new themes

Select
Select THEMES.
Select + Set theme.

The settings which are saved in the theme are shown.

Select Continue >.
Select Audio and Navigation (Navigation) and store the active settings in the theme.
Select Continue >.
▶ Select an entry screen.
Select Continue
Select an image.
Enter the names into the entry field and confirm with OK.
Select Save.

System settings

Overview of the system settings menu

In the system settings menu, you can make settings in the following menus and control elements:

- Display

• Styles
• Instrument lighting
• Display brightness

- Edge lighting

- Day/night design

- Control elements

• Keyboard language and handwriting recognition
• Sensitivity of the Touchpad
• Sensitivity of the Touch Controls

• LINGUATRONIC

- Sound

• Entertainment
• Navigation and traffic announcements
• Telephone
• Voice amplification to the rear

- Connectivity

Wi-Fi, Bluetooth ^® , NFC

• MBUX Remote Control
- Authorising and deauthorising devices
- Time & date
- Language
- Units for distance

• Software updates
• Data import/export
• PIN protection
• System Reset

Information on important system updates

Important system updates may be necessary for the security of your multimedia system's data. Install these updates, or else the security of your multimedia system cannot be ensured.

A system update consists of three steps:

• Downloading or copying of the data required for installation
  • Installation of the downloaded system update
• Activation of the downloaded system update by restarting the system

If automatic software updates are activated, the system updates will be downloaded automatically.

The multimedia system provides a message when a system update is available.

You have the following selection options:

- Accept and install

The system update will be downloaded in the background.

• Information

Information about the pending system update is displayed.

- Later

The system update can be downloaded manually at a later time.

Deep system updates

Deep system updates access vehicle or system settings and can therefore only be carried out when the vehicle is stationary and the ignition is switched off.

If the download of a deep system update is pleted and the downloaded system update is ready for installation, you will be informed of this after the next ignition cycle, for example.

Park the vehicle safely in a suitable location before starting the installation.

Requirements for the installation:

The ignition is switched off.

Notes and warnings have been read and accepted.

• The electric parking brake is applied.

If all requirements have been fulfilled, the downloaded system update is installed. The multime dia system cannot be operated while the downloaded system update is being installed and vehicle functions are restricted.

If errors should occur during the installation, the multimedia system automatically attempts to restore the previous version. If restoration of the previous version is not possible, a symbol appears on the media display. Consult a qualified specialist workshop to resolve the problem.

Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot

Requirements:

- To set up the Wi-Fi connection of the multimedia system with external hotspots: there is no communication module install

- The device to be connected supports at least one of the types of connection described.

Multimedia system:

→ Settings ▶ System

Wi-Fi & Bluetooth

Activating/deactivating Wi-Fi

Select Wi-Fi.

Connecting the multimedia system with an external hotspot using Wi-Fi

The type of connection established must be selected on the multimedia system and on the device to be connected.

The connection procedure may differ depending on the device. Follow the instructions that are shown in the display. Further information can be found in the manufacturer's operating instructions.

▶ Select Internet settings.
▶ Select Connect via Wi-Fi.
Select Add hotspot.

Connecting using a security key

Select the options ▶ of the desired Wi-Fi network.
▶ Select Connect using security key.
Have the security key displayed on the device to be connected (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
Enter this security key on the multimedia system.
Confirm the entry with ok.

Connecting using a WPS PIN

Select the options ▶ of the desired Wi-Fi network.
▶ Select Connect using WPS PIN input. The multimedia system generates an eight-digit PIN.
Enter this PIN on the device to be connected.
▶ Confirm the entry.

Connecting using a button

Select the options ▶ of the desired Wi-Fi network.

▶ Select Connect via WPS PBC.
Select "Connect via WPS PBC" in the option on the device to be connected (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
Press the WPS button on the device to be connected.
▶ Select Continue in the multimedia system.

Activating automatic connection

▶ Select Connect via Wi-Fi.
Select the options ▶ of the desired Wi-Fi network.
▶ Activate Permanent Internet connection.

Connecting with a known Wi-Fi

▶ Select Connect via Wi-Fi.
Select a Wi-Fi network. The connection is established again.

Configuring the multimedia system as a Wi-Fi hotspot for external devices

The type of connection established depends on the device to be connected. The function must be supported by the multimedia system and by

the device to be connected. The type of connection established must be selected on the multi-media system and on the device to be connected.

▶ Select Vehicle hotspot.
▶ Select Connect device to vehicle hotspot.

Connecting using WPS PIN generation

▶ Select Connect using WPS PIN generation.
Enter the PIN shown in the media display on the device to be connected and confirm.

Connecting using WPS PIN entry

▶ Select Connect using WPS PIN input.
Enter the PIN that is shown on the external device's display on the multimedia system.

Connecting using a button

▶ Select Connect via WPS PBC.
Press the push button on the device to be connected (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
Select Continue.

Connecting using a security key

▶ Select Connect device to vehicle hotspot. A security key is displayed.
Select the vehicle from the device to be connected. The vehicle is displayed with the DIRECT-MBUX XXXXX network name.
Enter the security key which is shown in the media display on the device to be connected.
▶ Confirm the entry.

Connecting using NFC

▶ Select Connect via NFC.
Activate NFC on the mobile device (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
Hold the device to be connected at the vehicle's NFC interface.
Select Finished. The mobile device is now connected to the multimedia system hotspot via NFC.

Generating a new security key

▶ Select Vehicle hotspot.

▶ Select Generate security key. A connection will be established with the newly created security key.
To save a security key: select Save. When a new security key is saved, all existing Wi-Fi connections are then disconnected. If the Wi-Fi connections are being re-established, the new security key must be entered.

Navigation

Notes on navigation

Route guidance with augmented reality

WARNING Risk of accident and injury as a result of distraction, incorrect depiction or wrong interpretation of the display

The camera image of the augmented reality display is not suitable as a guide for driving.

Always keep an eye on the actual traffic situation.

Avoid extended observation of the camera image.

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to imprecise positioning of additional information

The additional information from the augmented reality display is not a substitute for observing the actual driving situation.

Always keep an eye on the actual traffic situation when carrying out all driving manoeuvres.

Switching navigation on

Multimedia system:

Navigation (Navigation)

Alternatively: press the NwI MOP button. The map displays the current vehicle position. The navigation menu is shown. The navigation menu is hidden if route guidance is active.

To show: tap on the touchscreen. The menu is hidden automatically.

Navigation overview

Wilhelm Haspel Straße 700m 14:22 36,9 km LIVETRAFFIC Where to? 21.0°C N 23:50 50 30 4 5

Example: digital map with navigation menu To enter a POI or address and additional destination entry options To cancel active route guidance

To repeat a navigation announcement and switch navigation announcements on or off ON ROUTE menu with Route overview, Alternative routes and Report traffic incident (Car-to-X)

TRAFFIC menu with Traffic announcements, Area announcements and Live Traffic Subscription Info To display Route list

POSITION menu with Store position, Compass and Qibla

5 Quick access for Traffic, Parking and Motorway information as well as options for View, Announcements and Route via Advanced

Entering a destination

Multimedia system:

→ ↗ Navigation ↗ Where to?

Enter POI or address PREV. DESTINATIONS > FAVOURITES > RECEIVED DESTINATIONS > POIS > Filling station Parking Restaurant

① Country in which the vehicle is located
② Entering a POI or address
3 List with additional destination entry options
④ Deletes an entry

5 OK Confirms an entry
6 Switches to handwriting recognition
⑦ Enters a space
Switches to voice input

9 Sets the written language
10 Switches to digits, special characters and symbols
⑪ Switches to upper-case or lower-case letters

Enter the destination in ②. The entries can be made in any order.

The following entries can be made, for example:

• Town, street, house number
- Street, town
- Postcode
• POI name or POI category, e.g. Parking
- Contact name

Select a search result in list 3.
Calculate the route ( page 269).

You can find further information about destination entry, e.g. 3 word addresses, in the Digital Owner's Manual.

Changing country

Select the country indicator in ①.
Enter the country indicator.
Select the country in ③.

Using online search

Destination entry uses online map services. If the on-board search finds no suitable destina-

tions or if you change countries, the online search is available.

For the destination you can enter an address, a POI or a 3 word address.

Select country indicator 1.
Select the provider for the online service from the countries list.
or
If the on-board search delivers no results, enter the destination in input line ②.
Select the destination in the list. The detailed view for the route is displayed.

Calculating a route and using settings for route guidance

Requirements:

• The destination has been entered.
• The destination address is shown.

Multimedia system:

Navigation

DESTINATION DETAILS Unter dem Linden/Staatsoper Behrenstrasse 10117 Mitte, Berlin [phone] ETA: 06:28 627 km POIs in the vicinity

① ▲ No route yet.

A route has been mapped.

Select ▲.

The route to the destination is calculated. Route guidance begins.

or

Select
▶ Select Set as intermediate dest..

The destination address is set as the next intermediate destination.

or

Select Start new route guidance. The destination address is set as the new destination. The previous destination and the intermediate destinations are deleted. Route guidance to the new destination begins.

Selecting route settings

Select
Select Advanced.
Select Route.
Select the route type.
Take traffic information into consideration with Dynamic route guidance >.
▶ Select route options with Avoid options.
▶ Activate Suggest alternative route. Alternative routes are calculated for every route.
Activate Activate commuter route. If the requirements are met, the multimedia system automatically detects that the vehicle is on a commuter route. Route guidance begins without voice output.

Activating route guidance with augmented reality

During route guidance, tap on the camera symbol on the media display. The camera image will be shown instead of the navigation map before a turning manoeuvre and will show additional information.
To return to the navigation map: tap on the camera symbol again.

Displaying additional information in the camera image

Select
Select Advanced.
▶ Select Augmented Reality.
Activate Street names and House numbers. During route guidance, street names and house numbers are shown in the camera image.

Using map functions

Multimedia system: Navigation

Setting the map scale

To zoom in: tap twice quickly with one finger on the media display.
To zoom out: tap with two fingers on the media display.

Moving the map

Move one finger in any direction on the touchscreen.
To reset the map to the current vehicle position: press ☑ briefly.
Tap repeatedly on the compass symbol on the map. The view changes in the sequence 3D, 2D heading up to 2D north up.

Selecting map orientation

Switching motorway information on/off

Select

▶ Switch Motorway information on or off.

Using services

Requirements:

• There is an Internet connection.
- Mercedes me connect is available.
- You have set up a user account in the Mercedes me Portal.
- The vehicle is connected to a user account and you have accepted the conditions of use for the service.
Further information can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me
- The service is available and has been activated.

Multimedia system:

Displaying the traffic situation with Live Traffic Information

Select
Activate Traffic.

Select Advanced.
Select View.
▶ Select Map elements.
Switch on Traffic incidents, Free-flowing traffic and Delay.

If traffic information has been received, then traffic incidents such as roadworks, road blocks, local area reports (e.g. fog) and warning messages are displayed.

The traffic delay is displayed for the current route. Traffic delays lasting one minute or longer are taken into consideration.

Displaying hazard warnings with Car-to-X-Communication

If hazard warnings are available these can be shown as symbols on the map. The display depends on the settings for the Traffic and Traffic incidents options.

Set the options.

If Traffic is switched off and Traffic incidents is switched on, the symbols are shown on the prospective route.

Displaying weather information and other map contents

Select
Select Advanced.
Select View.
Select Map elements.
▶ Scroll up and show the ONLINE MAP CONTENTS category.
Switch on a service, e.g. Weather. Current weather information is displayed on the navigation map, e.g. temperature or cloud cover.

Telephone

Telephony

Notes on telephony

A WARNING Risk of distraction from operating integrated communication equipment while the vehicle is in motion

If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

A WARNING Risk of an accident from operating mobile communication equipment while the vehicle is in motion

Mobile communications devices distract the driver from the traffic situation. This could also cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

As the driver, only operate mobile communications devices when the vehicle is stationary.
As a vehicle occupant, only use mobile communications devices in the areas intended for this purpose, e.g. in the rear passenger compartment.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating mobile communication equipment in the vehicle.

WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly

If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within.

There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

▶ Always stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations.
Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets.
▶ Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.
▶ Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the boot/load compartment.

Observe the additional information on stowing mobile communications devices correctly:

- Loading the vehicle (→ page 108)

Bluetooth ^® connection:

The menu view and the available functions in the telephone menu are in part dependent on the Bluetooth ^® profile of the connected mobile phone. Full functionality is only available if the mobile phone supports both of the following Bluetooth ^® profiles:

• PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile)

- The contacts on the mobile phone are shown automatically on the multimedia system.

• MAP (Message Access Profile)

- The mobile phone message functions be used on the multimedia system.

Irrespective of this, Bluetooth ^® audio functionality can be used with any mobile radio unit.

For information on the range of functions of the mobile radio unit to be connected, see the manufacturer's operating instructions.

Network connection:

The following cases can lead to the call being disconnected while the vehicle is in motion:

• You switch into a transmission/reception station, in which no communication channel is free.
• The SIM card used is not compatible with the network available
• A mobile phone with "Twincard" is logged into the network with the second SIM card at the same time

The multimedia system supports calls in HD Voice ^® for improved speech quality. A requirement for this is that the mobile phone and the mobile phone network provider of the person you are calling support HD Voice ^® .

Depending on the quality of the connection, the voice quality may fluctuate.

Further information can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz service centre or at: https://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect

Telephone menu overview

Phone 1 Phone 2 Call list Contacts Add favourites 9 8 7 6 5 : 21.0°C : 21.0°C

Bluetooth ^® device name of the currently connected mobile phone/of the mobile phone
Bluetooth® device name of the currently connected mobile phone/of the mobile phone (two phone mode)
3 Battery status of the connected mobile phone

4 Signal strength of the mobile phone network Telephony operating modes overview

5 Options

6 Device manager

7 Messages

8 Numerical pad

9 Contact search

Depending on your equipment, the following telephony operating modes are available:

- A mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system via Bluetooth

- Two mobile phones are connected with the multimedia system via Bluetooth(two phone mode).

• You can use all the functions of the multi-media system with the mobile phone in the foreground.
• You can receive incoming calls and messages with the mobile phone in the background.

You can interchange the mobile phone in the foreground and background.

- A mobile phone is connected as the car phone.

Connecting a mobile phone

Requirements:

• Bluetooth® is activated on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
• Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia system.

Multimedia system:

Searching for a mobile phone

Select
▶ Select Connect new device.

Connecting a mobile phone

Authorisation follows using secure simple pairing.

▶ Select a mobile phone.
A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone.
If both codes match, confirm the code on mobile phone.

Functions in the telephony menu

In the telephony menu you have the following functions, for example:

- Making calls, e.g.:

• Accept a call
• End call
• Create conferen. call

- Accepting or rejecting a waiting call

• Managing contacts, e.g.:
- Downloading mobile phone contacts
- Managing the format of a contact's name
- Saving a contact as a favourite
• Receiving and sending messages, e.g.:
- Using the read-aloud function
- Dictating a new message

Mercedes me and apps

Mercedes me connect

Information on Mercedes me connect

① Mercedes me connect or individual Mercedes me connect services are not available in every country. Find out at a Mercedes-Benz service centre if these functions are available in your country.

Mercedes me connect consists of multiple services.

You can use the following services via the multi-media system and the overhead control panel, for example:

• Accident and Breakdown Management (me button or situation-dependent display in the multimedia system)
  • Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (automatic emergency call and SOS button)

The Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Management and the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre are available to you around the clock.

The me button and the SOS button can be found on the vehicle's overhead control panel ( page 277).

You can also call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre using the multimedia system ( page 278).

Please note that Mercedes me connect is a Mercedes-Benz service. In emergencies, first call the national emergency services using the standard national emergency service telephone numbers. In emergencies, you can also use the

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ( page 286).

Observe the conditions of use for Mercedes me connect and other services. These can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com

Further information about Mercedes me connect, the provided service scope and operation: https://moba.i.daimler.com/markets/ece-row/baix/cars/connectme/en_GB/#emotions/Startseite.html

Information on Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Management

The Accident and Breakdown Management can include the following functions:

• Supplement to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (→ page 286)
  If necessary, the contact person at the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre forwards the call to Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Management. Forwarding the call is however not possible in all countries.

• Breakdown assistance by a technician on location and/or the towing away of the vehicle to the nearest Mercedes-Benz service centre
  You may be charged for these services.

• Addition to the emergency guide after automatic accident or breakdown detection ( page 278)
  In the event of a breakdown or accident, further vehicle data is sent which enables optimal support by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre and the authorised service partner or breakdown assistance.
• Addition to the Mercedes me connect service Telediagnostics
  With the Telediagnostics function, specific wear and failure reports are recorded by the service provider, in so far as these can be clearly interpreted and are available through the monitoring of components that are subject to diagnostics.
  If your vehicle detects a breakdown or threat of a breakdown, you may be prompted via the multimedia system to contact the

Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre for further help. This prompt in the multimedia system only appears when the vehicle is stationary.

These services are subject to technical restrictions such as the mobile phone coverage, mobile network quality and the ability of the processing systems to interpret the transferred data. In some circumstances, this can result in delays or the failure of the information to appear in the multimedia system.

More information about Mercedes me connect services can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com

You can find out which data is transferred when using the services in the currently valid Mercedes me connect terms of use and the data protection information for Mercedes me connect. You can find these in your Mercedes me user account.

Mercedes me calls

Making a call via the overhead control panel

① Mercedes me calls are not possible in every country. Find out at a Mercedes-Benz service centre if these functions are available in your country.

Data transferred during Mercedes me connect call services

The data transferred during a Mercedes me connect call depends on:

• The reason for initiation of the call
- The service that is selected in the voice control system
• The activated Mercedes me connect services

Diagram showing a printer inside a car's interior with labeled parts and an inset view of the printer's internal structure.

① me button for service or information calls
② SOS button cover
3 SOS button (emergency call system)

Making a Mercedes me call

Press me button 1.

Making an emergency call

To open the cover of SOS button ②, press it briefly.
Press and hold SOS button ③ for at least one second.

If a Mercedes me call is active, an emergency call can still be triggered. This has priority over all other active calls.

Information about the Mercedes me call using the me button

A call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre has been initiated via the me button in the overhead control panel or the multimedia system ( page 277).

Using the voice dialogue system you access the desired service:

• Accident and Breakdown Management
• Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre for general information about the vehicle

You can find information on the following topics:

• Activation of Mercedes me connect

- Operating the vehicle

• Nearest Mercedes-Benz service centre
- Other products and services from Mercedes Benz
Data is transferred during the connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre (→ page 280).

Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre using the multimedia system

Requirements:

• Access to a GSM network is available.
• The contract partner's GSM network coverage is available in the respective region.
• The ignition must be switched on so that vehicle data can be transferred automatically.

Multimedia system:

▶ Call Mercedes me connect. After confirmation, the multimedia system sends the required vehicle data. The data transfer is shown in the media display.

Then, you can select a service and be connected to a specialist at the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre.

Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre after automatic accident or breakdown detection

Requirements:

• The vehicle has detected an accident or breakdown situation.
  • The vehicle is stationary.
  • The hazard warning lights are switched on.

This function is not available in all countries. The vehicle can detect accident or breakdown situations under certain circumstances.

In the event an accident or breakdown is detected, the emergency guide shows safety notes in the multimedia system display.

After quitting the emergency guide display on the multimedia system, a prompt appears asking whether you would like to get support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre.

Select Call.

• After your agreement, or if the Mercedes me connect service "Accident and Breakdown Management" is active, the vehicle data is transferred automatically ( page 276).
• The Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre takes your call and organises the breakdown and accident assistance.

You may be charged for these services.

(i) Depending on the severity of the accident, an automatic emergency call can be initiated. This has priority over all other active calls.
In addition, if the Mercedes me connect service "Telediagnostics" is active, a similar prompt can appear after a delay in the event of a breakdown. If you are already in contact with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre or have already received support, this prompt can be ignored or declined.
If you answer the prompt for support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre with

Later, the message will be hidden and appear again later.

The prompt triggered by the Mercedes me connect service "Telediagnostics", can either be confirmed or declined. After being declined, this will not be shown again.

Arranging a service appointment via a Mercedes me call

If you have activated the maintenance management service, relevant vehicle data is transferred automatically to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre. You will then receive individual recommendations regarding the maintenance of your vehicle.

Regardless of whether you have consented to the maintenance management service, the multi-media system reminds you after a certain amount of time that a service is due. A prompt act appears asking if you would like to make an appointment.

To arrange a service appointment: select Call. After your agreement, the vehicle data is transferred and the Mercedes-Benz customer

centre takes your preferred appointment date. The information is then sent to your desired service outlet.

This will contact you to confirm the appointment and if necessary consult about the details.

If you select Later after the service message appears, the message is hidden and reappears at a later time.

Giving consent to data transfer during a Mercedes me call

Requirements:

• There is an active Mercedes me call via the multimedia system or the me button in the overhead control panel (→ page 277).
  i The prompt to confirm data transfer does not appear in all countries.

If the Accident and Breakdown Management services are not activated on Mercedes me, the Do you want to transmit vehicle data and the vehicle's position to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre in order to improve the process of your request? message is shown.

Select Yes.

Relevant identification data is transmitted automatically.

More information on Mercedes me: https://www.mercedes.me

Transferred data during a Mercedes me call

When you make a service call via Mercedes data is transmitted. This enables targeted advice and a smooth service.

The following requirements must be fulfilled for the transfer of the data:

• The ignition is switched on.
- The required data transfer technology is supported by the mobile phone network provider.
- The quality of the mobile connection is sufficient.

Multi-stage transfer depends on the following factors:

• Reason for the initiation of the call
- The available mobile phone transmission technology.

• The activated Mercedes me connect services.
• The service selected in the voice control system.

A prompt for consent to the data transmission only occurs if the corresponding Mercedes me connect service is not activated.

Data transfer if Mercedes me connect services are not activated

If no Mercedes me connect services are activated and the data protection prompt has been confirmed the following data is transmitted:

• Vehicle identification number
- Time of the call
• Reason for the initiation of the call
- Confirmation of the data protection prompt
• Country indicator of the vehicle
- Set language for the multimedia system
- Telephone number of the communication platform installed in the vehicle

If a call is made for a service appointment via the service reminder, the following data is also transmitted:

• Current mileage and maintenance data

If a call is made after automatic accident or breakdown detection using the multimedia system, the following data is also transmitted:

• Current mileage and maintenance data
• Current vehicle location

If Accident and Breakdown Management is called via the voice control system and no service has been activated, but the data protection query has been confirmed, the following data can also be called up from the vehicle by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre:

• Current vehicle location

If the data protection prompt has been rejected, the following data is transmitted to enable targeted advice and an efficient service:

• Reason for the initiation of the call
- Rejection of the data protection prompt
• Country indicator of the vehicle

• Set language for the multimedia system
• Telephone number of the communication platform installed in the vehicle

Data transfer if Mercedes me connect services are activated

Only if the respective service is activated will additional incident-specific data be transmitted in the second stage to enable an optimal service.

An overview of the data transmitted can be found in the respective terms of use for Mercedes me connect services. These can be obtained in the Mercedes me portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com

Data processing

The data transmitted within the scope of the call is deleted from the processing system after the call is finished, in so far as this data is not being used for other activated Mercedes me connect services.

The incident-specific data is processed and stored in the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre and, if required to process the incident, forwarded to the service partner authorised by the

Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre. Please take note of the data protection information on the Mercedes me Internet page https://www.mercedes.me or in the recorded message immediately after calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre.

The recorded message is not available in every country.

Overview of the Mercedes me & Apps menu

When you log in with a user account to the Mercedes me Portal, then services and offers from Mercedes-Benz will be available to you.

For more information consult a Mercedes-Benz service centre or visit the Mercedes me portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com

i Make sure you always keep the Mercedes me apps updated.

You can call up the menu using Mercedes me & Apps in the multimedia system.

In the Mercedes me & Apps menu, the follow options can be available:

• Connecting the vehicle with the Mercedes me user account
• Deleting a connection between a Mercedes me user account and the vehicle
• Calling up the Mercedes me services
• Calling up apps such as, In-Car Office or th web browser depending on availability

Overview of In-Car Office

Using In-Car Office, you can connect your online services with the multimedia system.

Requirements for In-Car Office:

• Your mobile phone is connected with the multimedia system.
• You have a user account for the Mercedes me Portal.
• The In-Car Office service is activated in the Mercedes me Portal.
• You have a user account with an online service, e.g. Office 365, and have connected

the online service with your user account in the Mercedes me Portal.

In-Car Office functions:

- Display pending appointments in the calendar

• Reading out calendar entries
• Calling (requirement being that a telephone number is saved)
• Navigating to appointments (requirement being that the appointment contains a navigable destination)

• Deleting a calendar entry

• Display and selection of tasks and calls to complete

• Reading aloud
• Calling (requirement being that a telephone number is saved)
• Deleting
• Noting calls
• Declining incoming calls and saving as a task in the Tasks & calls menu
• Marking entry in Tasks & calls as completed

- Managing e-mails

- Showing/reading e-mails

- Writing and forwarding e-mails

① You can start the In-Car Office function using the Mercedes me & Apps menu. Please note that certain functions are only available when the vehicle is stationary.

Web browser overview

The web browser is started using the Mercedes me & Apps menu.

Google Add View Download Password: 01 New sites New sites New Date URL

① URL entry
2 Bookmarks
③ Web page, back
4 Web page, forwards
5 To refresh/stop
6 Options
① Websites cannot be shown while the vehicle is in motion.

Overview of smartphone integration

With Smartphone Integration, you can use certain functions on your mobile phone via the multimedia system display.

Only one mobile phone at a time can be connected via Smartphone Integration to the multimedia system. Also for use with two phone mode with smartphone integration, only one additional mobile phone can be connected using Bluetooth ^® with the multimedia system.

The full range of functions for Smartphone Integration is only possible with an Internet connection. The appropriate application must be downloaded on the mobile phone to use Smartphone Integration. The mobile phone must be switched on and connected to a USB port with the symbol on the multimedia system using a suitable cable.

Apps for Smartphone Integration

• Mercedes-Benz Link (implementation of the function using the Mercedes-Benz Link control box)
• Apple CarPlay®
• Android Auto

You can start Smartphone Integration using the Mercedes me & Apps menu.

You can end Smartphone Integration by disconnecting the connecting cable between the mobile phone and multimedia system.

Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting the connecting cable only when the vehicle is stationary.

Overview of transferred vehicle data

When using Smartphone Integration, certain vehicle data is transferred to the mobile phone. This enables you to get the best out of selected mobile phone services. Vehicle data is not directly accessible.

The following system information is transmitted:

- Software release of the multimedia system

• System ID (anonymised)

The transfer of this data is used to alter how content is displayed to correspond to the driving situation.

The following position data is transmitted:

• Coordinates
• Speed
• Compass direction
  • Acceleration direction

This data is used by the mobile phone to improve the accuracy of the navigation (e.g. for continuation in a tunnel).

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

Information on available emergency call systems

Two types of emergency call system are available to you in the vehicle:

• Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
• 112 emergency call system (EU eCall)

The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is not available in all countries. You can find more information on the regional availability of eCall at: https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/extra/ecall/

The following applies for both emergency call systems:

• The transfer of specific data is required for the intended function of both emergency call systems. This will be explained in the "Data transfer" section ( page 287).
• Both emergency call systems are included as standard equipment in your vehicle and are activated at the factory.
• The use of both emergency call systems is exempt from charges.
• Both emergency call systems only function in areas in which the mobile phone network providers offer mobile phone coverage.

For both systems, insufficient network coverage from the mobile phone network providers can result in an emergency call not being transmitted.

Differences between the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system and 112 emergency call system (EU eCall)

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

112 emergency call system (EU eCall)

The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is permanently logged in to the mobile phone network.Automatic and manual Mercedes-Benz emergency calls are transmitted to a Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre.In the event that the emergency call centre of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system cannot be reached (e.g. due to a lack of network coverage), the 112 emergency call is carried out automatically.

If you decide to use the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall), then the system only logs in to the mobile phone network after the triggering of a manual or automatic emergency call.The 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) transmits automatic and manual emergency calls directly to public coordination centres.

The 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) in your vehicle meets the delegated regulation EU 2017/79. Proper and full functionality of the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) depends on circumstances beyond the influence of Mercedes-Benz AG. This includes mobile network coverage and the technical infrastructure of the public reception centres in the respective countries.
Please observe that in the event of a repair genuine Mercedes-Benz batteries must be used which have been certified pursuant to the delegated regulation EU 2017/79

(Appendix I). Other manufacturers are also permitted provided their batteries are certified according to the delegated regulation EU 2017/79.

There is the option of deactivating the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system and using only the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall). Contact address for carrying out deactivation of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system are the local dealers.

Mercedes-Benz recommends the activation of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system for the following reasons:

• In emergency situations when abroad, you can also get support in a language you speak.
• Several transmission technologies are used to accelerate the transfer of the accident data and improve reliability of the transmission.
• The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is permanently logged in to the mobile phone

network, which ensures faster placement of the emergency call and faster transfer of accident data.

Measures for rescue, recovery or towing away can then be initiated in quickly.

- With a Mercedes-Benz emergency call, the accident data is only transferred to the public coordination centre with the approval of the customer.

In the event of an automatically triggered emergency call in which there is no voice contact, the accident data is transmitted immediately to the public emergency call centre.

- Should the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre not be available, the 112 emergency call is carried out automatically.

Overview of emergency call systems

Both the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system as well as the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) can help to reduce the time between an accident and the arrival of emergency services

at the site of the accident. They help locate an the accident site in places that are difficult to access.

Both emergency call systems can initiate an emergency call automatically ( page 286) or manually.

Only make emergency calls if you or others are in need of rescue. Do not make an emergency call in the event of a breakdown or a similar situation.

Messages on the display

The following messages appear in the display of both emergency call systems:

- SOS NOT READY: the ignition is not on or R eCall is not available. This does not necessarily indicate complete failure of the emergency call system. Emergency calls call still be transmitted.

The display only refers to the vehicle and does not take account of the availability of mobile phone networks and the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre.

The functional readiness of the emergency call system on the vehicle can be seen when the SOS NOT READY display disappears once the ignition is switched on.

- SOS: The icon appears in the display during an active emergency call.

If there is a malfunction in the emergency call system (e.g. a fault with the speaker, microphone, airbag, SOS button), a corresponding message appears in the multifunction display of the instrument cluster.

Triggering an automatic emergency call

Requirements:

• The ignition is switched on.
• The starter battery is sufficiently charged.

Both the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system as well as the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) automatically initiate an emergency call after:

- Activation of the restraint systems such as airbags or seat belt tensioners after an accident

The emergency call has been made:

• A voice connection is established with the emergency call centre.
• A message with accident data is transmitted to the emergency call centre.

The SOS button in the overhead control panel flashes until the emergency call is finished.

If no connection can be made to the public emergency services, a corresponding message appears in the display.

Dial the emergency number 112 or an appropriate local emergency call number on your mobile phone.

If an emergency call has been initiated:

• Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emergency call centre.
• On the basis of the call, the emergency call centre decides whether it is necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site.
• If no vehicle occupant answers, an ambulance is sent to the vehicle immediately.

Triggering a manual emergency call

To use the SOS button in the overhead control panel: press the SOS button at least one second long ( page 277).
To use voice control: use the LINGUA-TRONIC voice commands.

The emergency call has been made:

- A voice connection is established with an emergency call centre.

• Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emergency call centre.
• On the basis of the call, the emergency call centre decides whether it is necessary to call rescue teams and the police to the accident site.
• A message with accident data is transmitted to the emergency call centre.

If no connection can be made to the public emergency services, a corresponding message appears in the media display.

Dial the emergency number112 or an appropriate local emergency call number on your mobile phone.

Emergency call system data transmission

For both the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system as well as the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) data is transferred to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre or the public emergency services call centre.

Depending on the emergency call system

(→ page 284) activated different data is trans-

mitted to the appropriate emergency call centre.

Transmitted data according to activated emergency call system:

Mercedes-Benz emergency call

112 emergency call

Vehicle's GPS position dataGPS position data on the route(a few hundred metres before the incident)Direction of travelVehicle identification numberDrive type of the vehicle (e.g. petrol, CNG, LPG, electric or hydrogen)Number of people determined to be in the vehicleWhether the emergency call was initiated manually or automaticallyTime of the accidentLanguage setting on the multimedia systemWhether Mercedes me connect is available or notThis is a requirement for the option of forwarding the call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre if necessary.

Vehicle's GPS position dataGPS position data on the route(a few hundred metres before the incident)Direction of travelVehicle identification numberDrive type of the vehicle (e.g. petrol, CNG, LPG, electric or hydrogen)Number of people determined to be in the vehicleWhether the emergency call was initiated manually or automaticallyTime of the accident

If only the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) is activated in the vehicle, the accident data is transmitted directly to the public emergency call centre.

For accident clarification purposes, the following measures can be taken up to an hour after the emergency call has been initiated:

• The current vehicle position can be determined.
• A voice connection to the vehicle occupants can be established.
  • Emergency call data can be called up.

For Russia: various functions, e.g. receiving traffic information, cannot be performed for up to two hours after sending an emergency call.

Self diagnosis function of the emergency call system

Your car verifies the operability of the emergency call system each time the ignition is ON. In case of system failure, you will be informed with text message on the instrument cluster and

with red indicator SOS NOT READY on the display.

*Please, make sure, that during 30 seconds after switching ignition ON the red indicator SOS NOT READY in the upper right corner of display is switched OFF, this means the emergency call system passed diagnostics successfully.

Starting/ending ERA-GLONASS test mode

Requirements:

• The starter battery is sufficiently charged.
• The ignition is switched on.
- The vehicle has been stationary for at least one minute.

The test mode is currently available in the following countries, for example:

• Russia
• Belarus
• Kazakhstan
• Armenia
• Kyrgyzstan

To start the test mode: press and hold the button on the multifunction steerin, wheel for at least five seconds.
The test mode is started and automatically ends after the language test has been performed.
To end the test mode manually: switch off the ignition.
The test mode is ended.

Information on data processing

Processing of personal data via the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

All processing of personal data via the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system corresponds with the specifications in the EU Regulation 2016/679 "on the protection of individuals with regard to the processing of personal data (GDPR)".

The data is solely used by the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system for rescue and recovery in the event of an accident.

The owner of a vehicle, that is equipped with a Mercedes-Benz emergency call system in addition to the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall), has the right to use the 112 emergency call system instead of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system.

Contact address for carrying out deactivation of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system are the local dealers.

Processing of personal data via the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall)

All processing of personal data via the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) corresponds with the specifications in the EU Regulation 2016/679 "on the protection of individuals with regard to the processing of personal data (GDPR)" and is based particularly on the necessity of upholding the vital interests of the affected person in accordance with Article 6, Clause 1, Letter d of the GDPR.

The processing of this type of data is strictly limited to the purpose of operating the emergency calls to the standard European emergency call number 112.

Data recipient

The recipients of data that is processed using the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) are the relevant emergency call inquiry terminals that are specified to first receive and handle emergency calls to the standard European emergency call number 112 by the respective country authorities in whose territory you are located.

Arrangements for data processing

Both emergency call systems are designed so that the following requirements are fulfilled:

• The data contained in the system memory not accessible outside the system prior to the initiation of an emergency call.
• Both emergency call systems cannot be traced and there is no continuous tracking normal operation.
• The data in the system's internal memory automatically and continuously deleted.
• The location data of the vehicle is continuously overwritten in the system's internal memory, so that no more than the last three current locations required for the normal function of the system are available.

- The record of the activity data of both emergency call systems is only kept for as long as is required to fulfil the purpose of handling the emergency call, however for no longer than 13 hours after the time that an emergency call is initiated.

Rights of persons affected by the data processing

The person affected by the data processing (the vehicle owner) has the right to access the data and if applicable can demand the correction, deletion or barring of data that affects him or her and that the processing of which does not correspond with the GDPR regulations. Each correction, deletion or barring carried out according to this regulation must be shared with the third party to which the data has been transmitted, provided this does not prove to be infeasible and is does not incur disproportionate expenditure.

The person affected by the data processing has the right to complain to the appropriate data protection authority should they be of the opinion that their rights have been infringed by the processing of their personal data.

Radio, media & TV
Overview of the symbols and functions in the media menu

Symbol Designation Function
	Play	Select to start or continue playback.
	Rest	Select to pause the playback.
	Repeat a track	Select to repeat the current track or the active playlist.Select once: the active playlist is repeated.Select twice: the current track is repeated.Select three times: the function is deactivated.
	Random playback	Select to play back the tracks in random order.
	Skip forwards/back	Select to skip to the next or to the previous track.
	Options Select to show additional options.
	Categories	Select to show or search through available categories (e.g. playback lists, albums, artists, etc.).
	Search	Select to search in the active menu. You can search for artists, genres or moods, for example.
	Settings	Select to make settings.
	Home	Select to return to the home screen.
	Messaging Select to call up messaging.
	Full screen	Select to switch to full screen mode.

The following functions and settings are available in the media menu:

- Connecting external data storage media with the multimedia system (e.g. using USB or Bluetooth ^® )

• Playing back audio or video files
  • Streaming online music
• Looking at TV programmes in the TV menu

Additional functions in the TV menu

Symbol Designation	F	u	n	c	t	i	o
	Settings			Select to make settings in the TV menu. The following functions can be switched on/off or configured:Channel fixCountry-specific character setAudio languageSubtitlesTeletextPicture format
i	EPG			Select to show current programme information for the channel.
	Channel list			Select to show a list of available channels with the current programme.

Authorising a Bluetooth ^® audio device for media playback

Requirements:

- Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia system and audio equipment.

• The audio equipment supports the Bluetooth® audio profiles A2DP and AVRCP.
• The audio equipment is "visible" for other devices.

Multimedia system:

With Bluetooth ^® audio, you can play back music files from an external data storage medium, e.g. your smartphone, using the MBUX multimedia system.

To play back audio files using the multimedia system, authorise the external data storage medium on the MBUX multimedia system.

Authorising a new Bluetooth ^® audio device

▶ Select Connect new device.
▶ Select an audio device.

Authorisation starts. A code is displayed on the multimedia system and on the mobile phone.

If the codes are identical, confirm on the audio equipment.
Select Only as Bluetooth audio device. The Bluetooth® audio equipment is connected with the multimedia system.

Connecting previously authorised Bluetooth® audio equipment

Select a Bluetooth® audio device from the list. The connection is being established.

Receiving TV channels in HD quality

NOTE Damage to the Cl+ module and Smart Card

The Cl + module is designed for use in the home. The Cl + module can overheat and be damaged by continuous exposure to high outside temperatures.

Make sure that the Cl+ module is not subject to high temperatures for extended periods of time. If the Cl+ module is damaged, no encrypted channels can be received.

The Cl+ module is not available in all countries.

A CI+ module (Common Interface Module), which is not included in the scope of delivery, is used to decrypt HD programmes according to the CI+ standard.

In some countries, an additional smart card is required, which is inserted into the Cl+ module (see the manufacturer's operating manual).

The Cl+ module is connected in the Cl+ box in the glove compartment.

To insert the smart card in the Cl+ module: if required (country-dependent), insert the smart card into the Cl+ module slot.
The Cl+ box is designed for operation at temperatures between 0 °C and 65 °C. At operating temperatures that are higher or too low a message appears in the multimedia system and the Cl+ module is switched off automatically. If the Cl+ module is switched off, no encrypted channels can be received.

Overview of the symbols and functions in the radio menu

Symbol	D	esignation Function
	Home	Select to return to the home screen.
	Messaging Select to call up messaging.
	Skip forwards/back	Select to skip to the next or to the previous station.
	Settings	Select to have further options shown. Settings can be made to the following additional functions, for example:Navigation and traffic announcementsFrequency fix functionRadio additional textEmergency warningsThe setting options are country-dependent.
	Full screen	Select to switch to the DAB slide show.This function is not available in all countries.
	Silent function	Select to switch off the sound.
	Store radio stations	Select to save a station in the presets.

Symbol Designation Function

	Station list	Select to have the station list shown.
	Search	Select to search in the active menu. You can search for artists, genres or moods, for example.

Additional functions of Tuneln radio

A relatively large volume of data can be transmitted when using TuneIn Radio.

Symbol Designation Function

	Settings	The following additional settings are available in the Tuneln Radio menu:Selecting streamLogging on to or out of the Tuneln account
	Favourites	Select during playback to save the station currently set as a favourite.

Symbol Designation Function

/	Play/Pause	Select to start, stop or continue playback.
	Browse	Select to choose a category and then a radio station.

Depending on the frequency band selected, different functions are available to you.

Select the desired frequency band in the radio menu head runner.

Calling up Tuneln Radio

Requirements:

• A Mercedes me account is available.
- The vehicle is connected with the Mercedes me account.
- The TuneIn Radio service is activated in the Mercedes me Portal.
- The data volume is available. Depending on the country, data volume may need to be purchased.

- A fast Internet connection for data transmission free of interference.

① Data volume can be purchased directly from a mobile phone network provider via the Mercedes me Portal.

The functions and services are country-dependent. For more information, consult a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

Multimedia system:

→ ▶ Radio

▶ Select Tuneln Radio. The Tuneln menu appears. The last station set starts playing.

The connection quality depends on the local mobile phone reception.

Sound settings

Overview of functions in the sound menu

The setting options and functions available depend on the sound system fitted. You can find out which sound system is fitted in your vehicle in the Digital Owner's Manual.

Standard sound system and Advanced sound system

The following functions are available:

• Equaliser
Treble, mid-range and bass
• Balance and fader
• Volume
- Automatic adjustment

Burmester ^® surround sound system and Burmester ^® high-end 3D surround sound system

The following functions are available:

• Equaliser:
- Treble, mid-range and bass
• Balance and fader
- Sound focus
- VIP seat (Burmester® high-end 3D surround sound system only)
- Sound profiles
• Volume:
- Automatic adjustment

ASSYST PLUS service interval display

Function of the ASSYST PLUS service interval display

The ASSYST PLUS service interval display on the instrument display provides information on the remaining time or distance before the next service due date.

You can hide this service display using the back button on the left-hand side of the steering wheel.

Depending on how the vehicle is used, the ASSYST PLUS service interval display may shorten the service interval, e.g. in the following cases:

• mainly short-distance driving
- when the engine is often left idling for long periods
• in the event of frequent cold start phases

Mercedes-Benz recommends avoiding such operating conditions.

You can obtain information concerning the servicing of your vehicle from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Displaying the service due date

On-board computer:

Service ▶ ASSYST PLUS

The next service due date is displayed.

To exit the display: press the back button on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. Bear in mind the following related topic:

- Operating the on-board computer (→ page 251).

Information on regular maintenance work

! NOTE Premature wear through failure to observe service due dates

Maintenance work which is not carried out at the right time or incompletely can lead to increased wear and damage to the vehicle.

Adhere to the prescribed service intervals.
▶ Always have the prescribed maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Special service requirements

The prescribed service interval is based on normal operation of the vehicle. Maintenance work will need to be performed more often if the vehicle is operated under arduous conditions or increased loads.

The ASSYST PLUS service interval display is only an aid. The driver of the vehicle bears responsibility as regards to whether maintenance work needs to be performed more often than specified based on the actual operating conditions and/or loads.

Examples of arduous operating conditions:

• regular city driving with frequent intermediate stops
  • mainly short-distance driving

• frequent operation in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces

• when the engine is often left idling for long periods
  • operation in particularly dusty conditions and/or if air-recirculation mode is frequently used

In these or similar operating conditions, have the interior air filter, engine air cleaner, engine oil and oil filter etc. changed more frequently. The tyres must be checked more frequently if the vehicle is operated under increased loads. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Battery disconnection periods

The ASSYST PLUS service interval display can only calculate the service due date when the battery is connected.

Note down the service due date displayed on the instrument display before disconnecting the battery ( page 299).

Engine compartment

Active bonnet (pedestrian protection)

Operation of the active bonnet (pedestrian protection)

In certain accident situations, the actuation of the active bonnet reduces the risk of injury to pedestrians. The rear area of the bonnet is raised by approximately 85 mm.

For the drive to the workshop, reset the actuated active bonnet yourself ( page 300).

After the active bonnet has been actuated, pedestrian protection may be limited. Have the full functionality of the active bonnet restored in a qualified specialist workshop.

Resetting the active bonnet

WARNING Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compartment

Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.

Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following.

Diagram of a car hood with directional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols present)

With your hand flat, push down active bonnet ① in the area around the hinges on both sides (arrows).
In doing so, the actuator is depressurised and you may hear a hissing sound.
The engine bonnet must engage in position.
If the active bonnet can be raised slightly at the rear in the area of the hinges, repeat the step until it engages correctly.

Opening and closing the bonnet

⚠ WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the bonnet unlocked

The bonnet may open and block your view.

▶ Never release the bonnet when driving.
Before every trip, ensure that the engine bonnet is locked.
WARNING Risk of accident and injury when opening and closing the bonnet

The bonnet may suddenly drop into the end position.

There is a risk of injury for anyone in the bonnet's range of movement.

Open or close the bonnet only when there is nobody in the bonnet's range of movement.

WARNING Danger of burns when opening the bonnet

If you open the engine bonnet when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids.

Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.
In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the engine bonnet closed and call the fire service.

WARNING Risk of injury due to moving parts

Components in the engine compartment may continue running or start up suddenly, even if the ignition is switched off.

Make sure of the following before performing tasks in the engine compartment:

▶ Switch the ignition off.

▶ Never reach into the danger zone surrounding moving components, e.g. the rotation area of the fan.
Remove jewellery and watches.
Keep items of clothing and hair away from moving parts.

WARNING Risk of injury from touching components under voltage

The ignition system and the fuel injection system work under high voltage. You could receive an electric shock.

▶ Never touch components of the ignition system or the fuel injection system when the ignition is switched on.

WARNING Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compartment

Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.

▶ Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following.

A WARNING Risk of injury from using the windscreen wipers while the engine bonnet is open

When the engine bonnet is open, and the windscreen wipers are set in motion, you can be trapped by the wiper linkage.

▶ Always switch off the windscreen wipers and ignition before opening the engine bonnet.

Opening the bonnet

Line drawing of a car interior with a close-up inset showing a device labeled '1' (no text or symbols on the device itself)

To release the bonnet, pull on handle ①.

Diagram showing a car with a device labeled '①' pointing to a mechanical component, likely illustrating a process or assembly.

Push handle ① of the bonnet catch upwards and lift the bonnet by approximately 40 cm.

Closing the bonnet

Lower the bonnet and press it firmly into the lock with both hands.
If the bonnet can be lifted a little bit more, repeat the procedure until it engages correctly.

Engine oil

Checking the engine oil level using the on-board computer

Requirements:

• the engine has been warmed up.
• the vehicle is parked on a level surface.
• The engine is running at idle speed.

The engine oil level is determined during driving. Determining the engine oil level can take up to 30 minutes with a normal driving style and even longer with an active driving style.

On-board computer:

→ Service ▶ Engine oil level

You will see one of the following messages on the multifunction display:

• Engine oil level Measuring now: measurement of the oil level is not yet possible.

Repeat the request after a maximum of 30 minutes' driving.

• Engine oil level OK and the bar display for indicating the oil level on the multifunction

display is green and is between "min" and "max": the oil level is correct.

• Engine oil level Add 1,0 l and the bar display for indicating the oil level on the multifunction display is orange and is below "min":
  ▶ Add 1 l of engine oil.
• Reduce engine oil level and the bar display for indicating the oil level on the multifunction display is orange and is above "max":
  Drain off any excess engine oil that has been added. To do so, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
  • For engine oil level turn on ignition
  Switch on the ignition to check the engine oil level.
  • Engine oil level System inoperative: The oil level sensor is defective or not connected.
  Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
  • Engine oil level System currently unavail.
  Close the bonnet.

Topping up engine oil

WARNING Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compartment

Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.

Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following.

WARNING Risk of fire and injury from engine oil

If engine oil comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine compartment, it may ignite.

Make sure that no engine oil is spilled next to the filler opening.
Allow the engine to cool off and thoroughly clean the engine oil from component parts before starting the vehicle.

! NOTE Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or additives
Do not use engine oils or oil filters which do not correspond to the specifications explicitly prescribed for the service intervals.
▶ Follow the instructions on the service interval display for changing the engine oil and observe the prescribed change intervals.
Do not use additives.

! NOTE Damage caused by topping up too much engine oil

Too much engine oil can damage the engine or the catalytic converter.

Have excess engine oil removed at a qualified specialist workshop.

Depending on driving style, the vehicle consumes up to 0.8 l of oil per 1000 km. The oil consumption may be higher than this when

the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds.

1 Mercedes-Benz Oil recommended

Mercedes-AMG GT 63 4MATIC+, Mercedes-AMG GT 63-S 4MATIC+ and Mercedes-AMG GT 73 4MATIC+

① △500

Mercedes-AMG GT 43, Mercedes-AMG GT 43 4MATIC+ and Mercedes-AMG GT 53 4MATIC+

▶ Turn cap ⓘ anti-clockwise and remove it.
Top up the engine oil.
Replace cap ① and turn it clockwise until it engages.
▶ Check the oil level again ( page 303).

Checking the coolant level

⚠ WARNING Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compartment

Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.

Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following.

⚠ WARNING Risk of scalding from hot coolant

If you open the cap, you could be scalded.

Let the motor cool down before opening the cap.

When opening the cap, wear protective gloves and safety glasses.

Open the cap slowly to release pressure.

Diagram of car dashboard and rearview seat components with numbered labels indicating parts of the seat.

Park the vehicle on a level surface.

▶ Check the coolant temperature display in the instrument cluster.

The coolant temperature must be below 70^ C.

Slowly turn cap ① anti-clockwise to release overpressure.

Continue turning cap ① anti-clockwise and remove it.

The coolant level is correct in the following cases:

- if the engine is cold, the coolant is up to marker bar ②.

- if the engine is warm, the coolant is up to 1.5 cm over the marker bar ②.

If necessary, top up with coolant that has been approved for Mercedes-Benz.

(i) Further information on coolant ( page 359)

Topping up the windscreen washer system

WARNING Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compartment

Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.

Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following.

WARNING - Risk of fire and injury due to windscreen washer concentrate

Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system.

Make sure that no windscreen washer concentrate spills out next to the filler opening.

Interior view of a car showing the hood and engine compartment with a highlighted circular component (no text or symbols visible)

Remove cap ① by the tab.
Top up the washer fluid.

Keeping the air-water duct free

Keep the area between the bonnet and the windscreen free of deposits, e.g. ice, snow and leaves.

Cleaning and care

Information on washing the vehicle in a car wash

A WARNING Risk of an accident due to reduced braking power after washing the vehicle
Braking efficiency is reduced after washing the vehicle.
After the vehicle has been washed, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until braking power has been fully restored.
NOTE Damage from automatic braking

If one of the following functions is switched on, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations:

• Active Brake Assist
• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
- HOLD function

• Active Parking Assist

To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar situations:

during towing
in a car wash

! NOTE Damage due to unsuitable car wash

Before driving into a car wash make sure that the car wash is suitable for the vehicle dimensions.
▶ Ensure there is sufficient ground clearance between the underbody and the guide rails of the car wash.
▶ Ensure that the clearance width of the car wash, in particular the width of the guide rails, is sufficient.

To avoid damage to your vehicle when using a car wash, ensure the following beforehand:

• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated.
• the HOLD function is switched off.
- the 360° Camera or the reversing camera is switched off.
- the extendable rear wing is completely retracted.
- the side windows and sliding sunroof are completely closed.
- the blower for the ventilation/heating is switched off.
- the windscreen wiper switch is in position 0.
- the key is at a minimum distance of 3 m away from the vehicle. Otherwise the tailgate could open unintentionally.
- for car washes with a conveyor system: neutral [N] is engaged.

In car washes with a conveyor system: if you leave the vehicle while it is being washed,

make sure the key is located in the vehicle. The park position P is otherwise automatically engaged.

If, after the car wash, you remove the wax from the windscreen and wiper rubbers, this will prevent smearing and reduce wiper noise.

Information on using a high-pressure cleaner

WARNING Risk of an accident when using high-pressure cleaners with round-spray nozzles

The water jet can cause externally invisible damage.

Components damaged in this way may unexpectedly fail.

Do not use a high-pressure cleaner with round-spray nozzles.
Have damaged tyres or chassis parts replaced immediately.

To avoid damage to your vehicle, observe the following when using a high-pressure cleaner:

• the key is at a minimum distance of 3 m away from the vehicle. Otherwise the tailgate could open unintentionally.
• maintain a distance of at least 30 cm to the vehicle.
• vehicles with decorative foil: parts of your vehicle are covered with a decorative foil. Maintain a distance of at least 70 cm between the foil-covered parts of the vehicle and the nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner. Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle around whilst cleaning. The water temperature of the high-pressure cleaner must not exceed 60°C.
• observe the information on the correct distance in the implement manufacturer's operating instructions.
• do not direct the nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner directly at sensitive parts, e.g. tyres, gaps, electrical components, batteries, light sources and ventilation slits.

Washing the vehicle by hand

NOTE Engine damage due to water ingress

Take care not to point the water jet directly towards the air inlet grille below the bonnet.

observe the legal requirements, e.g. in a number of countries, washing by hand is only permitted in specially designated wash bays.

▶ Use a mild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo.
Wash the vehicle with lukewarm water using a soft car sponge. When doing so, do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight.
Carefully hose the vehicle off with water and dry using a chamois.
i Observe the notes on the care of car parts ( page 310).

Notes on paintwork/matt finish paintwork care

Observe the notes on cleaning and care to avoid damaging the paintwork.

Paint

• Insect remains: soak with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
• Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off afterwards.
• Tree resin, oils, fuels and greases: remove by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid.
• Coolant and brake fluid: remove with a damp cloth and clean water.
  • Tar stains: use tar remover.
• Wax: use silicone remover.
• Do not attach stickers, films or similar materials.
• Remove dirt immediately, where possible.

Matt finish

- Only use care products approved for Mercedes-Benz.

• Do not polish the vehicle and light-alloy wheels.
• Only use car washes that correspond to the latest engineering standards.
• Do not use car wash programmes with a hot wax treatment.
• Do not use paint cleaners, buffing or polishing products, gloss preservers, e.g. wax.
• Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Notes on cleaning decorative foils

Observe the notes on matt finish care in the chapter "Notes on paintwork/matt finish paint-work care" ( page 308). They also apply to matt decorative foils.

Observe the notes on cleaning decorative foils to avoid vehicle damage.

Cleaning

- For cleaning, use plenty of water and a mild cleaning agent without additives or abrasive substances, e.g. a car shampoo approved for Mercedes-Benz.

- Remove dirt immediately, where possible, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the decorative foil irreparably.

final If there is dirt on the finish or if the decorative foil is dull: use the Paint Cleaner recommended and approved for Mercedes-Benz.

• Insect remains: soak with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
• Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off afterwards.
• To prevent water stains, dry a foil-wrapped vehicle with a soft, absorbent cloth after every car wash.

Avoiding damage to the decorative foil

- The service life and colouring of decorative foils are impaired by:

• sunlight
• temperature, e.g. hot air blower
• weather conditions
• stone chippings and dirt
• chemical cleaning agents

- oily products

• Do not use polish on matt decorative foil. Polishing will have the effect of shining the foil-wrapped surface.
• Do not treat matt or structured decorative foils with wax. Permanent stains may occur.

Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by incorrect care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop.

You can obtain more information on care and cleaning products from the manufacturer. In the case of foil-wrapped surfaces, optical differences may occur between the surfaces that were not protected by a decorative foil after removing a decorative foil.

i Have work or repairs to decorative foils carried out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. in a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Notes on care of car parts

WARNING Risk of entrapment if the windscreen wipers are switched on while the windscreen is being cleaned

If the windscreen wipers are set in motion while you are cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm.

▶ Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades.

WARNING Risk of burns from the tailpipe and tailpipe trims

The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself.

Always be particularly careful around the tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and supervise children especially closely in this area.

Allow vehicle parts to cool down before touching them.

To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the notes on cleaning and care of the following vehicle parts:

Wheels and rims

• use water and acid-free alloy wheel cleaners.
- do not use acidic alloy wheel cleaners to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components.
- to avoid corrosion of the brake discs and brakepads, drive the vehicle for a few minutes after cleaning before parking it. The 'brake discs and brakepads warm up and dry out.

Windows

• clean the windows inside and outside with a damp cloth and with a cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
• do not use dry cloths or abrasive or solvent-based cleaning agents to clean the inside of windows.

Wiper blades

• move the wiper arms into the replacement position ( page 132).
• with the wiper arms folded out, clean the wiper blades with a damp cloth.
  • do not clean the wiper blades too often.

Exterior lighting

• clean the lenses with a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo.
  • only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.

Sensors

• clean the sensors in the front and rear bumpers with a soft cloth and car shampoo (→ page 178).
• when using a high-pressure cleaner, maintain a minimum distance of 30 cm.

Reversing camera and 360° Camera

• open the camera cover with the multimedia system (→ page 230).
• use clean water and a soft cloth to clean the camera lens.

• do not use a high-pressure cleaner.

Extendable rear wing

• extend the rear wing when washing by hand (→ page 222).
• clean the rear wing with a soft car sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo.
• retract the rear wing completely after drying ( page 222).
  • do not use a high-pressure cleaner.

Tailpipes

• clean with a cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz, especially in the winter and after washing the vehicle.
  • do not use acidic cleaning agents.

Trailer hitch

• observe the notes on care in the trailer hitch manufacturer's operating instructions.
• do not clean the ball neck with a high-pressure cleaner or solvent.
• remove traces of rust on the ball, e.g. with a wire brush.
• remove dirt with a lint-free cloth.

• after cleaning, lightly oil or grease the ball head.
Before using trailers with anti-torsional coupling, observe the manufacturer's operating instructions.

Notes on care of the interior

⚠ WARNING Risk of injury from plastic parts breaking off after the use of solvent-based care products

Care and cleaning products containing solvents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. When the airbags are deployed, plastic parts may break away.

Do not use any care or cleaning products containing solvents to clean the cockpit.

⚠ WARNING Risk of injury or death from bleached seat belts

Bleaching or dyeing seat belts can severely weaken them.

This can, for example, cause seat belts to tear or fail in an accident.

▶ Never bleach or dye seat belts.

To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the following notes on cleaning and care:

Seat belts

• clean with lukewarm and soapy water.
  • do not use chemical cleaning agents.
• do not dry by heating them to over 80^ C or exposing them to direct sunlight.

Display

• switch off the display and let it cool down.
• clean the surface carefully with a microfibre cloth and a suitable display care product (TFT-LCD).
  • do not use any other agents.

Plastic trim

• clean with a damp microfibre cloth.

• for heavy soiling: use a cleaner recommended for Mercedes-Benz.

• do not attach stickers, films or similar materials.

• do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sun cream to come in contact with the plastic trim.

Real wood and trim elements

• clean with a microfibre cloth.
- black piano-lacquer look: clean with a damp cloth and soapy water.
- for heavy soiling: use a cleaner recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
- do not use solvent-based cleaning agents, polishes or waxes.

Roof lining

- clean with a brush or dry shampoo.

Carpet

- use a carpet and textile cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz.

Steering wheel made of genuine leather or DINAMICA

NOTE Damage caused by wrong cleaners

Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover or wheel cleaner; neither should you use polishes or waxes. Otherwise you may damage the finish.

• Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water solution and then wipe with a dry cloth.
• For heavy soiling: use a cleaner recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
  • Leather care: use a leather care agent that has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
• Do not allow the leather to become too damp.
• Do not use a microfibre cloth.

Leather is a natural product. It has natural surface properties, such as differences in structure, marks caused by growth and injury or subtle colour differences.

Genuine leather seat covers

• Clean with a damp cloth and then wipe with a dry cloth.
  • Leather care: use a leather care agent that has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
• Do not allow the leather to become too damp.
• Do not use a microfibre cloth.

DINAMICA seat covers

• Clean with a damp cloth.
• Do not use a microfibre cloth.

Imitation leather seat covers

• Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water.
• Do not use a microfibre cloth.

Fabric seat covers

- Clean with a damp microfibre cloth and 1% soap solution and allow to dry.

Emergency

Removing the safety vest

The safety vests are located in the stowage compartments in the driver and front passenger door.

To remove: pull out the safety vest bag by the loop.
Open the safety vest bag and pull out the safety vest.
There are also safety vest compartments in the rear door stowage compartments in which safety vests can be stored.

① Max. 15x ② 40° ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ 2

① Maximum number of washes
② Maximum wash temperature
Do not bleach
Do not iron
Do not tumble dry
Do not dry clean
⑦ Class 2 safety vest

The requirements defined by the legal standard are only fulfilled if the safety vest is the correct size and is fully closed.

Replace the safety vest in the following cases:

• the reflective strips are damaged or dirty

• the maximum permissible number of washes is exceeded
  • the fluorescence has faded

Warning triangle

Removing the warning triangle

Technical diagram showing a component with labeled point '1' and a highlighted section in blue, likely indicating a location or feature.

Open load compartment floor ①.

Remove the warning triangle.

Setting up the warning triangle

graph TD
    A["1"] --> B["2"]
    A --> C["3"]
    A --> D["3"]

Fold side reflectors ① upwards to form a triangle and attach at the top using upper press-stud ②.
Fold legs ③ down and out to the side.

First-aid kit (soft-sided) overview

Diagram of a car interior with a labeled component marked '1' pointing to the interior area.

First-aid kit (soft sided) ① is under the load compartment floor on either the left-hand or right-hand side, depending on the model.

Removing the fire extinguisher

WARNING Risk of accident due to an incorrectly secured fire extinguisher in the driver's footwell

A fire extinguisher may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.

This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle.

The fire extinguisher can be flung around and injure the driver or other vehicle occupants.

Always store and secure the fire extinguisher in the bracket.
Do not remove the fire extinguisher while driving.

Diagram of car seatbelt mechanism with numbered labels pointing to key components

Left-hand drive vehicle: pull tab upwards.
Remove fire extinguisher ②.

Flat tyre

Notes on flat tyres

WARNING Risk of accident due to a flat tyre

A flat tyre severely affects the driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking of the vehicle.

Tyres without run-flat characteristics:

Do not drive with a flat tyre.
Change the flat tyre immediately with an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel. Alternatively, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Tyres with run-flat characteristics:

Observe the information and warning notes on MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres).

In the event of a flat tyre, the following options are available depending on your vehicle's equipment:

• Vehicles with MOExtended tyres: it is possible to continue the journey for a short period of time. Make sure you observe the notes on MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres) ( page 315).
• Vehicles with a TREFIT kit: you can repair the tyre so that it is possible to continue the journey for a short period of time. To do this, use the TREFIT kit ( page 317).
• Vehicles with Mercedes me connect: you can make a call for breakdown assistance via the overhead control panel in the case of a breakdown ( page 277).
• All vehicles: change the wheel (→ page 343).

Notes on MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres)

WARNING Risk of accident when driving in limp-home mode

Driving in emergency mode impairs the handling characteristics of the vehicle.

Do not exceed the permissible maximum speed of the MOExtended tyres.
Avoid any abrupt steering and driving manoeuvres as well as driving over obstacles (kerbs, pot holes, off-road). This applies, in particular, to a loaded vehicle.
▶ Stop driving in the emergency mode if you notice:
- banging noise
- vehicle vibration
• smoke which smells like rubber
• continuous ESP ^ intervention
• cracks in the tyre sidewalls
After driving in emergency mode, have the rims checked by a qualified special-

ist workshop with regard to their further use.
The defective tyre must be replaced in every case.

With MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tyres. ever, the tyre affected must not show any clearly visible damage.

You can recognise MOExtended tyres by the MOExtended marking which appears on the wall of the tyre.

Vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring system: MOExtended tyres may only be used in conjunction with an activated tyre pressure monitoring system.

If a pressure loss warning message appears in the multifunction display, proceed as follows:

• Check the tyre for damage.
  • If driving on, observe the following notes.

Driving distance possible in emergency mode after the pressure loss warning:

Load condition Driving distance possible in emergency mode

Partially laden 80 km

How Fully laden 30 km

The driving distance possible in emergency mode may vary depending on the driving style. Observe the maximum permissible speed of 80 km/h.

If a tyre has gone flat and cannot be replaced with an MOExtended tyre, you can use a standard tyre as a temporary measure.

TREFIT kit storage location

The TREFIT kit is located under the load compartment floor.

Diagram of a car interior with numbered components, likely indicating engine or valve parts.

① Tyre inflation compressor

② Tyre sealant bottle

You can find information on the power category (LK) and/or electrical data on the back of the tyre inflation compressor:

• LK2 - 12 V/15 A, 180 W, 0.8 kg

At a distance of approximately 1 m to the tyre inflation compressor and approximately 1.6 m above the ground, the following sound pressure levels apply:

• Emission sound pressure level PA L 83 dB (A)
  • Sound power level LWA 91 dB (A)

The tyre inflation compressor is maintenance-free. If there is a malfunction, please contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Using the TREFIT kit

Requirements:

• Tyre sealant bottle and tyre inflation compressor ( page 316).
• TREFIT sticker
• Gloves (depending on the vehicle equipment)

You can use TREFIT tyre sealant to seal perforation damage of up to 4 mm, particularly those in the tyre contact surface. You can use TREFIT in outside temperatures down to -20^ C.

WARNING Risk of accident when using tyre sealant

The tyre sealant may be unable to seal the tyre properly, especially in the following cases:

• there are large cuts or punctures in the tyre (larger than damage previously mentioned)
  • the wheel rims have been damaged
  • after journeys with very low tyre pressure or with flat tyres
  Do not continue driving.
  Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

WARNING Risk of injury and poisoning from tyre sealant

Tyre sealant is hazardous to health and causes irritation. Do not allow it to come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing, and do not swallow it. Do not inhale any vapours. Keep the tyre sealant away from children.

Observe the following if you come into contact with the tyre sealant:

Rinse off the tyre sealant from your skin using water immediately.

If tyre sealant gets into your eyes, thoroughly rinse them using clean water immediately.
If tyre sealant has been swallowed, thoroughly rinse out your mouth immediately and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention immediately.
Change out of clothing which has come into contact with tyre sealant immediately.
If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately.

NOTE Overheating due to the tyre inflation compressor running too long

Do not run the tyre inflation compressor for longer than ten minutes without interruption.

Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes on the sticker on the tyre inflation compressor.

Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced in a qualified specialist workshop every five years.

Do not remove any foreign objects which have entered the tyre.

MAX 80 50 Km/h Mph TIRFETI ① ②

Affix part ① of the TIREFIT sticker to the instrument cluster within the driver's field of vision.
Affix part ② of the TREFIT sticker near the valve on the wheel with the defective tyre.

Diagram of a device with numbered components and labeled parts, including a cylindrical component and connected cables.

Pull plug ④ with the cable and hose ⑤ of the tyre inflation compressor housing.
Push the plug of hose ⑤ into flange ⑥ of tyre sealant bottle ① until the plug engages.
Place tyre sealant bottle ① head downwards into recess ② of the tyre inflation compressor.

7 8

Remove the valve cap from valve ⑦ on the faulty tyre.
Screw filling hose ⑧ onto valve ⑦.
Insert plug ④ into a 12 V socket in your vehicle.

outSwitch on the ignition.

Switch on the tyre inflation compressor using On/Off switch ③.

The tyre is inflated. First, tyre sealant is pumped into the tyre. The pressure may briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).

Do not switch off the tyre inflation compressor during this phase!

Let the tyre inflation compressor run for a maximum of ten minutes. The tyre should then have attained a tyre pressure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi).

If tyre sealant leaks out, make sure you clean affected area as quickly as possible. It is preferable to use clean water.

If you get tyre sealant on your clothing, have it cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethylene.

If, after ten minutes, a tyre pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been attained:

Switch off the tyre inflation compressor.
Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the defective tyre.

Please note that tyre sealant may leak out when unscrewing the filling hose.

Drive forwards or in reverse very slowly for approximately 10 m.

Pump up the tyre again. After a maximum of ten minutes the tyre pressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi).

the WARNING Risk of accident due to the specified tyre pressure not being attained

If the minimum tyre pressure is not reached after the specified time, the tyre is too badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in this instance.

The braking and driving characteristics may be greatly impaired.

▶ Do not continue driving.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

If, after ten minutes, a tyre pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been attained:

▶ Switch off the tyre inflation compressor.
Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the defective tyre.

WARNING Risk of accident from driving with sealed tyres

A tyre temporarily sealed with tyre sealant impairs the handling characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds.

Adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully.
Do not exceed the maximum speed limit with a tyre that has been repaired using tyre sealant.

Observe the maximum permissible speed for a tyre sealed with tyre sealant 80 km/h.

NOTE Staining from leaking tyre sealant

After use, excess tyre sealant may leak out from the filling hose.

Therefore, place the filling hose in the plastic bag that contained the TREFIT kit.

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental pollution caused by environmentally irresponsible disposal

Tyre sealant contains pollutants.

Have the tyre sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Stow the tyre sealant bottle and the tyre inflation compressor.
▶ Pull away immediately.
Stop driving after approximately ten minutes and check the tyre pressure using the tyre inflation compressor. The tyre pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).

WARNING Risk of accident due to the specified tyre pressure not being attained

If the specified tyre pressure is not reached, the tyre is too badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in this instance.

The braking and driving characteristics may be greatly impaired.

Do not continue driving.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Countries that have Mercedes-Benz

Service24h: you will find a sticker with the telephone number, e.g. on the B-pillar on the driver's side.

Correct the tyre pressure if it is still at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the tyre pressure table on the fuel filler flap for values.
To increase the tyre pressure: switch on the tyre inflation compressor.

Diagram showing a device with labeled parts including gauges and tool icons, likely for industrial or testing purposes.

To reduce the tyre pressure: press pressure release button ① next to manometer ②.
When the tyre pressure is correct, unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the sealed tyre.
Screw the valve cap onto the valve of the sealed tyre.
▶ Pull the tyre sealant bottle out of the tyre inflation compressor. The filling hose stays on the tyre sealant bottle.

Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop and have the tyre, tyre sealant bottle and filling hose replaced there.

Battery (vehicle)

Notes on the 12 V battery

WARNING Risk of an accident due to work carried out incorrectly on the battery

Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can, for example, lead to a short circuit. This can restrict functions relevant for safety systems and impair the operating safety of your vehicle.

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular:

• when braking
• in the event of abrupt steering manoeuvres and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions

In the event of a short circuit or a similar incident, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Do not drive on.
▶ Always have work on the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

• Further information on ABS ( page 180)
• Further information on ESP

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

All vehicles except vehicles with a lithium-ion battery

⚠ WARNING Risk of explosion due to electrostatic charge

Electrostatic charge can ignite the highly explosive gas mixture in the battery.

To discharge any electrostatic charge that may have built up, touch the metal

vehicle body before handling the battery.

The highly flammable gas mixture is created while the battery is charging and during starting assistance.

WARNING Danger of chemical burns from the battery acid

Battery acid is caustic.

Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.
Do not lean over the battery.
▶ Do not inhale battery gases.
Keep children away from the battery.
Immediately rinse battery acid off thoroughly with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention immediately.

All vehicles

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of batteries

Batteries contain pollutants. It is dispose of them with the household

Dispose of batteries in an mentally responsible manner. Charged batteries to a qualified workshop or to a collection used batteries.

If you have to disconnect the 12 V battery, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Comply with safety notes and take protective measures when handling batteries.

Risk of explosion.

Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks.

Electrolyte or battery acid is corrosive. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse electrolyte or acid splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor if necessary.

Wear safety glasses.

Keep children away.

Observe this Owner's Manual.

Observe the following if you do not intend to use the vehicle over an extended period of time:

• Activate standby mode.
• Alternatively: connect the battery to a battery charger approved by Mercedes-Benz or consult a qualified specialist workshop to disconnect the battery.

Notes on starting assistance and charging the 12 V battery

Vehicles with a lithium-ion battery

When charging the battery and during starting assistance, always use the jump-start connection point in the engine compartment.

! NOTE Damage to the battery from over-voltage

When charging using a battery charger without a restriction of the maximum charging voltage, the battery or the on-board electronics can be damaged.

Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.

All other vehicles

When charging the battery and during starting assistance, always use the jump-start connection point in the engine compartment.

! NOTE Damage to the battery from over-voltage

When charging using a battery charger without a restriction of the maximum charging voltage, the battery or the on-board electronics can be damaged.

Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.

WARNING Risk of explosion from hydrogen gas igniting

There is a danger of hydrogen gas igniting when charging the battery if there is a short circuit or sparks start to form.

▶ Make sure that the positive terminal of the connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts.
▶ Never place metal objects or tools on a battery.
The described order of the battery clamps must be observed when connecting and disconnecting the battery.
When giving starting assistance, always make sure that you only connect battery terminals with identical polarity.
During starting assistance, you must observe the described order for connecting and disconnecting the jump lead.
Do not connect or disconnect the battery clamps while the engine is running.

WARNING Risk of explosion during charging process and starting assistance

During the charging process and starting assistance, the battery may release an explosive gas mixture.

Avoid fire, naked flames, creating sparks and smoking.
Make sure there is sufficient ventilation.
Do not lean over a battery.

⚠ WARNING Risk of explosion from a frozen battery

A discharged battery may freeze at temperatures slightly above or below freezing point.

During starting assistance or battery charging, battery gas can be released.

▶ Always allow a battery to thaw before charging it or performing starting assistance.

If the indicator/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up at low temperatures, it very likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery.

The service life of a battery that has been thawed may be dramatically shortened. The starting characteristics may be impaired, especially at low temperatures.

It is recommended that you have a thawed battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

All vehicles

NOTE Damage caused by numerous or extended attempts to start the engine

Numerous or extended attempts to start the engine may damage the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel.

Avoid numerous and extended attempts to start the engine.

Observe the following points during starting assistance and when charging the battery:

• Only use undamaged jump lead/charging cables with a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.
• Non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps must not come into contact with other metal parts while the jump lead/charging cable is connected to the battery/jump-start connection point.
• The jump lead/charging cable must not come into contact with any parts which may move when the engine is running.
  • Always make sure that neither you nor the battery is electrostatically charged.
• Keep away from fire and naked flames.
• Do not lean over the battery.

Observe the additional following points when charging the battery:

• Only use battery chargers tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz.
• Read the battery charger's operating instructions before charging the battery.

Observe the additional following points during starting assistance:

• Starting assistance may only be provided using vehicles, batteries or other jump start devices with a nominal voltage of 12 V.
  • The vehicles must not touch.
• Vehicles with a petrol engine: jump-start the vehicle only when the engine and exhaust system are cold.

Starting assistance and charging the 12 V battery

Requirements:

• The vehicle is secured with the electric parking brake.
• Vehicles with automatic transmission: the transmission is in position P.
• The ignition and all electrical consumers are switched off.
  • The bonnet is open.

Diagram showing car engine components with numbered annotations and tool tips, likely for repair or maintenance instructions.

Example: engine compartment

Slide cover ① of positive clamp ② on the jump-starting connection point in the direction of the arrow.
Connect positive clamp ② on your vehicle to the positive pole of the donor battery using When the starting assistance/charging process the jump lead/charging cable. Always begin is complete, perform the following steps:

with positive clamp ② on your own vehicle first.

During starting assistance: start the engine of the donor vehicle and run at idle speed.
Connect the negative pole of the donor battery and earth point ③ of your own vehicle by using the jump lead/charging cable. Begin with the donor battery first.
During starting assistance: start the engine of your own vehicle.
During the charging process: start the charging process.
During starting assistance: let the engines run for several minutes.
During starting assistance: before disconnecting the jump lead, switch on an electric consumer in your own vehicle, e.g. the rear window heater or lighting.

First, remove the jump lead/charging cable from earth point ③ and the negative pole of the donor battery, then from positive clamp ② and the positive pole of the donor battery. Begin each time with the contacts on your own vehicle first.
After removing the jump lead/charging cable, close cover ① of positive clamp ②.

Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Replacing the 12 V battery

Observe the notes on the 12 V battery ( page 321).

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the 12 V battery replaced at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Observe the following notes if you want to replace the battery yourself:

• Always replace a faulty battery with a battery which meets the specific vehicle requirements.
  The vehicle is equipped with an AGM technology battery (Absorbent Glass Mat) or a lithium-ion battery. Full vehicle functionality is only guaranteed with an AGM battery or lithium-ion battery. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

• Carry over detachable parts, such as vent hoses, elbow fittings or terminal covers from the battery being replaced.

• Make sure that the vent hose is always connected to the original opening on the side of the battery.
  Fit any existing or supplied cell caps. Otherwise, gases or battery acid could escape.

• Make sure that detachable parts are reconnected in the same way.

Tow-starting or towing away

Permitted towing methods

Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your vehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather than towing it away.

For towing, use a tow rope or tow bar with both axles on the ground. Do not use tow bar systems.

NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to towing away incorrectly

Observe the instructions and notes on towing away.

Permitted towing methods

Vehicle equipment/towing method
	Both axles on the ground	Front axle raised	Rear axle raised
Vehicles with automatic transmission	Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h	No	Yes, if the steering wheel is fixed in the centre position with a steering wheel lock.
4MATIC vehicles	Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h	No	No

Towing with a raised axle: towing should be performed by a towing company.

Towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground

Observe the notes on the permitted towing methods ( page 326).
Make sure that the battery is connected and charged.

Observe the following points when the battery is discharged:

• the engine cannot be started
- the electric parking brake cannot be released or applied
- vehicles with automatic transmission: the automatic transmission cannot be shifted to position N or P

① Vehicles with automatic transmission: if the automatic transmission cannot be shif-

ted to position [N], or the multifunction display in the instrument cluster does not show anything, have the vehicle transported away ( page 329). A towing vehicle with lifting equipment is required for vehicle transportation.

! NOTE Damage due to towing away at excessively high speeds or over long distances

The drivetrain could be damaged when towing at excessively high speeds or over long distances.

A towing speed of 50 km/h must not be exceeded.
A towing distance of 50 km must not be exceeded.

⚠ WARNING Risk of accident when towing a vehicle which is too heavy

If another vehicle is tow-started or towed away, its weight must not exceed the permissible gross mass of your own vehicle, otherwise the following could occur:

• the towing eye may become detached.
- the vehicle/trailer combination may swerve or even overturn.
If another vehicle is tow-started or towed away, its weight must not exceed

the permissible gross mass of your own vehicle.

If a vehicle must be tow-started or towed away, its permissible gross weight must not exceed the permissible gross weight of the towing vehicle.

Information on the permissible gross mass the vehicle can be found on the vehicle identification plate ( page 352).

▶ Vehicles with automatic transmission: do not open the driver's door or front passenger door, otherwise the automatic transmission automatically shifts to position P. ▶ Fit the towing eye ( page 330). ▶ Fasten the tow bar.

! NOTE Damage due to incorrect connection of the tow bar
Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to the towing eyes.
Deactivate the automatic locking mechanism ( page 79).

Do not activate the HOLD function.
Deactivate tow-away protection ( page 95).
Deactivate Active Brake Assist ( page 205).
Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the automatic transmission to position N.
Release the electric parking brake.

WARNING Risk of accident due to limited safety-related functions during the towing process

Safety-related functions are limited or no longer available in the following situations:

• the ignition is switched off.
- the brake system or power steering system is malfunctioning.
- the energy supply or the on-board electrical system is malfunctioning.

When your vehicle is then towed away, significantly more effort may be required to steer and brake than is normally required.

▶ Use a tow bar.
Make sure that the steering wheel can move freely before towing the vehicle away.

! NOTE Damage due to excessive tractive power

If you pull away sharply, the tractive power may be too high and the vehicles could be damaged.

▶ Pull away slowly and smoothly.

Loading the vehicle for transport

Observe the notes on towing away ( page 327).
Connect the tow bar to the towing eye in order to load the vehicle.

i You can also attach the tow bar to the trailer hitch.
▶ Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the automatic transmission to position N.
Vehicles with automatic transmission: the automatic transmission may be locked in position in the event of damage to the electrical system. To shift to , provide the on-board electrical system with power ( page 324).
Load the vehicle onto the transporter.
▶ Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the automatic transmission to position P.
Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away.
Only secure the vehicle by the wheels.

Vehicles with ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System PLUS)

WARNING Risk of an accident when transporting vehicles with Adaptive Damping System PLUS

The reduced damping forces on the vehicle being transported can cause the vehicle/trailer combination to start to swing.

As a result, when transporting vehicles with the Adaptive Damping System PLUS, the vehicle/trailer combination may start to skid. Consequently, you could lose control of your vehicle.

When transporting, ensure that:
- the vehicle has been loaded onto the transporter correctly
- the vehicle is secured at all four wheels with suitable tensioning straps
- the maximum permissible speed of 60 km/h is not exceeded when transporting

! NOTE Damage to the vehicle from securing it incorrectly

After loading, the vehicle must be secured on all four wheels. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged.
A minimum distance of 20 cm upwards and 10 cm downwards must be kept to the transport platform.

Secure the vehicle on all four wheels after loading.

4MATIC vehicles/vehicles with automatic transmission

Diagram of two cars on a track with a blue X mark, no text or symbols present

Make sure that the front and rear axles come to rest on the same transportation vehicle.

! NOTE Damage to the drivetrain due to incorrect positioning

Do not position the vehicle above the connection point of the transport vehicle.

Towing eye storage location

Top-down line drawing of a car interior showing the hood and seat area with a numbered indicator (1) pointing to a blue circular symbol on the seat.

The towing eye is under the load compartment floor under cover ①.

Installing the towing eye

Technical diagram of a car front panel with labeled parts, showing grille and side profiles for engine or dashboard design.

To fit the front towing eye: pull out cover ①.
To fit the rear towing eye: press the mark on cover ① inwards and remove.
Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it will go and tighten.

Vehicles with a trailer hitch: vehicles with a trailer hitch do not have a rear bracket for the towing eye. Fasten the tow bar to the trailer hitch.

Make sure that cover ① engages in the bumper when you remove the towing eye.

NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to incorrect use of the towing eye

When a towing eye is used to recover a vehicle, the vehicle may be damaged in the process.

Only use the towing eye to tow away or tow start the vehicle.

Tow starting the vehicle (emergency engine start)

Vehicles with automatic transmission

NOTE Damage to the automatic transmission due to tow-starting

The automatic transmission may be damaged in the process of tow-starting vehicles with automatic transmission.

▶ Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be tow-started.

▶ Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be tow-started.

Electrical fuses

Notes on electrical fuses

⚠ WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to overloaded lines

If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher

amperage, the electric line could be overloaded.

This could result in a fire.

Always replace faulty fuses with specified new fuses containing the correct amperage.

NOTE Damage due to incorrect fuses

Electrical components or systems may be damaged by incorrect fuses, or their functionality may be significantly impaired.

Only use fuses that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz and which have the correct fuse rating.

Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognise by the colour and fuse rating. The fuse ratings and further information to be observed can be found in the fuse assignment diagram.

Fuse assignment diagram: on the fuse box in the load compartment ( page 333).

! NOTE Damage or malfunctions caused by moisture

Moisture may cause damage to the electrical system or cause it to malfunction.

When the fuse box is open, make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box.
When closing the fuse box, make sure that the seal of the lid is positioned correctly on the fuse box.

If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop.

Ensure the following before replacing a fuse:

• The vehicle is secured against rolling away.
- All electrical consumers are switched off.
• The ignition is switched off.

The electrical fuses are located in various fuse boxes:

- Fuse box in the engine compartment on the driver's side (→ page 332)

• Fuse box on the driver's side of the cockpit (→ page 333)
• Fuse box in the front passenger footwell (→ page 333)
• Fuse box in the load compartment on the right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel ( page 333)

Opening and closing the fuse box in the engine compartment

Requirements:

• A dry cloth and a screwdriver are available.

Observe the notes on electrical fuses ( page 331).

Opening

A WARNING Risk of injury from using the windscreen wipers while the engine bonnet is open

When the engine bonnet is open, and the windscreen wipers are set in motion, you can be trapped by the wiper linkage.

▶ Always switch off the windscreen wipers and ignition before opening the engine bonnet.

Diagram of a car engine bay with internal components and a magnified inset showing internal components (no text or symbols)

Turn clips ② on cover ① anti-clockwise a quarter-turn.
Pull cover ① upwards in the direction of the arrow.

Top-down view of a car engine bay with a close-up inset showing internal components (no text or symbols visible)

Remove any existing moisture from the fuse box using a dry cloth.
Loosen screws ④, remove fuse box lid ③ from the top.

Closing

Check whether the seal is positioned correctly in lid ③.

Insert lid ③ into the bracket at the rear of the fuse box.
Fold down lid ③ of the fuse box and tighten screws ④.
Insert cover ① on both sides.
Turn clips ② on cover ① clockwise a quarter-turn.
Close the bonnet.

Opening and closing the fuse box in the cockpit

The fuse box is on the side of the dashboard under a cover.
Contact a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for further information.

Opening and closing the fuse box in the front passenger footwell

Observe the notes on electrical fuses ( page 331).

Diagram showing car interior with directional arrow and labeled component '1' in a window

Open cover ① in the direction of the arrow and remove it.

Opening and closing the fuse box in the load compartment

Observe the notes on electrical fuses ( page 331).

Line drawing of a car interior showing the nose and seat area with a numbered label (1) pointing to the nose area.

Remove cover 1.

The fuse allocation chart is on the side of the fuse box.

Notes on noise or unusual handling characteristics

Make sure there are no vibrations, noises or unusual handling characteristics when the vehicle is in motion. This may indicate that the wheels or tyres are damaged. Hidden tyre damage could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics.

If you suspect that a tyre is defective, reduce your speed immediately and have the tyres and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tyres

WARNING Risk of injury due to damaged tyres

Damaged tyres can cause tyre pressure loss.

▶ Check the tyres regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tyres immediately.

WARNING Risk of aquaplaning due to insufficient tyre tread

Insufficient tyre tread will result in reduced tyre grip.

The risk of aquaplaning is increased on wet roads, especially when the speed of the vehicle is not adapted to suit the conditions.

Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tyres.

Minimum tread depth for:

- Summer tyres: 3 mm

- M+S tyres: 4 mm

For safety reasons, replace the tyres before the legally-prescribed limit for the minimum tread depth is reached.

Carry out the following checks on all wheels regularly, at least once a month or as required, for example, prior to a long journey or driving off-road:

- Check the tyre pressure (→ page 336).

- Visually inspect wheels and tyres for damage.

- Check the valve caps.

- Visual check of the tyre tread depth and the tyre contact surface across the entire width. The minimum tread depth for summer tyres is 3 mm and for winter tyres 4 mm.

Notes on snow chains

⚠ WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrect snow chain fitting

If you have fitted snow chains to the front wheels, the snow chains may drag against the vehicle body or chassis components.

This could cause damage to the vehicle or the tyres.

▶ Never fit snow chains on the front wheels.
Only fit snow chains on the rear wheels in pairs.

! NOTE Damage to the wheel trim from fitted snow chains

If snow chains are fitted to steel wheels, the wheel trims can be damaged.

Remove the wheel trims of steel wheels before fitting snow chains.

Observe the following notes when using snow chains:

• Snow chains are only permissible for certain wheel/tyre combinations. You can obtain information about this from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

• For safety reasons, only use snow chains that have been specifically approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains with the same quality standard.

• If snow chains are fitted, the maximum permissible speed is 50 km/h.

• Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: do not use Active Parking Assist when snow chains are fitted.
  You can permanently limit the maximum vehicle speed for driving with winter tyres ( page 191).
  You can deactivate ESP to pull away ( page 184). This allows the wheels to spin, achieving an increased driving force.

Tyre pressure

Notes on tyre pressure

WARNING Risk of accident due to insufficient or excessive tyre pressure

Tyres with either too low or too high a pressure present the following hazards:

• the tyres could burst

• the tyres could wear excessively and/or unevenly
• the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking characteristics may be severely impaired
  Observe the recommended tyre pressures and check the tyre pressures of all tyres including the spare wheel:
• monthly
  • if altering the load on the vehicle
  • prior to long journeys
• if the operating conditions change, for example when driving off-road
  Adjust the tyre pressure where necessary.

Tyre pressure which is too high or too low can:

• Shorten the service life of the tyres.
• Cause increased tyre damage.
• Adversely affect driving characteristics and thus driving safety, e.g. due to aquaplaning.

WARNING Risk of accident due to repeated pressure drop in the tyres

The wheels, valves or tyres could be damaged.

Too low a tyre pressure can lead to the tyres bursting.

Examine the tyres for foreign objects.
▶ Check whether the tyre has a puncture or the valve has a leak.
If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Information on the recommended tyre pressure for the vehicle's factory-fitted tyres can be found on the tyre pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap ( page 337).

Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tyre pressure. The outer appearance of a tyre does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tyre pressure.

Only correct tyre pressures when the tyres are cold. Conditions for cold tyres:

• The vehicle has been parked with the tyres out of direct sunlight for at least three hours.
  • The vehicle has travelled less than 1.6 km.

The vehicle's tyres heat up when driving. As the temperature of the tyres increases, so too does the tyre pressure.

Vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring systems: you can also see the tyre pressure in the driver's display.

Notes on trailer operation

Always inflate the rear axle tyres to the recommended tyre pressures on the tyre pressure table for increased load.

Tyre pressure table

The tyre pressure table is on the inside of the fuel filler flap.

If one or more tyre sizes precede a tyre pressure, the following tyre pressure information is only valid for those tyre sizes and their respective load condition.

If the preceding tyre sizes are complemented by the [1] symbol, the tyre pressure information following shows alternative tyre pressures. Fuel consumption may then increase slightly.

The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the table for different numbers of passengers and amounts of luggage. Actual number of seats may differ from this.

Tyre pressure monitoring system

Function of the tyre pressure monitoring system

The system checks the tyre pressure and the tyre temperature of the tyres fitted to the vehicle by means of a tyre pressure sensor.

The tyre pressure and the tyre temperature appear in the on-board computer ( page 33

If there is a substantial pressure loss or if the tyre temperature is excessive, you will be warned in the following ways:

• via display messages ( page 412).
- via the ⏻ warning lamp in the instrument cluster (→ page 432)

The tyre pressure monitoring system is only an aid. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tyre

pressure to the recommended cold tyre pressure suitable for the operating situation.

^h in most cases, the tyre pressure monitoring tem will automatically update the new reference values after you have changed the tyre pressure. You can, however, also update the reference values by restarting the tyre pressure monitoring system manually ( page 432).

System limits

The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations:

• the tyre pressure has been set incorrectly sudden pressure loss caused by a foreign object penetrating the tyre, for example
• there is a malfunction caused by another radio signal source

Checking the tyre pressure with the tyre pressure monitoring system

Requirements:

• The ignition is switched on.

On-board computer:

Service ▶ Tyres

sysOne of the following displays appears:

- Current tyre pressure and tyre temperature of the individual wheels:

260 58° 260 58° 260 58° 260 58° 1kPa

• Tyre pressures will be displayed after a few minutes of driving
• Tyre pressure monitor active: the teach-in process of the system is not yet complete. The tyre pressures are already being monitored.

Compare the tyre pressure with the recommended tyre pressure for the current operat-

ing condition ( page 337). Observe the notes on tyre temperature ( page 336).

The values displayed in the on-board computer may deviate from those of the tyre pressure gauge as they refer to sea level. At high elevations, the tyre pressure values indicated by a pressure gauge are higher than those shown by the on-board computer. In this case, do not reduce the tyre pressure.

Restarting the tyre pressure monitoring system

Requirements:

- The recommended tyre pressure is correctly set for the respective operating status on all of the wheels ( page 336).

Restart the tyre pressure monitoring system in the following situations:

• The tyre pressure has changed.
- The wheels or tyres have been changed or newly fitted.

On-board computer:

Service ▶ Tyres

Swipe downwards on Touch Control on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. The Use current pressures as new reference values? message is shown in the multifunction display.
To restart, press Touch Control on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. The Tyre press. monitor restarted message shown in the multifunction display. Current warning messages are deleted and the yellow ⏻ warning lamp goes out.

After you have been driving for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tyre pressures are within the specified range. The current tyre pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored.

Be sure to also pay attention to the following related topic:

• Notes on tyre pressure ( page 336)

Wheel change

Notes on selecting, fitting and replacing tyres

WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrect dimensions of wheels and tyres

If wheels and tyres of the wrong size are used, the wheel brakes or wheel suspension components may become damaged.

Always replace wheels and tyres with those that fulfil the specifications of the original part.

When replacing wheels, make sure to fit the correct:

• Designation
• Type

When replacing tyres, make sure to fit the correct:

• Designation
• Manufacturer
• Type

WARNING Risk of injury through exceeding the specified tyre load-bearing capacity or the permissible speed rating

Exceeding the load-bearing capacity of the tyres can lead to tyre damage and could cause the tyres to explode.

Therefore, only use tyre types and sizes approved for your vehicle model.
▶ Observe the tyre load-bearing capacity rating and speed rating required for your vehicle.
NOTE Vehicle and tyre damage through tyre types and sizes that have not been approved

For safety reasons, only use tyres, wheels and accessories which have been specially approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.

These tyres are specially adapted to the control systems, such as ABS, E and 4MATIC, and marked as follows:

• MO = Mercedes-Benz Original
• MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (run-flat tyres only for certain wheels)
- MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only certain AMG tyres)

Certain characteristics, such as handling, vehicle noise emissions, consumption, etc. may otherwise be adversely affected. Furthermore, other tyre sizes could result in the tyres rubbing against the body and axle components when loaded. This could result in damage to the tyre or the vehicle.

Only use tyres, wheels and accessories that have been checked and recommended by Mercedes-Benz.

NOTE Risk to driving safety from retrea- ded tyres

Retreaded tyres are neither tested nor recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tyres.

For this reason driving safety cannot be guaranteed.

Do not use used tyres if you have no information about their previous usage.

NOTE Possible damage to wheels or tyres when driving over obstacles

Large wheels have a lower tyre section width. The lower the tyre section width, the greater is the risk of damage to wheels or tyres when driving over obstacles.

Avoid obstacles or drive particularly carefully.

! NOTE Possible wheel and tyre damage when parking on kerbs or in potholes

Parking on kerbs or in potholes may damage the wheels and tyres.

If possible, park only on flat surfaces.

Avoid kerbs and potholes when parking.

! NOTE Damage to electronic component parts from the use of tyre-fitting tools

Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: electronic component parts are located in the wheel. Tyre-fitting tools should not be applied in the area of the valve.

The tools could damage the electronic component parts.

Have the tyres changed at a qualified specialist workshop only.

NOTE Damage to summer tyres at low ambient temperatures

At low ambient temperatures, tears could form when driving with summer tyres, causing permanent damage to the tyre.

At temperatures below 7 °C, use M+S tyres.

Accessory parts that are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used correctly can impair the operating safety.

Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and enquire about:

- Suitability

- Legal stipulations

• Factory recommendations

⚠ WARNING Risk of accident with high performance tyres

There is an increased risk of skidding and aquaplaning when using sport tyres on wet roads.

In addition, the tyre grip is greatly reduced at a low outside temperature and tyre running temperature.

Activate ESP® and adapt your driving style accordingly.

Use M+S tyres at outside temperatures below 10 °C.

Only use the tyres for their intended purpose.

Observe the following when selecting, fitting and replacing tyres:

• Country-specific requirements for tyre approval that define a specific tyre type for your vehicle.
• Furthermore, the use of certain tyre types in certain regions and areas of operation can be highly beneficial.
• Only use tyres and wheels of the same type (summer tyres, winter tyres, MOExtended tyres) and the same make.
• Only fit wheels of the same size on one ax (left and right).

It is only permissible to fit a different wheel size in the event of a flat tyre in order to drive to the specialist workshop.

• Do not make any modifications to the brake system, the wheels or the tyres. The use of shims or brake dust shields is not permitted and may invalidate the vehicle's general operating permit.
• Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: all fitted wheels must be equipped with functioning sensors for the tyre pressure monitoring system.
• At temperatures below 7^ C use winter tyres or all-season tyres marked M+S for all wheels.

Winter tyres bearing the snowflake symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions.

• For M+S tyres, only use tyres with the same act a qualified specialist workshop.
  tread. Be sure to also observe the following further
• Observe the maximum permissible speed for related subjects: the M+S tyres fitted.
• Notes on tyre pressure (→ page 336)
  Be sure to also observe the following further
  • Notes on tyre pressure (→ page 336)

If the tyre's maximum speed is below that of the vehicle, this must be indicated by an appropriate label in the driver's field of vision.

• Run in new tyres at moderate speeds for the first 100 km.
• Replace the tyres after six years at the latest, regardless of wear.
• When replacing with tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics: vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Equip the vehicle with a TIREFIT kit after replacing with tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tyres.

You can permanently limit the maximum vehicle speed for driving with winter tyres ( page 191).

For more information on wheels and tyres, con-

• Tyre pressure table ( page 337)
- Notes on the emergency spare wheel (→ page 349)

WARNING Risk of accident caused by non-approved tyre types

If you use tyre types that have not been adapted to changes made to the factory speed limit, this can have the following consequences:

• The tyres are not suitable for high speeds and the corresponding driving dynamics.
• The tyres wear unevenly and affect the roadworthiness of the vehicle.
• ABS, ESP® and cruise control operation are restricted.

This can jeopardise road safety.

Only use tyre types that have been approved for the maximum permissible speed set and the vehicle.

Notes on interchanging wheels

WARNING Risk of injury through different wheel sizes

Interchanging the front and rear wheels can severely impair the driving characteristics.

The disk brakes or wheel suspension components may also be damaged.

Only interchange the front and rear wheels if the wheels and tyres have the same dimensions.

Interchanging the front and rear wheels if the wheels or tyres have different dimensions can render the general operating permit invalid.

The wear patterns on the front and rear wheels differ:

• front wheels wear more on the tyre shoulder
• rear wheels wear more in the centre of the tyre

Do not drive with tyres that have too little tread depth. This significantly reduces traction on wet roads (aquaplaning).

On vehicles with the same front and rear wheel size, you can interchange the wheels every 5000 to 10,000 km, depending on the wear. Ensure the direction of rotation is maintained for the wheels.

Observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" when doing so ( page 343).

Notes on storing wheels

When storing wheels, observe the following notes:

• After removing wheels, store them in a cool, dry and preferably dark place.
• Protect the tyres from contact with oil, grease or fuel.

Preparing the vehicle for a wheel change

Requirements:

- The required tyre-change tool kit is available. If your vehicle is not equipped with the tyre-change tool kit, consult a qualified specialist workshop to find out about suitable tools.

• The vehicle is not on a slope.
- The vehicle is on solid, non-slippery and lev-ground.
▶ Apply the electric parking brake manually.
Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead position.
Shift the transmission to position P.
▶ Switch off the engine.
Make sure that the engine cannot be started.
Place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change.
Remove the hub caps if necessary ( page 343).
▶ Raise the vehicle ( page 344).

Removing and fitting the wheel trim/hub caps

Requirements:

- The vehicle is prepared for a wheel change ( page 343).

Plastic hub cap

To remove: turn the centre cover of the hub cap anti-clockwise and remove the hub cap.
To fit: make sure that the centre cover of the hub cap is turned anti-clockwise.
Position the hub cap and turn the centre cover clockwise until the hub cap engages physically and audibly.

Aluminium hub cap

Diagram showing a circular component with three labeled parts (1, 2, 3) and directional arrows indicating flow or movement.

To remove: position centring cap ② from the tyre-change tool kit on hub cap ①.
▶ Position wheel spanner ③ on centre cap ②.

Using wheel spanner ③, turn hub cap ① anti-clockwise and remove it.
To fit: follow the instructions above in reverse order.
i Specified tightening torque: 27 Nm.

Raising the vehicle when changing a wheel

Requirements:

• There are no persons in the vehicle.
- The vehicle has been prepared for a wheel change (→ page 343).
- The wheel trims and hub caps have been removed ( page 343).

Important notes on using the jack:

• Use only a vehicle-specific jack that has been approved by Mercedes-Benz to raise the vehicle.

• The jack is only designed for raising and holding the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed and not for maintenance work under the vehicle.

• The jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. If necessary, use a large, flat, load-bearing, non-slip underlay.

• The foot of the jack must be positioned vertically under the jack support point.

Diagram showing two mechanical linkage configurations with blue X marks indicating joint points (no text or symbols present)

Line drawing of a car on a road with a blue X mark and a small object nearby (no text or symbols)

Rules of conduct when the vehicle is raised:

• Never place your hands or feet under the vehicle.
  • Never lie under the vehicle.
• Do not start the engine and do not release the electric parking brake.
• Do not open or close any doors or the tail-gate.

Diagram of a bicycle wheel with a blue arrow indicating clockwise motion (no text or symbols)

Using the wheel wrench, loosen the wheel bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely.

Side view of a sedan with two blue arrows pointing upward (no text or symbols)

Position of jack support points

WARNING Risk of injury from incorrect positioning of the jack

If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip with the vehicle raised.

Only position the jack at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned vertically under the jacking point of the vehicle.

! NOTE Vehicle damage from the jack

If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jack support point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.

The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jack support points.

Take the ratchet out of the tyre-change tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters "AUF" are visible.

Diagram illustrating car wheel assembly with labeled parts and a magnified inset showing mechanical components.

Position support ② of jack ④ on jack support point ①.
Turn ratchet ③ clockwise until support ② sits completely on jack support point ① and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground.
Turn ratchet ③ until the tyre is raised a maximum of 3 cm from the ground.
Loosen and remove the wheel ( page 346).

Removing a wheel

Requirements:

• The vehicle is raised ( page 344).

Vehicles with AMG ceramic high-performance composite braking system:

NOTE Damage to the ceramic-brake disc when changing a wheel

Mercedes-AMG vehicles with ceramic-brake discs: during removal and repositioning of the wheel, the wheel rim can strike the ceramic-brake disk and damage it.

▶ Take particular care.

▶ Ask another person for assistance or use a second centring pin.

When changing a wheel, avoid applying any force to the brake discs, since this could impair the level of comfort when braking.

! NOTE Damage to threading from dirt on wheel bolts

Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface.

Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt completely.

Line drawing of a car wheel with a blue circular marker and a bracket, no text or symbols present

Screw centring pin ① into the thread instead of the wheel bolt.
Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts completely.
Remove the wheel.

Fitting a new wheel

WARNING Risk of accident from losing a wheel

Oiled or greased wheel bolts can cause the wheel bolts to come loose, as too can damaged wheel bolts or wheel hub threads.

▶ Never oil or grease the threads.
In the event of damage to the threads, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Have the damaged wheel bolts or damaged hub threads replaced.
Do not continue driving.

Observe the information on the choice of tyres ( page 339).

For tyres with a specified direction of rotation, an arrow on the side wall of the tyre indicates the correct direction of rotation. Observe the direction of rotation when fitting.

NOTE Damage to the ceramic-brake disc when changing a wheel

Mercedes-AMG vehicles with ceramic-brake discs: during removal and repositioning of the wheel, the wheel rim can strike the ceramic-brake disk and damage it.

▶ Take particular care.
▶ Ask another person for assistance or use a second centring pin.

Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the cent-ring pin and push it on.

WARNING Risk of injury from tightening wheel bolts and nuts

If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip.

Only tighten wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground.

Be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" (→ page 339).

For safety reasons, only use wheel bolts which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz and for the wheel in question.
Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated until they are finger-tight.
Unscrew and remove the centring pin.
Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-tight.
▶ Lower the vehicle ( page 348).

Lowering the vehicle after a wheel change

Requirements:

• The new wheel has been fitted (→ page 347).
  To lower the vehicle: place the ratchet onto the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters "AB" are visible and turn anti-clockwise.

Diagram showing a circular mechanical or electrical component with numbered points and an arrow indicating direction or movement.

Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated ① to ⑤ with an initial maximum force of 80 Nm.
Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated ① to ⑤ to the specified tightening torque of 150 Nm.

⚠ WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrect tightening torque

The wheels could come loose if the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are not tightened to the prescribed torque.

▶ Ensure that the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are tightened to the prescribed tightening torque.
If you are not sure, do not move the vehicle. Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the tightening torque checked immediately.
Check the tyre pressure of the newly fitted wheel and adjust it if necessary.
▶ Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: restart the tyre pressure monitoring system ( page 339).
Exception: the new wheel is an emergency spare wheel.

Emergency spare wheel

Notes on the emergency spare wheel

WARNING Risk of accident caused by incorrect wheel and tyre dimensions

The wheel or tyre size and the tyre type of the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may differ. The emergency spare wheel or spare wheel can significantly impair driving characteristics of the vehicle.

To prevent hazardous situations:

Drive carefully.
▶ Never fit more than one emergency spare wheel or spare wheel that differs in size.
Only use an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel briefly.
Do not deactivate ESP.
Have the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size replaced at the nearest qualified specialist work-

shop. The new wheel must have the correct dimensions.

Observe the following notes on fitting an emergency spare wheel:

• Check the tyre pressure of the emergency spare wheel fitted. Correct the pressure as necessary.
• The maximum permissible speed with an emergency spare wheel fitted is 80 km/h.
• Do not fit the emergency spare wheel with snow chains.
• Replace the emergency spare wheel after six years at the latest, regardless of wear.

Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: if an emergency spare wheel is fitted the tyre pressure monitoring system cannot function reliably. For a few minutes after an emergency spare wheel is fitted, the system may still display the tyre pressure of the removed wheel. Only restart the system again when the emergency spare wheel has been replaced with a new wheel.

Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects:

• Notes on tyre pressure (→ page 336)
• Tyre pressure table ( page 337)
• Notes on fitting tyres (→ page 339)

Notes on technical data

The technical data was determined in accordance with EU Directives. The data stated only applies to vehicles with standard equipment. You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Only for certain countries: you can find vehicle-specific vehicle data in the COC documents (CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These papers are included with the vehicle.

On-board electronics

Notes on tampering with the engine electronics

NOTE Premature wear through improper maintenance

Improper maintenance may cause vehicle components to wear more quickly and the vehicle's operating permit may be invalidated.

Always have work on the engine electronics and related components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Two-way radios

Notes on fitting two-way radios

WARNING Risk of accident due to improper work on two-way radios

If two-way radios are manipulated or retrofitted incorrectly, the electromagnetic radiation from the two-way radios can interfere with the vehicle electronics and jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle.

You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

WARNING Risk of accident from incorrect operation of two-way radios

If you use two-way radios in the vehicle improperly, their electromagnetic radiation

can disrupt the vehicle's electronics. This is true in the following situations, in particular:

• The two-way radio is not connected to an exterior aerial.
• The exterior aerial is fitted incorrectly or is not a low-reflection aerial.

This could jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle.

Have the low-reflection exterior aerial fitted at a qualified specialist workshop.
When operating two-way radios in the vehicle, always connect them to the low-reflection exterior aerial.

NOTE Invalidation of the operating permit due to failure to comply with the instructions for installation and use

The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of two-way radios are not observed.

▶ Only use approved frequency bands.

Observe the maximum permissible output power in these frequency bands.
▶ Only use approved aerial positions.

Diagram of a car with numbered positions pointing to the dashboard area, labeled 1, 2, and 3.

1 Front roof area

② Rear roof area

3 Rear wings

On the rear wings, it is recommended that you fit the aerial on the side of the vehicle closest to the centre of the road.

Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road Vehicles - "EMCs for installation of aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment") when retrofitting two-way radios. Comply with the legal requirements for detachable parts.

If your vehicle has fittings for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply and aerial connectors provided in the pre-installation. Observe the manufacturer's supplements when fitting.

Two-way radio transmission output

The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the aerial must not exceed the values in the following table.

Frequency band and maximum transmission output

Frequency band Maximum transmission output
Short wave3 - 54 MHz	100 W
4 m frequency band74 - 88 MHz	30 W
2 m frequency band144 - 174 MHz	50 W
Terrestrial Trunked Radio (TETRA)380 - 460 MHz	10 W
70 cm frequency band420 - 450 MHz	35 W
Two-way radio(2G/3G/4G)	10 W

The following can be used in the vehicle without restrictions:

• two-way radios with a maximum transmission output of up to 100 mW
• RF transmitters with transmitter frequencies in the 380 - 410 MHz frequency band and a maximum transmission output of up to 2 W ^-1 (TETRA)
• mobile phones (2G/3G/4G)

There are no restrictions when positioning the aerial on the outside of the vehicle for some wavebands.

• Terrestrial Trunked Radio (TETRA)
- 70 cm frequency band
- 2G/3G/4G

Radio operating permits for vehicle components

Manufacturer information about wireless vehicle components can be found using the key phrase "Radio operating permits" in the Digital Owner's

Manual in the vehicle, on the internet and in the app.

Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number

Vehicle identification plate

Interior view of a car showing the seatbelt and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

MFD BY MERCEDES-BENZ AG STUTTGART GVW 2480KG MADE IN HUNGARY MY2013 GAW FRT 1190KG BUILT 10/12 GAW RR 1340KG PASSENGER CAR XXXX هذهicina تطابق كل م Operationات textiles ال pharmacية/السعودية المطوبة على تاريخ الانتاج VINXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 1 2 3 4 5

Vehicle identification plate (example: Kuwait)

① Vehicle manufacturer
2 Place of manufacture
③ Manufacturing date
4 Vehicle model
5 VIN

MERDEDES-BENZ AG XXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXX kg XXXX kg XXXX kg XXXX kg 1- 2- Made in Germany 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Vehicle identification plate (example: all other countries)

① Vehicle manufacturer
② EU general operating permit number (only for certain countries)
③ VIN (vehicle identification number)
4 Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight (kg)

Maximum permissible gross weight of vehicle combination (kg) (only for specific countries)
6 Maximum permissible front axle load (kg)
⑦ Maximum permissible rear axle load (kg)
8 Paint code
The data shown in the illustration is example data.

VIN in front of the right-hand front seat

Diagram showing a car interior with labeled components and an inset image of a device component.

① Imprinted VIN (vehicle identification number)
② Floor covering

VIN at the lower edge of the windscreen

Line drawing of a car front view with a blue traffic sign pointing to the side (no text or symbols on the car itself)

VIN (vehicle identification number) as label

The VIN as a label at the lower edge of the wind-screen is only available in some countries.

Engine number

The engine number is stamped into the crank-case. You can obtain further information from any qualified specialist workshop.

Operating fluids

Notes on operating fluids

⚠ WARNING Risk of injury from operating fluids harmful to your health

Operating fluids may be poisonous and harmful to your health.

Observe the text on the original containers when using, storing or disposing of operating fluids.
Always store operating fluids sealed in their original containers.
Always keep children away from operating fluids.

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental pollution caused by environmentally irresponsible disposal
▶ Dispose of operating fluids in an environmentally responsible manner.

Operating fluids include the following:

• fuels
• lubricants
• coolant
• brake fluid
  • windscreen washer fluid
  • climate control system refrigerant

Only use products approved by Mercedes-Benz. Damage caused by the use of products that have not been approved is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures.

The operating fluids approved by Mercedes-Benz can be identified by the following inscriptions on the container:

• MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
• MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)

Further information on approved operating fluids:

- in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Operating Fluids by entering the designation - at https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com

- in the Mercedes-Benz BeVo App - at a qualified specialist workshop

WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from fuel

Fuels are highly flammable.

▶ Fire, naked flames, smoking and creation of sparks must be avoided.
Switch off the ignition and, if available, the stationary heater, before and while refuelling the vehicle.

WARNING Risk of injury from fuels

Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health.

Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
Do not inhale fuel vapour.
Keep children away from fuel.
Keep doors and windows closed during the refuelling process.

If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following:

Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with soap and water.
If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately.
If you swallow fuel, seek medical attention immediately. Do not induce vomiting.
Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel.

Fuel

Notes on fuel grade

Observe the notes on operating fluids ( page 354).

NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel

Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system.

Only refuel using unleaded, sulphur-free petrol that conforms to European EN 228, or an equivalent specification.

Fuel of this specification may contain up to 10% ethanol by volume. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel.

Never refuel with one of the following fuels:

• diesel
  • regular petrol with an octane number lower than 91 RON
• petrol with more than 10% ethanol by volume, e.g. E15, E20, E85, E100
• petrol with more than 3% methanol by volume, e.g. M15, M30
  • petrol with additives containing metal

If you have accidentally refuelled with the wrong fuel:

do not switch the ignition on.
consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The following compatibility indications for fuel apply to your vehicle.

① E5 ② E10

① For petrol with maximum 5% ethanol by volume
② For petrol with maximum 10% ethanol by volume

According to European standard EN 16942 you can find the compatibility indications at the following locations:

• on the vehicle on the information label in the fuel filler flap
• on the fuel pump or pump nozzle suitable your vehicle throughout Europe

If the available fuel is not sufficiently low in sulphur, this can produce unpleasant odours.

The recommended octane number for your vehicle can also be found on the information label in the fuel filler flap ( page 169).

Only refuel using super unleaded petrol with at least 98 RON if you wish to achieve maximum engine output. Alternatively, you can also refuel using premium-grade unleaded petrol with at least 95 RON.

In exceptional cases, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also use regular unleaded petrol with an octane number of at least 91 RON.

This may reduce engine output and increase consumption.

Never refuel using petrol with an even lower RON.

Further information on fuel can be obtained at a filling station or a qualified specialist workshop.

Information on additives in petrol

^† Observe the notes on operating fluids ( page 354).

NOTE Damage from use of unsuitable additives

Even small amounts of the wrong additive may lead to malfunctions occurring.

Only add cleaning additives recommended by Mercedes-Benz to the fuel.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use brand-name fuels with additives.

In some countries, the fuel available may not have sufficient additives. Residue could build up in the fuel injection system as a result. In this

case, in consultation with a Mercedes-Benz service centre, mix the fuel with the cleaning additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz.

Observe the notes and mixing ratios indicated on the tank.

Tank content and reserve fuel

Model Total capacity
Mercedes-AMG GT 434-door Coupé	66.0 litres
Mercedes-AMG GT 434-door Coupé 4MATIC+
Mercedes-AMG GT 534-door Coupé 4MATIC+
Mercedes-AMG GT 634-door Coupé 4MATIC+
Mercedes-AMG GT 63 S4-door Coupé 4MATIC+	80.0 litres

Model	of which reserve fuel
Mercedes-AMG GT 434-door Coupé	7.0 litres
Mercedes-AMG GT 434-door Coupé 4MATIC+
Mercedes-AMG GT 534-door Coupé 4MATIC+
Mercedes-AMG GT 634-door Coupé 4MATIC+	10.0 litres
Mercedes-AMG GT 63 S4-door Coupé 4MATIC+

Engine oil

Notes on engine oil

Observe the notes on operating fluids

(→ page 354).

Mercedes-Benz Oil recommended

NOTE Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or additives
Do not use engine oils or oil filters which do not correspond to the specifications explicitly prescribed for the service intervals.
Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve longer change intervals than prescribed.
Do not use additives.
Have the engine oil renewed at regular intervals.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the oil change carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Only use engine oils approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Petrol engines: for certain countries, different engine oils can be used in conjunction with reduced maintenance intervals.

Further information on different engine oils can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Quality and capacity of engine oil

Model MB-Freigabe or
	MB-Approval
Mercedes-AMG GT 634-door Coupé 4MATIC+	229.5*
	229.51
Mercedes-AMG GT 63 S4-door Coupé 4MATIC+
All other models	229.51, 229.52,229.61229.71*

* recommended for lowest possible fuel consumption (lowest SAE viscosity class in each case; observe possible restrictions of the approved SAE viscosity classes)

To achieve the lowest possible fuel consumption, it is recommended to use the engine oil specifications marked in the table for the lowest SAE viscosity class. Possible restrictions of the approved SAE viscosity classes must be observed.

Mercedes-AMG GT 63 4-door coupé 4MATIC +, GT 63 S 4-door coupé 4MATIC+: use engine oils only of viscosity class SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40.

If the engine oils listed in the table are not available, you may add a maximum of 1.0 litre of the following engine oils once only.

Engine oils for one-time filling only in exceptional cases:

- Mercedes-AMG GT 63 4-door coupé 4MATIC+, GT 63 S 4-door coupé 4MATIC +: MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 229.3 or ACEA A3/B4

- all other models: MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 229.31 or ACEA C3

The following values refer to an oil change, including the oil filter.

Model Capacity

Mercedes-AMG GT 634-door Coupé 4MATIC+	9.0 litres
Mercedes-AMG GT 63 S4-door Coupé 4MATIC+
All other models 8.5 litres

Notes on brake fluid

Observe the notes on operating fluids ( page 354).

WARNING Risk of an accident due to vapour pockets forming in the brake system

The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture from the air. This lowers the boiling point of

the brake fluid. If the boiling point is too low, vapour pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard. This impairs the braking effect.

Have the brake fluid renewed at the specified intervals.

Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Only use a brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 331.0.

Coolant

Notes on coolant

Observe the notes on operating fluids ( page 354).

WARNING Risk of fire- and injury from antifreeze

If antifreeze comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine compartment, it may ignite.

▶ Allow the engine to cool down before you top up the antifreeze.
Make sure that no antifreeze spills out next to the filler opening.
Thoroughly clean the antifreeze from component parts before starting the vehicle.

NOTE Damage caused by incorrect coolant

Only use coolant that has been pre-mixed with the required antifreeze protection.

Information on coolant is available at the following locations:

• in the Mercedes-Benz Specification for Operating Fluids 310.1
- at https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com
- in the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app
• at a qualified specialist workshop

NOTE Overheating at high outside temperatures

If an inappropriate coolant is used, the engine cooling system is not sufficiently protected against overheating and corrosion at high outside temperatures.

Always use coolant approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Observe the instructions in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Operating Fluids 310.1.

Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

Proportion of antifreeze concentrate in the engine cooling system:

• a minimum of 50% (antifreeze protection down to approximately -37°C)
• a maximum of 55% (antifreeze protection down to -45°C)

Notes on windscreen washer fluid

Observe the notes on operating fluids ( page 354).

WARNING - Risk of fire and injury due to windscreen washer concentrate

Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system.

Make sure that no windscreen washer concentrate spills out next to the filler opening.

NOTE Damage to the exterior lighting due to unsuitable windscreen washer fluid

Unsuitable windscreen washer fluids may damage the plastic surface of the exterior lighting.

Only use windscreen washer fluids which are also suitable for use on plas-

tic surfaces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit.

NOTE Blocked spray nozzles caused by mixing windscreen washer fluids

Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit with other windscreen washer fluids.

Do not use distilled or de-ionised water. Otherwise, the fill level sensor may be triggered erroneously.

Recommended windscreen washer fluid:

• above freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit
• below freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit

For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the information on the antifreeze container.

Mix washer fluid with windscreen washer fluid all year round.

Vehicle data

Vehicle dimensions

The heights specified may vary as a result of the following factors:

• tyres
• load
  • condition of the suspension
• optional equipment

Side view line drawing of a car with open hood and dimension label (no text or symbols)

Height when opened

Model	Height when opened
Mercedes-AMG GT 634-door Coupé 4MATIC+	1939 mm
Mercedes-AMG GT 63 S4-door Coupé 4MATIC+	1943 mm
All other models 1956 mm

Vehicle dimensions

All models
Vehicle length	5
Vehicle width including outside mirrors	2069 mm
Vehicle width excluding outside mirrors	1953 mm
Wheelbase 2951 mm

Model Vehicle height

Mercedes-AMG GT 634-door Coupé 4MATIC+	1442 mm
Mercedes-AMG GT 63 S4-door Coupé 4MATIC+	1447 mm
All other models	1455 mm

Weights and loads

Please observe the following notes for the specified vehicle data:

Items of optional equipment increase the unladen weight and reduce the payload.

- Vehicle-specific weight information can be found on the vehicle identification plate ( page 352).

Roof load

All models
Maximum roof load	75 kg

Maximum design speeds

The following values only apply to vehicles with the AMG Driver's Package.

Maximum design speeds

Mercedes-AMG GT 434-door Coupé 4MATIC+
1st gear 49 km/h
2nd gear 81 km/h
3rd gear 117 km/h
4th gear 161 km/h
5th gear 217 km/h
6th gear	263 km/h
7th gear	270 km/h
8th gear	270 km/h
9th gear	270 km/hMercedes-AMG GT 534-door Coupé 4MATIC+
1st gear 49 km/h
2nd gear 81 km/h
3rd gear 117 km/h
4th gear 161 km/h
5th gear 217 km/h
6th gear 263 km/h
7th gear 285 km/h
8th gear 285 km/h
9th gear 285 km/h
	Mercedes-AMG GT 634-door Coupé 4MATIC+
1st gear 52 km/h
2nd gear 86 km/h
3rd gear 124 km/h

	Mercedes-AMG GT 634-door Coupé 4MATIC+
4th gear 170 km/h
5th gear 230 km/h
6th gear 279 km/h
7th gear 310 km/h
8th gear 310 km/h
9th gear 310 km/h
	Mercedes-AMG GT 63 S4-door Coupé 4MATIC+
1st gear 52 km/h
2nd gear 86 km/h
3rd gear 124 km/h
4th gear 170 km/h
5th gear 230 km/h
6th gear 279 km/h

	Mercedes-AMG GT 63 S4-door Coupé 4MATIC+
7th gear 315 km/h
8th gear 315 km/h
9th gear 315 km/h

Trailer hitch

General notes on the trailer hitch

Modifications to the engine cooling system may be necessary, depending on the vehicle model. The retrofitting of a trailer hitch is only permissible if a towing capacity is specified in your vehicle documents.

Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Mounting dimensions of the trailer hitch

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components and dimension lines

Diagram of a mechanical or electrical device with labeled components and directional arrows indicating flow or movement.

The overhang dimension and fastening points are valid for a trailer hitch installed at the factory.

Model	Overhang dimension
All models	1

Towing capacity

The values are valid for a trailer hitch installed at the factory.

The tongue weight is not included in the towing capacity.

Towing capacity, braked (at a minimum start-off gradeability of 8%)

Model	Permissible towing capacity
All models 2100 kg

Towing capacity, braked (at a minimum start-off gradeability of 12%)

Model	Permissible towing capacity
All models 2100 kg

Towing capacity, unbraked

Model	Permissible towing capacity
All models 750 kg

Maximum tongue weight and load capacity

NOTE Damage caused by the trailer coming loose

If the tongue weight used is too low, the trailer may come loose.

The tongue weight must not be below 50 kg.

Fastening points
② Overhang dimension
3 Rear axle centre line

▶ Use a tongue weight that is as close as possible to the maximum permissible tongue weight.
! NOTE Damage caused by the bicycle rack coming loose

When using a bicycle rack, both the maximal tongue weight and the maximal load capacity should be observed.

Do not exceed the permissible load capacity.

Observe the additional notes on load capacity ( page 245).

Missing values were not available at the time of going to press.

Tongue weight

Model Maximum tongue weight
All models 84 kg

Load capacity

Model Maximum load
All models

Permissible rear axle load (trailer operation)

The value is valid for a trailer hitch installed at the factory.

Model Axle load
Mercedes-AMG GT 434-door Coupé	1405 kg
Mercedes-AMG GT 434-door Coupé 4MATIC+	1410 kg
Mercedes-AMG GT 534-door Coupé 4MATIC+
All other models	1400 kg

Display messages

Introduction

Information about display messages

Display messages appear on the multifunction display.

Display messages with graphical symbols are simplified in the Owner's Manual and may differ from the symbols on the multifunction display. The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Certain display messages are accompanied by a warning tone.

Please act in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in the Owner's Manual.

For some display messages, a symbol will also be shown:

• ⓘ Further information
- × Hide display message

With the left-hand Touch Control, you can select the respective symbol by swiping to the left or right. Press the ⓘ symbol to show further infor-

mation on the media display. Press the symbol to hide the display message.

You can hide low-priority display messages by pressing the ▶ back button or the left-hand Touch Control. The display messages will then be stored in the message memory.

Rectify the cause of a display message as quickly as possible.

dis-High-priority display messages cannot be hidden. The multifunction display shows these display messages continuously until the cause of the display message has been rectified.

Calling up saved display messages

On-board computer:

→ Service ▶ 1 message

If there are no display messages, No messages will appear on the multifunction display.

▶ Scroll through the display messages by swiping upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.
To exit the message memory: press the back button .

Occupant safety

Display messages	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Restraint sys. malfunction Consult workshop	* The restraint system is malfunctioning (→ page 37).⚠ WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint systemComponents in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident.▶ Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Front left malfunction Consult workshop (example)	* The corresponding restraint system is malfunctioning (→ page 37).⚠ WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint systemComponents in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident.▶ Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Left windowbag malfunction Consult workshop (example)	* The corresponding window airbag is malfunctioning (→ page 37).⚠ WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the windowbagThe windowbag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident.▶ Have the windowbag checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Front-passenger airbag disabled See Owner's Manual	* The front passenger airbag has been disabled even though an adult or a person of adult build is on the front passenger seat. If additional forces are applied to the seat, the weight the system detects may be too low.⚠ WARNING - Risk of injury or even fatal injury when the front passenger airbag is disabledIf the front passenger airbag is disabled, It will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform its intended protective function.A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard.▶ Be aware of the status of the front passenger airbag both before and during the journey.
	▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.▶ Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat.▶ Check the status of the automatic front passenger airbag actuation (→ page 47).▶ If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Front-passenger airbag enabled See Owner's Manual	* The front passenger airbag will be enabled while the vehicle is in motion in the following situations:• even when a child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system weight threshold is located on the front passenger seat• even when the front passenger seat is not occupiedThe system may detect objects or forces that are adding to the weight applied to the seat.⚠ WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabledIf you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the front passenger airbag is enabled, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident.The child could be struck by the airbag.▶ Ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
	▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.▶ Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat.▶ Check the status of the automatic front passenger airbag actuation (→ page 47).▶ If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
PRE-SAFE inoperative See Owner's Manual	* The PRE-SAFE® functions are malfunctioning.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
PRE-SAFE impulse side inoperative See Owner's Manual	* The PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side system is malfunctioning or inoperative after having already been triggered.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Key

Display messages	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Replace key	* Have the key replaced.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Change key batteries	* The key battery is discharged.▶ Replace the battery (→ page 75).
Key not detected (white display message)	* The key is currently undetected.▶ Change the location of the key in the vehicle.▶ If the key is still not recognised, place it in the slot for starting with the key (→ page 151).
Key not detected(red display message)	* The key cannot be detected and may no longer be in the vehicle.The key is no longer in the vehicle and you switch off the engine:You can no longer start the engine.You cannot centrally lock the vehicle.Ensure that the key is in the vehicle.If the key detection function has a malfunction due to a strong radio signal source:Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.Place the key in the slot for starting the engine with the key (→ page 151).
Place the key in the marked space See Owner's Manual	* Key detection is malfunctioning.Change the location of the key in the vehicle.Place the key in the slot for starting the engine with the key (→ page 151).

Lights

Display messages	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Left dipped beam (example)	* T he corresponding light source is defective.► Drive on carefully.► Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.i LED light sources: the display message for the corresponding light appears only when all the light-emitting diodes in the light are faulty.
Malfunction See Owner's Manual	* The exterior lighting is malfunctioning.► Consult a qualified specialist workshop.* Vehicles with a trailer hitch: a fuse may have blown.► Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.► Check the fuses and replace them if necessary (→ page 331).
Automatic driving lights inoperative	* T he light sensor is malfunctioning.► Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Light System inoperative	* T he active headlamps are malfunctioning. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Switch on headlamps	* Y ou are driving without low-beam headlamps. ▶ Turn the light switch to the ☑ or AUTO position.
Switch off lights	* You are leaving the vehicle and the lights are still switched on. ▶ Turn the light switch to the AUTO position.
Intelligent Light System inoperative	* The Intelligent Light System is malfunctioning. The lighting system continues to function properly without the functions of the Intelligent Light System. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus currently unavailableSee Owner's Manual	* Adaptive Highbam Assist Plus is temporarily unavailable.The system limits have been reached (→ page 129).Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbam Assist Plus available again display message will appear.Drive on.
Adaptive Highbam Assist Plus inoperative	* A daptive Highbam Assist Plus is malfunctioning.Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Hazard warning lamps malfunctioning	* The hazard warning lamp switch is malfunctioning.Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Climate control

Display messages

inoperative See Owner's Man.

Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

* The stationary heater is temporarily malfunctioning.

When the vehicle is stationary on a level surface and the engine has cooled down, make up to four attempts to switch on the stationary heater, waiting several minutes between each attempt.
If the stationary heater does not switch on, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
inoperative Battery low	* The on-board electrical system voltage is too low.The stationary heater has switched itself off.▶ Drive an extended distance until the battery has reached a sufficient charge level again.
inoperative Refuel vehicle	* There is too little fuel in the fuel tank. The stationary heater cannot be switched on.▶ Refuel the vehicle.

Vehicle

Display messages	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Vehicle is operationalSwitch off ignition before exiting	* You are leaving the vehicle when it is in a ready-to-drive state.▶ When you leave the vehicle, switch off the ignition, secure the vehicle against rolling away and take the key with you.▶ If you do not leave the vehicle, switch off the electrical consumers, e.g. the seat heating. Otherwise, the 12 V battery may discharge and it will then be possible to start the vehicle only with the aid of a second battery (starting assistance).
Display messages	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Operation only possible in transmission position P	* The ball neck will not swivel because transmission position D, R or neutral N is selected.▶ Depress the brake pedal.▶ Engage park position P.
Trailer coupling extending...	* The ball neck will retract/extend.Do not attempt to speed up, slow down or initiate the swivel movement using your hand, foot or other aids. During the swivel movement, do not couple a trailer.When the ball neck has reached an operational position, the display message will disappear.
Check trailer hitch lockDisplay messages	* The trailer hitch is not operational during a journey with a trailer.⚠ WARNING Risk of an accident if the ball neck is not lockedThe trailer may become detached.▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.▶ Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away.▶ Initiate a new swivel movement and do not re-couple the trailer until the warning/indicator lamp goes out.▶ Initiate a new swivel movement (→ page 241).▶ When the display message disappears, couple up the trailer and drive on.Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	If the display message does not disappear, the trailer hitch is malfunctioning and the ball neck is not locked.Do not couple up the trailer. Drive on without the trailer. Note the reduced ground clearance due to the unlocked ball neck.Consult a qualified specialist workshop.* The trailer hitch will not be operational when the vehicle is stationary.Uncouple the coupled trailer and secure it against rolling away.If the ball neck has been retracted: initiate a new swivel movement (→ page 241).The ball neck will engage vertically in the locked position and then engage beneath the bumper.If the ball neck has been extended: initiate a new swivel movement (→ page 241).The ball neck will engage beneath the bumper.If the display message does not disappear, the trailer hitch is malfunctioning and the ball neck is not locked.Do not couple up the trailer. Drive on without the trailer. Note the reduced ground clearance due to the unlocked ball neck.Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Steering malfunctionIncreased physical effortSee Owner's Manual	* The power steering assistance is malfunctioning.⚠ WARNING Risk of an accident due to altered steering characteristicsIf the power assistance of the steering fails partially or completely, you will need to use more force to steer.▶ If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully.▶ Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Steering malfunction Stopimmediately See Owner's Manual	* The steering is malfunctioning. Steering capability is significantly impaired.⚠ WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impairedIf the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised.▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.Do not continue driving under any circumstances.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Hinterachslenkung StörungWerkstatt aufsuchen	* The rear axle steering is malfunctioning.The rear axle has no steering capability.The steering wheel may be tilted when you drive in a straight line.▶ Adapt your speed and drive on carefully.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Display messages	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Hinterachslenkung z.Zt.nicht verfügbar	* The rear axle steering is temporarily unavailable. The turning circle may become wider.▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine.If the display message does not disappear:▶ Drive on carefully.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Electronic rear axle locking differential inoperative	* The electronic locking differential has failed.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Electronic rear axle locking differential currently unavailable	* The electronic locking differential is overheated.▶ Let the electronic locking differential cool down by driving defensively.
Active bonnet malfunction See Owner's Manual	* The active bonnet (pedestrian protection) is malfunctioning or inoperative after having already been triggered.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Rear spoiler control sys-tem inoperativeDisplay messages	* The rear wing cannot reach the end position during retraction and extends again if possible.The vehicle's speed may be restricted.If retraction of the rear wing is blocked, e.g. by ice:▶ Ensure that the cause of the blockage has been removed.▶ Switch off the engine and lock the vehicle.Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	▶ Start the vehicle after a few minutes.The rear wing will move to the original position.If the problem persists or the cause cannot be detected:▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Rear spoiler inoperativeLimit XXX km/h	* The vehicle's speed is limited to the value displayed. Therefore, the rear wing cannot reach the end position during extension and only extends as far as is possible.If extension of the rear wing is blocked, e.g. by ice:▶ Ensure that the cause of the blockage has been removed.▶ Switch off the engine and lock the vehicle.▶ Start the vehicle after a few minutes.The rear wing will move to the original position.If the problem persists or the cause cannot be detected:▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
	* A t least one door is open.▶ Close all doors.
Display messages	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	* The bonnet is open.⚠ WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the bonnet unlockedThe bonnet may open and block your view.▶ Never release the bonnet when driving.▶ Before every trip, ensure that the engine bonnet is locked.
	▶ Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.▶ Close the bonnet.
	* The tailgate is open.⚠ DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoningCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tailgate is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion.▶ Always switch off the engine before opening the tailgate.▶ Never drive with the tailgate open.
	▶ Close the tailgate.
Display messages		Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Rear left seat backrest not locked (Example)		* The seat backrest of the corresponding seat is not engaged.▶ Fold the seat backrest back until it engages.
Top up washer fluid		* The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum.▶ Top up the washer fluid (→ page 305).

Engine

Display messages	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
To switch off the engine, press the Start/Stop button for at least 3 seconds or 3 times.	* You have pressed the start/stop button while the vehicle is in motion. ▶ Information about switching off the engine while driving (→ page 151).
Top up coolant See Owner's Manual	* The coolant level is too low.■ NOTE Engine damage due to insufficient coolant▶ Avoid long journeys with insufficient coolant.▶ Add coolant (→ page 305).▶ Have the engine cooling system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Coolant Stop vehicle Switch engine off	* The coolant is too hot.▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the engine.▲ WARNING Danger of burns when opening the bonnetIf you open the engine bonnet when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids.▶ Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.▶ In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the engine bonnet closed and call the fire service.▶ Wait until the engine has cooled down.▶ Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed.▶ Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below 120°C.* The fan motor is defective.▶ Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below 120 °C.
Reserve fuel level	* The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range.▶ Refuel.

Transmission

Display messages	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Only select Park (P) when vehicle is stationary	* It is possible to select the park position P only if the vehicle is stationary. ▶ To stop, depress the brake pedal. ▶ Shift the transmission to park position P when the vehicle is stationary.
Apply brake to deselect Park (P) position	* You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park position P and into another transmission position. ▶ Depress the brake pedal. ▶ Select transmission position D, R or neutral N.
To shift out of P or N, depress brake and start engine	* You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park position P or neutral N and into another transmission position.▶ Depress the brake pedal.▶ Start the engine.▶ Change the transmission position.
Apply brake to select D or *RYou have attempted to select transmission position D or R.	* You have attempted to select transmission position D or R.▶ Depress the brake pedal.▶ Select transmission position D or R.
Apply brake to select R	* You have attempted to select transmission position R.▶ Depress the brake pedal.▶ Select transmission position R.
Risk of vehicle rollingDriver door open and transmission not in P	* The driver's door is not fully closed and transmission position D, R or neutral N is selected.▶ Select park position P when switching off the vehicle.
N permanently active Risk of vehicle rolling	* While the vehicle is rolling or while you are driving, neutral N has been engaged.▶ To stop, depress the brake pedal.▶ Shift the transmission to park position P while the vehicle is stationary.▶ To continue driving, select transmission position D or R.
Without changing gear, consult workshop	* The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission position can no longer be changed.▶ When transmission position D is selected, consult a qualified specialist workshop and do not change the transmission position.▶ For all other transmission positions, park the vehicle safely.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Reversing not poss. Consult workshop	* The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission position R cannot be selected.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Transmission Malfunction Stop	* The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission shifts to neutral N automatically.▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.▶ Depress the brake pedal.▶ Engage park position P.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Stop vehicle Leave engine running Wait Transmission cooling	* The transmission is overheating. Pulling away may be temporarily impaired or not possible.▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.▶ Leave the engine running.▶ Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
Trans. oil overheated Drive on with care	* Transmission position M and the temporary manual driving program are no longer available. The engine output is reduced depending on the overheating.▶ Let the transmission oil cool down by driving defensively until the display message disappears.
Auxiliary battery malfunction	* The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being charged.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.▶ Until then, always select park position P manually before you switch off the engine.▶ Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.

Brakes

Display messages	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Parking brake See Owner's Manual	* The yellow 📄 indicator lamp is lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To apply:► Switch the ignition off and switch it back on.► Apply the electric parking brake manually (→ page 176).If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake:

Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.

* The yellow (P) indicator lamp and the red (P) indicator lamp are lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.

To release:

▶ Switch the ignition off and switch it back on.

Release the electric parking brake manually ( page 176).

or

Release the electric parking brake automatically ( page 176).

If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake:

Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* The yellow (P) indicator lamp is lit and the red (P) indicator lamp is flashing. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.

The electric parking brake could not be applied or released.

▶ Switch the ignition off and switch it back on.

To apply:

Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually ( page 176).

To release:

Display messages

Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Apply and then release the electric parking brake manually.
If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake or the red Ⓓ indicator lamp continues to flash:
Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.

* The yellow (P) indicator lamp is lit and the red (P) indicator lamp flashes for approximately ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then remains lit or goes out. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.

If the charge level is too low:

▶ Charge the 12 V battery.

To apply:

▶ Switch the ignition off.
The electric parking brake will be applied automatically.

If you do not want the electric parking brake to be applied, e.g. at an automatic car wash or when the vehicle is being towed, leave the ignition switched on. This does not include having the vehicle towed with the rear axle raised.

If the electric parking brake is not applied automatically:

▶ Switch the ignition off and switch it back on.
Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually ( page 176).

Display messages	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	If it is still not possible to apply the electric parking brake:Consult a qualified specialist workshop.Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.To release:If the conditions for automatic release are fulfilled and the electric parking brake is not released automatically, release the electric parking brake manually (→ page 176).If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake:Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Release parking brake	* The red (P) indicator lamp is flashing.The electric parking brake is applied while you are driving:A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake has not been fulfilled (→ page 176).You are performing emergency braking using the electric parking brake (→ page 177).Check the conditions for automatic release of the electric parking brake.Release the electric parking brake manually.
Turn on the ignition to release the parking brake	* The red Ⓓ indicator lamp is lit.You have attempted to release the electric parking brake with the ignition switched off.▶ Switch on the ignition.
Check brake fluid level	* There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.⚠ WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid levelIf the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired.▶ Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.▶ Do not top up the brake fluid.
Check brake pads See Owner's Manual	* The brakepads have reached the wear limit.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving systems

Display messages	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Off	* The HOLD function is deactivated because the vehicle is slipping or a condition for activation is not fulfilled.▶ Reactivate the HOLD function later or check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (→ page 185).
ATTENTION ASSIST inoper-ative	* A TTENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a break!	* ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or an increasing lack of concentration on the part of the driver (→ page 187).▶ If necessary, take a break.
- - - km/h	* Cruise control cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fulfilled.▶ Observe the activation conditions for cruise control (→ page 190).
Cruise control inoperative	* C ruise control is malfunctioning.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Cruise control and Limiter inoperative	* Cruise control and the limiter are malfunctioning.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Cruise control off	* C ruise control has been deactivated.If there is an additional warning tone, cruise control has been deactivated automatically (→ page 188).
- - - km/h	* The limiter cannot be activated as not all activation conditions have been fulfilled.▶ Observe the activation conditions of the limiter.
Limiter passive	* If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown), the limiter is switched to passive mode (→ page 190).
Limiter inoperative	* T he limiter is malfunctioning.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
---- km/h	* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fulfilled.▶ Comply with the activation conditions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (→ page 194).
suspended	* If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC setting, the system will switch to passive mode (→ page 191).
Off	* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC was deactivated. If a warning tone also sounds, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has deactivated automatically (→ page 194).
Active Distance Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is temporarily unavailable.The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (→ page 191).As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.▶ Drive on.
Active Distance Assist inoperative	* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Distance Assist available again	* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again.▶ Switch on Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (→ page 194).
Speed Limit Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	* Speed Limit Assist is temporarily unavailable.▶ Drive on.Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
Speed Limit Assist inoperative	* S peed Limit Assist is malfunctioning.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
120km/h!Maximum speed exceeded	* You have exceeded the maximum permissible speed (for certain countries only).▶ Drive more slowly.
Speed limit (winter tyres)XXX km/h	* You have reached the maximum permissible stored speed for winter tyres. It is not possible to exceed this speed.
Active Steering Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	* Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable.The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (→ page 198).As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.▸ Drive on.▸ Check the tyre pressure if necessary.
Active Steering Assist inoperative	* Active Steering Assist is malfunctioning. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC remains available.▸ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Steering Assist currently unavailable due to multiple emergency stops	* Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable due to multiple emergency stops.▸ Take over the steering and stop in accordance with the traffic conditions.▸ Switch the ignition off and switch it back on.Active Steering Assist is available once more.
Beginning emergency stop	* Your hands are not on the steering wheel. An emergency stop is being initiated (→ page 201).▸ Put your hands back on the steering wheel.You can cancel the deceleration at any time by performing one of the following actions:SteeringBraking or acceleratingDeactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
	* Active Steering Assist has reached the system limits (→ page 198).You have not steered independently for a considerable period of time.▸ Take over the steering and drive on in accordance with the traffic conditions.
Active Stop-and-Go Assist currently unavailable see Owner's Manual	* Active Stop-and-Go Assist is temporarily unavailable. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are still available.The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (→ page 198).As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.Drive on.
Active Stop-and-Go Assist inoperative See Owner's Manual	* A ctive Stop-and-Go Assist is malfunctioning.Active Stop-and-Go Assist has been deactivated. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are still available.Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Traffic Sign Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	* Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily unavailable.Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.Drive on.
Traffic Sign Assist inoperative	* T raffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning.Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine.If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	* Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable.The system limits have been reached (→ page 210).Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.▶ Drive on.or▶ If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine.
Blind Spot Assist inoperative	* B lind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Blind Spot Assist not available when towing a trailer See Owner's Manual	* When you establish the electrical connection to the trailer, Blind Spot Assist will be unavailable.▶ Press the left-hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message.
Active Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	* Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable.The system limits have been reached (→ page 210).Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.▶ Drive on.or▶ If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine.
Active Blind Spot Assist inoperative	* A ctive Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Blind Spot Assist not available when towing a trailer See Owner's Manual	* When you establish the electrical connection to the trailer, Active Blind Spot Assist will be unavailable. ▶ Press the left-hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message.
Active Lane Keeping Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	* Active Lane Keeping Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (→ page 212). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. ▶ Drive on.
Active Lane Keeping Assist inoperative	* Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages

Four-panel diagram showing car and vehicle icons with Chinese labels, likely representing speed, speed limit, warning, and alert symbols.

Currently unavailable Radar sensors dirty

Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

* The radar sensor system is malfunctioning. Possible causes:

• dirt on the sensors
• heavy rain or snow
• extended country driving without other traffic, e.g. in the desert

Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable.

Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again.

If the display message does not disappear:

▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.
Clean all sensors ( page 310).
▶ Restart the engine.

Display messages

A A A!

Currently unavailable Camera view restricted

Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

* The camera view is restricted. Possible causes:

• dirt on the windscreen in the camera's field of vision
  • heavy rain, snow or fog
• mist on the windscreen in front of the camera

Mist detected on the windscreen will be automatically removed with the aid of a built-in heater within approximately 12 minutes.

Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable.

Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again.

If the display message does not disappear:

▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.
Clean the windscreen if necessary.

I	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Fault Drive at max. 80 km/h	* The AMG RIDE CONTROL + is malfunctioning. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected.▶ Do not drive at speeds greater than 80 km/h.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
AMG Ride Control Function limited See Owner's Manual[T16A][A7GB][WW5S1][Y2S1][F2C3][YW5S1][4S2D][G2S1][G4C2][62TH][668B][8B6T][68GB][G8K4][ZZC][WQDA]	* One or more main functions of the AMG RIDE CONTROL + is malfunctioning.The system is outside the operating temperature range or the on-board electrical system voltage is too low.Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
	NOTE The vehicle's suspension and damping behaviour is restricted. The vehicle body may tilt heavily to the side during cornering.
	Drive on carefully.Reduce speed considerably before taking a bend.Avoid sudden steering movements.
	Drive on carefully.Reduce speed considerably before taking a bend.Avoid sudden steering movements.

[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]
[Non-Text]

Display messages	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Stop vehicle Vehicle too low	* You have pulled away despite the vehicle level being too low.▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.The vehicle will be raised to the selected vehicle level.▶ Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.If the display message does not disappear and a warning tone also sounds, AMG RIDE CONTROL+ is malfunctioning:▶ Do not drive at speeds greater than 80 km/h and consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
	! NOTE The tyres on the front axle or the fenders could be damaged by large steering movements▶ Avoid large steering movements while driving and listen for scraping sounds.▶ If you hear scraping sounds, pull over and stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions, and set a higher vehicle level if possible.▶ Set a higher vehicle level (→ page 217).Depending on the malfunction, the vehicle will be raised.
Lowering	* The vehicle level may be lowered for the following reasons:• You have selected a different drive program.• You have exceeded the speed limit.• You have changed the vehicle level by pressing the button.
Vehicle rising	* Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected.
Vehicle rising Please wait	* The vehicle level is too low. The vehicle will be raised to the selected vehicle level.▶ Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
Please reduce speed	* You are driving too fast for the selected vehicle level.▶ To adjust the vehicle level, you must not drive at speeds greater than 60 km/h.▶ To adjust the vehicle level during trailer operation, you must not drive at speeds greater than 30 km/h.
RACE START not possibleSee Owner's Manual	* P ossible causes:• The activation conditions have not been fulfilled (→ page 219).
RACE START cancelled	* P ossible causes:• you released the accelerator pedal during RACE START.• you depressed the brake pedal during RACE START.You can try RACE START again at the next start.
DRIFT MODE currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	* P ossible causes:• The activation conditions have not been fulfilled (→ page 220).
Active Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC inoperative See Owner's Manual	* Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: Active Parking Assist and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC are malfunctioning. Vehicles without Active Parking Assist: Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning.▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine.▶ If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving safety systems

Display messages	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	* ABS and ESP are temporarily unavailable.Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be temporarily unavailable.The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.
currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	⚠ WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESPe malfunctioningThe wheels may lock during braking and ESPes not perform any vehicle stabilisation.
	The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 30 km/h.If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully.
inoperative See Owner's Manual	* ABS and ESPare malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.▲WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESPare malfunctioningThe wheels may block during braking and ESPDoes not perform any vehicle stabilization.The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.Drive on carefully.Have ABS and ESPchecked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	* ESP®is temporarily unavailable.Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.
	⚠ WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning®If ESP®is malfunctioning, ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 30 km/h.If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully.
inoperative See Owner's Manual	* ESP®is malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.
	⚠ WARNING Risk of skidding if ESPs malfunctioningIf ESP®is malfunctioning, ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.Drive on carefully.Have ESP®checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages

inoperative See Owner's Manual

Active Brake Assist Functions currently limited See Owner's Manual

Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

* EBD, ABS and ESPare malfunctioning.

Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.

⚠ WARNING Risk of skidding if EBD, ABS and ^® ESE malfunctioning

The wheels may block during braking and ^® ES does not perform any vehicle stabilization.

The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.

▶ Drive on carefully.
Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

* Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function, Evasive Steering Assist or PRE-SAFE PLUS are temporarily unavailable or only partially available.

Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable.

Drive on.
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine.

Display messages	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Active Brake Assist Functions limited See Owner's Manual	* Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function, Evasive Steering Assist or PRE-SAFE PLUS are temporarily unavailable or only partially available.Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable or only partially available.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Mercedes me connect

Display messages	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Mercedes me connect Services limited See Owner's Manual	* The vehicle functions for fault detection are restricted.At least one of the main functions of the Mercedes me connect system is malfunctioning.▶ Observe the notes on the diagnostics connection (→ page 28).▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Inoperative	* At least one of the main functions of the Mercedes me connect system or of the SOS emergency call system is malfunctioning.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Battery

Display messages	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
12 V battery See Owner's Manual	* The engine is off and the charge level is too low.▶ Switch off electrical consumers that are not required.To charge the 12 V battery:▶ Leave the engine running for a few minutes, or drive an extended distance.* If the message appears while the engine is running, this indicates an on-board electrical system malfunction.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
See Owner's Manual	* The 12 V battery is not being charged.■ NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving▶ Do not continue driving under any circumstances.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the engine.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Stop vehicle See Owner's Manual	* The 12 V battery is no longer being charged and the charge level is too low.■ NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving▶ Do not continue driving under any circumstances.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
	▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.▶ Switch off the engine.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Stop vehicle Leave engine running	* The 12 V battery charge level is too low.▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.▶ Leave the engine running.▶ Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.▶ If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
48 V battery See Owner's Manual	* The 48 V on-board electrical system has function restrictions. Comfort functions may be restricted.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Please wait 48 V battery charging	* The 48 V battery is discharged. You have switched on the ignition while the 12 V battery was being charged with a suitable charger or while another vehicle was providing starting assistance.The discharged 48 V battery is charged automatically via the voltage converter. After a few minutes, theMotor can be started againdisplay message will be shown on the multifunction display.► Start the engine.► Drive the vehicle for a while to charge the 12 V battery and the 48 V battery after disconnecting the charger from the vehicle.If theMotor can be started againdisplay message does not appear after a few minutes:► Try to start the engine again.► If the engine does not start, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Cannot start engine See Owner's Manual	* The charge level of the 48 V battery is too low. You can no longer start the engine.► Switch off electrical consumers that are not required.► Connect a suitable charger approved for Mercedes-Benz with sufficient charge output to the jump-start connection point of the 12 V battery (→ page 324).The 48 V battery is charged via the voltage converter in the vehicle.
Motor can be started again	* The 48 V battery has been charged automatically via the voltage converter.► Start the engine and drive the vehicle for a while to charge the 12 V battery and the 48 V battery.

Tyre pressure monitor

Display messages	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Tyre press. monitor currently unavailable	* There is interference from a powerful radio signal source As a result, no signals from the tyre pressure sensors are being received. The tyre pressure monitoring system is temporarily unavailable.The tyre pressure monitoring system will restart automatically as soon as the cause has been rectified.▶ Drive on.
Tyre press. monitor inoperative	* The tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning.⚠ WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioningThe tyre pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tyres.Tyres with insufficient tyre pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking.▶ Have the tyre pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Tyre press. monitor inoperative No wheel sensors	* The wheels fitted do not have suitable tyre pressure sensors. The tyre pressure monitoring system is deactivated.▶ Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors.
Wheel sensor(s) missing	* There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor of one or more wheels. No pressure value is displayed for the affected tyre.▶ Have the faulty tyre pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
Check tyre(s)	* The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped significantly. The wheel position will be displayed.⚠ WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tyre pressureThe tyres can burst.The tyres can wear excessively and/or unevenly.The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.You could then lose control of the vehicle.▶ Observe the recommended tyre pressures.▶ Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.
	▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.▶ Check the tyre pressure (→ page 336) and the tyres.
Rectify tyre pressure	* The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the difference in tyre pressure between the individual wheels is too great.▶ Check the tyre pressure and add air, if necessary.▶ When the tyre pressure is correct, restart the tyre pressure monitor (→ page 339).
Warning tyre defect	* The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly. The wheel position will be displayed.⚠ WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with a flat tyre• The tyres may overheat and be damaged.• The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics may be greatly impaired.You could then lose control of the vehicle.▶ Do not drive with a flat tyre.▶ Do not exceed the maximum driving distance permissible in emergency mode with a flat MOExtended tyre.▶ Observe the notes on flat tyres.
	Notes in the event of a flat tyre (→ page 315).▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.▶ Check the tyres.
Tyre(s) overheated	* At least one tyre is overheating. The affected tyres are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tyres are displayed in yellow.⚠ WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tyresOverheated tyres can burst.▶ Reduce speed so that the tyres cool down.
Reduce speed	* At least one tyre is overheating. The affected tyres are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tyres are displayed in yellow.
	⚠ WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tyresOverheated tyres can burst.▶ Reduce speed so that the tyres cool down.

Engine oil

Display messages	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Add 1 litre engine oil when next refuelling	* The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.■ NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil▶ Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.▶ When next refuelling, add 1 litre of engine oil (→ page 303).Notes on engine oil (→ page 357).
Engine oil level Reduce oil level	* The engine oil level is too high.■ NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with excess engine oil▶ Avoid long journeys with excess engine oil.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately and have the engine oil level reduced.
Engine oil level Stop vehicle Switch engine off	* The engine oil level is too low.■ NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil▶ Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.▶ Switch off the engine.▶ Add 1 l of engine oil (→ page 303).▶ Check the engine oil level.Notes on engine oil (→ page 357).
Engine oil pressure Stop Switch off engine	* The oil pressure is too low.■ NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient oil pressure▶ Avoid driving with insufficient oil pressure.
	▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Engine oil level cannot be measured	* The electrical connection to the oil level sensor has been interrupted or the oil level sensor is faulty.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps

Overview of indicator and warning lamps

Some systems will perform a self-test when the ignition is switched on. Some indicator and warning lamps may briefly light up or flash. This behaviour is non-critical. These indicator and warning lamps indicate a malfunction only if they

light up or flash after the engine has been started or during a journey.

Instrument display

1950 1960 1970 2000 2050 2100 2150 2200 2250 2300 2350 2400 2450 2500 2550 2600 2650 2700 2750 2800 2850 2900 2950 3000 3050 3100 3150 3200 3250 3300 3350 3400 3450 3500 3550 3600 3650 3700 3750 3800 3850 3900 3950 4000 4050 4100 4150 4200 4250 4300 4350 4400 4450 4500 4550 4600 4650 4700 4750 4800 4850 4900 4950 5000 5050 5100 5150 5200 5250 5300 5350 5400 5450 5500 5550 5600 5650 5700 5750 5800 5850 5900 5950 6000 6050 6100 6150 6200 6250 6300 6350 6400 6450 6500 6550 6600 6650 6700 6750 6800 6850 6900 6950 7000 7050 7100 7150 7200 7250 7300 7350 7400 7450 7500 7550 7600 7650 7700 7750 7800 7850 7900 7950 8000 8050 8100 8150 8200 8250 8300 8350 8400 8450 8500

Depending on the display setting, the positions If you select the Supersport display setting, the of the indicator lamps on the instrument display positions of the indicator lamps on the instrument may differ from the example shown.

Supersport setting

0.125 E-74-83

Indicator and warning lamps:

	Restraint system (→ page 419)
	Seat belt (→ page 419)
	Trailer hitch (→ page 420)
	Power steering (→ page 420)
	Coolant temperature (→ page 422)
	Engine diagnostics (→ page 422)

Engine operating temperature ( page 422)

Electrical fault ( page 422)

Reserve fuel with fuel filler flap location indicator ( page 422)

Electric parking brake (red) (→ page 425)

Electric parking brake (yellow) (→ page 425)

Brakes (yellow) ( page 425)

Brakes (red) ( page 425)

Distance warning ( page 427)

AMG RIDE CONTROL ( page 427)

ABS ( page 428)

ESP® (→ page 428)

ESP® OFF (→ page 428)

ESP ^® SPORT (→ page 428)

ESP ^® OFF ( page 428)

DRIFT MODE

Tyre pressure monitoring system ( page 432)

Standing lights (→ page 124)

Low beam (→ page 124)

High beam (→ page 125)

Turn signal lights ( page 125)

0‡ Rear fog light (→ page 124)

Occupant safety

Warning/indicator lamp

Restraint system warning lamp

Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

* The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The restraint system is malfunctioning ( page 37).

⚠ WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system

Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident. Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

▶ Drive on carefully.
Note the messages on the multifunction display.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Warning/indicator lamp	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Seat belt warning lamp flashes	* The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent warning tone sounds.The driver or front passenger has not fastened his/her seat belt while the vehicle is in motion.▶ Fasten your seat belt (→ page 40).There are objects on the front passenger seat.▶ Remove the objects from the front passenger seat.
Seat belt warning lamp lights up	* The red seat belt warning lamp lights up once the engine has started.In addition, an intermittent warning tone may sound.The red seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts.▶ Fasten your seat belt (→ page 40).If you have placed objects on the front passenger seat, the red seat belt warning lamp may remain lit.

Vehicle

Warning/indicator lamp	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Power steering warning lamp (red)	* The red power steering system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.The power assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning.⚠WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impairedIf the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised.▸ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
	▶ Note the messages on the multifunction display.
Trailer tow hitch warning lamp	* The red trailer hitch warning lamp is lit.The trailer hitch is not operational or is swivelling.
	⚠WARNING Risk of an accident if the ball neck is not locked
	The trailer may become detached. ▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving. ▶ Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away. ▶ Initiate a new swivel movement and do not re-couple the trailer until the warning/indicator lamp goes out.
	▶ Note the messages on the multifunction display.
	If the trailer hitch is swivelling: ▶ Wait until the ball neck has reached the operational position.

Engine

Warning/indicator lamp

Coolant warning lamp (red)

Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

* The red coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.

Possible causes:

• The temperature sensor is malfunctioning
• The coolant level is too low
• The air supply to the radiator is obstructed
• The radiator fan is faulty
• The engine coolant pump is faulty

If there is an additional warning tone, the coolant temperature has exceeded 120°C.

WARNING Danger of burns when opening the bonnet

If you open the engine bonnet when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids.

Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.
In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the engine bonnet closed and call the fire service.

Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the engine. Do not continue driving.
Note the messages on the multifunction display.

Warning/indicator lamp		Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
		If the coolant temperature display is at the lower end of the temperature scale:▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.If the coolant temperature display is at the upper end of the temperature scale:▶ Exit the vehicle and keep a safe distance from it until the engine has cooled down.▶ Check the coolant level (→ page 305).▶ Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed.▶ Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below 120°C.
Coolant warning lamp (yellow)		* The yellow coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.Possible causes:• The temperature sensor is malfunctioning• The charge air, transmission oil or battery cooling is faulty▶ Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
Engine diagnosis warning lamp		* The yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.A malfunction has occurred in the engine, the exhaust system or the fuel system.The emissions limit value may have been exceeded and the engine may be running in emergency operation mode.▶ Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning/indicator lamp	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Engine operating temperature warning lamp	*The blue warning lamp for engine operating temperature will remain lit until the engine operating temperature has been reached.The engine output and engine torque will remain reduced until then.▶ Take this into consideration in your driving style.
Electrical fault warning lamp	* The red electrical fault warning lamp is lit.There is a fault in the electrics.▶ Note the messages on the multifunction display.
Fuel reserve warning lamp lights up	* The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range.▶ Refuel.

Brakes

Warning/indicator lamp

Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red)

The electric parking brake (yellow) indicator lamp

Brake system warning lamp (yellow)

Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

* The red electric parking brake indicator lamp flashes or is lit.

The yellow electric parking brake indicator lamp also lights up in the event of a malfunction.

Note the messages on the multifunction display.

* The yellow brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.

WARNING Risk of an accident due to a brake system malfunction

If the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may be impaired.

▶ Drive on carefully.

Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Adjust your speed and drive on carefully, leaving a suitable distance to the vehicle in front.

If the multifunction display shows a display message, observe it.

Warning/indicator lamp

Brake system warning lamp (red)

Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* The red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.

Possible causes:

- The brake force boosting is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected.

• There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

Note the messages on the multifunction display.

⚠ WARNING Risk of accident and injury if brake force boosting is malfunctioning

If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal force may be necessary for braking. The braking characteristics may be impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations.

▶ Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving!

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level

If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired.

▶ Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning/indicator lamp	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	▶ Do not top up the brake fluid.

Driving systems

Warning/indicator lamp	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Active Brake Assist warning lamp	* The white Active Brake Assist warning lamp is lit.The system is switched off or unavailable.
Warning lamp for distance warning function	* The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion.The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected.If there is an additional warning tone, you are approaching an obstacle at too high a speed.▶ Be prepared to brake immediately.▶ Increase the distance.Function of Active Brake Assist (→ page 201).

Warning/indicator lamp

Suspension warning lamp (yellow)

Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

* The yellow AMG RIDE CONTROL + warning lamp is lit. There is a fault in the AMG RIDE CONTROL +.

Note the messages on the multifunction display.

Driving safety systems

Warning/indicator lamp

ABS warning lamp

Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

* The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ABS is malfunctioning.

If there is an additional warning tone, EBD is malfunctioning.

Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.

Note the messages on the multifunction display.

⚠ WARNING There is a risk of skidding if EBD or ABS is malfunctioning

The wheels may lock during braking.

The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.

Warning/indicator lamp	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	▸ Drive on carefully.▸ Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
ESP® warning lamp flashes	* The yellow ESP warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.One or more wheels has reached its grip limit (→ page 181).▸ Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
ESP® warning lamp lights up	* The yellow ESP warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.ESP® is malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.▸ Note the messages on the multifunction display.
	⚠WARNING Risk of skidding if ESPs malfunctioning
	If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.▸ Drive on carefully.▸ Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.* The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running. ESP® is deactivated.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be inoperative.
	▲WARNING Risk of skidding when driving with ESP® deactivatedESP® does not act to stabilise the vehicle. The availability of further driving safety systems is also limited.► Drive on carefully.► Deactivate ESP® only for as long as the situation requires.If ESP® cannot be activated, ESPis malfunctioning.Have ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
	▶ Observe the notes on deactivating ESP→ page 181).
	* ESP® SPORT is activated while the engine is running.When ESP® SPORT is activated, ESPwill stabilise the vehicle only to a limited extent.
	▲WARNING Risk of skidding if ESPSPORT is used incorrectlyWhen you activate ESPSPORT, there is an increased risk of skidding and having an accident.► Activate ESP® SPORT only in the circumstances described below.

Warning/indicator lamp

DRIFT MODE warning lamp

Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Observe the notes on activating ESP ^® SPORT(→ page 181).

* DRIFT MODE is activated while the engine is running.

⚠ WARNING Risk of skidding and having an accident from wheels spinning

When you use DRIFT MODE, ESIB not available.

There is an increased risk of skidding and having an accident.

▶ Do not use DRIFT MODE on normal roads.
▶ DRIFT MODE may only be activated and used on closed race circuits, not on public roads.
▶ Make sure that no persons or obstacles are in the close vicinity of your vehicle.
Observe the notes on activating DRIFT MODE ( page 220).

Tyre pressure monitor

Warning/indicator lamp	Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp flashes	*The yellow tyre pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit.The tyre pressure monitor is malfunctioning.
	⚠WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioningThe tyre pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tyres.Tyres with insufficient tyre pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking.▶ Have the tyre pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp lights up	*The yellow tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.The tyre pressure monitoring system has detected tyre pressure loss in at least one of the tyres.
	⚠WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tyre pressureThe tyres can burst.The tyres can wear excessively and/or unevenly.The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.You could then lose control of the vehicle.▶ Observe the recommended tyre pressures.▶ Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.
	▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.
	▶ Check the tyre pressure and the tyres.

1, 2, 3 ...

4MATIC 168 Function 168

12V battery see Battery (vehicle)

12V socket see Socket (12 V)

48 V on-board electrical system Operating safety 22

230 V socket see Socket (230 V)

360° Camera 226 Button 230 Care 310 Function 226 Opening the camera cover (reversing camera) 2 30 Selecting a view 230 Switching automatic operation on/off (reversing camera) 230

A

A/C function

Activating/deactivating (MBUX multimedia system) 140 Switching on/off (control panel) 140

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) 180

Acceleration see Kickdown

Accident and Breakdown Management Mercedes me connect 2 76

Acoustic locking verification signal Activating/deactivating 74

Active Blind Spot Assist .... 210 Brake application .... 211 Function .... 210 System limitations .... 210 Trailer operation .... 211

Active bonnet (pedestrian protection) .. 300 Operation .... 300 Resetting .... 300

Active Brake Assist Function/notes 201

Setting 205

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC .... 191 Active Emergency Stop Assist .... 201 Calling up a speed .... 194 Function .... 191 Increasing/decreasing speed .... 194 Maximum design speed .... 162 Requirements: .... 194 Route-based speed adaptation .... 196 Selecting .... 194 Steering wheel buttons .... 194 Storing a speed .... 194 Switching off/deactivating .... 194 Switching on/activating .... 194 System limitations .... 191

Active Emergency Stop Assist 201 Active headlamps 127

Active Lane Keeping Assist .... 212 Activating/deactivating .... 215 Activating/deactivating the warning ... 215 Function .... 212 Setting the sensitivity .... 215 System limits .... 212 Trailer operation .... 212

Active Parking Assist 235

Exiting a parking space 2

Function 235

Parking 236

System limitations 235

Active Service System PLUS see ASSYST PLUS

Active Speed Limit Assist 196

Display 196

Function 196

Active Steering Assist 198

Activating/deactivating 20

Active Emergency Stop Assist 201

Function 198

System limits 198

Active Traffic Jam Assist

Activating/deactivating 19

Function 198

Adaptive brake lights 186

Adaptive cruise control

see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus

Function 129

Switching on/off 130

^3 Additional door lock 76

Additives 357

Engine oil 357

Fuel 356

Additives (engine oil)

see Additives

Additives (fuel)

see Fuel

Adverse weather light 128

After-sales service centre

see ASSYST PLUS

Air conditioning menu

Calling up 140

Air distribution

8 Setting 1 3 9

Setting (MBUX multimedia system) ..... 141

Air freshener system

see Fragrance system

Air inlet

see Air-water duct

Air pressure

see Tyre pressure

Air vents 148

Adjusting (front) 148

Adjusting (rear) 148

Glove box 149

Air vents

see Air vents

Air-conditioning system

see Climate control

Air-recirculation mode 142

Air-water duct 306

Keeping free 306

Airbag 42

Activation 37

Front airbag (driver, front passenger) .... 42

Installation locations 42

Knee airbag 42

Overview 42

PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp ..... 47

Protection 43

Reduced protection 45

Side airbag 42

Window airbag 42

Airflow

Setting 13

Alarm system

see ATA (anti-theft alarm system)

All-wheel drive

see 4MATIC

Ambient lighting

Setting (multimedia system) 131

AMG

Steering wheel control element 218

Steering-wheel buttons 218

AMG ceramic high-performance com-

posite brake system 157

AMG Performance adjustable exhaust

system 162

Function 161

Operating 162

AMG performance seat

Setting 99

AMG Performance steering wheel 218

AMG RIDE CONTROL

Selecting the suspension setting ..... 216

AMG RIDE CONTROL +

Setting the vehicle level 217

Suspension 215

Android Auto

see Smartphone integration

Animals

Pets in the vehicle 71

Anti-lock braking system

see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Anti-skid chains

see Snow chains

Anti-theft protection

Additional door lock 7 6

Immobiliser 93

Anticipatory occupant protection

see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu-

pant protection)

see PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory

occupant protection plus)

Apple CarPlay®

see Smartphone integration

Assistance systems

see Driving safety system

ASSYST PLUS 299

Battery disconnection periods 300

Displaying the service due date 299

Function/notes 299

Regular maintenance work 299

Special service requirements 299

ATA (anti-theft alarm system) 93

Deactivating the alarm 94

Function 93

Function of interior protection 95

Priming/deactivating interior protec-

tion 95

Priming/deactivating tow-away pro-

tection 95

Tow-away protection function 94

ATTENTION ASSIST 187, 188

Function 187

Setting 188

System limitations 187

Attention assistant

see ATTENTION ASSIST

Authorised workshop

see Qualified specialist workshop

Automatic distance control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Automatic driving lights 125
Automatic engine start (ECO start/stop function) 157
Automatic engine stop (ECO start/stop function) 157
Automatic front passenger front airbag deactivation system see Automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff
Automatic front passenger front air- bag shutoff 45, 47 Function of the automatic front passenger front airbag deactivation system 45 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp 47
Automatic mirror folding function Activating/deactivating .... 137
Automatic seat adjustment Setting 102
Automatic transmission Double-clutch function .... 166

Drive program display 163 Drive programs 162
DYNAMIC SELECT switch 162
E-SELECT selector lever 164
Engaging drive position 166
Engaging neutral 165
Engaging park position 166
Engaging reverse gear 165
Kickdown 168
Manual gear changing 167
Steering wheel gearshift paddles ..... 167
Transmission position display 164
Transmission positions 164

Axle load Permissible .... 352 Trailer operation .... 364

B Bag hook .... 114 Ball neck Extending/retracting .... 241 Extending/retracting (MBUX multi-media system) .... 242 BAS (Brake Assist System) .... 180

Battery Key .... 75 Remote control (stationary heater) ..... 146

Battery see Battery (vehicle)

Battery (vehicle) 325 Charging 324 Charging (Remote Online) 152 Notes 321 Notes (starting assistance and charging) 322 Replacing 325 Starting assistance 324

Belt see Seat belt

Bicycle rack Load capacity 363 Trailer operation 245

Blind Spot Assist .... 210 Activating/deactivating .... 2 1 Function .... 210 System limitations .... 210

Blower see Climate control

Bonnet

Resetting (active bonnet) 300

Boot lid

see Tailgate

Brake Assist System

see BAS (Brake Assist System)

Brake fluid

Notes 358

Brake force distribution

EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution) 185

Brakes

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) 180

Active Brake Assist 201

Adaptive brake lights 186

AMG ceramic high-performance

composite brake system 157

BAS (Brake Assist System) 180

Driving tips 154

EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribu-

tion) 185

HOLD function 185

Limited braking effect (salt-treated

roads) 154

New/replaced brakepads/brake

discs 153

Running-in notes 153

Braking assistance

see BAS (Brake Assist System)

Breakdown

Overview of the help functions 16

Tow-starting 331

Towing away 327

Transporting the vehicle 329

Wheel change 343

Breakdown

see Flat tyre

Buttons

Steering wheel 251

C

Calls

Mercedes me 277

Camera

see 360° Camera

see Reversing camera

Car key

see Key

Car wash

see Care

Car wash (care) 306

Car-to-X-Communication

Displaying hazard warnings 271

Care 311

360° camera 310

Air-water duct 306

Car wash 306

Carpet 311

Decorative foil 309

Display 311

Exterior lighting 310

High-pressure cleaner 307

Matt finish 308

Paintwork 308

Plastic trim 311

Real wood/trim elements 311

Rear wing 310

Reversing camera 310

Roof lining 311

Seat belt 311

Seat cover 311

Sensors 310

Steering wheel 311

Tailpipes 310

Trailer hitch 310

Washing by hand 308

Wheels/rims 3 1

Windows 310

Wiper blades 310

Carpet (Care) 311

Changing gears 167

Manually 1 67

Changing hub caps 343

Changing the lights Driving abroad (symmetrical low beam) 124

Charging Battery (vehicle) 324 USB port 119

Child safety lock Rear door .... 70 Rear side windows .... 71

Child seat

Approval categories 57

Attaching (notes) 56

Basic instructions 5

Front passenger seat (notes) 68

Front passenger seat (without auto- 0 matic airbag shutoff) 67

ISOFIX/i-Size (fitting) 60

Notes on risks and dangers 52

Recommended child restraint systems 55

Seats suitable for belt-secured child restraint systems 64

Seats suitable for i-Size child restraint systems 59

Seats suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems 58

Securing on the co-driver seat 68

Securing on the rear seat 65

Top Tether 63

Children

Avoiding dangers in the vehicle 52

Basic instructions 51

City lighting 128

Cleaning

see Care

Climate control 139

Activating/deactivating the A/C function (control panel) 140

Activating/deactivating the A/C function (MBUX multimedia system) ... 140

Activating/deactivating the synchronisation function (control panel) 141

Activating/deactivating the synchronisation function (MBUX multimedia system) 141

Air-recirculation mode 142

Automatic control 140

Calling up the air conditioning menu ... 140

Climate style function 141

Demisting the windscreen 139

Demisting windows 141

Front air vents 148

Glove box air vent 149

Inserting/removing the flacon (fragrance system) 142

Ionisation 1 42

Note 139

Rear air vents 148

Residual heat 142

Setting (MBUX multimedia system) ..... 140

Setting the air distribution 139

Setting the airflow 139

Setting the climate style 141

Setting the fragrance system 142

Setting the vehicle interior temperature 139

Stationary heater/ventilation 144

Switching on/off 140

Switching the rear window heater on/off 1

THERMATIC control panel 139

THERMOTRONIC control panel 139

Ventilating the vehicle (convenience

opening) 87

Windscreen heating 143

Climate style

Function 141

Setting 141

Cockpit 6

Overview 6

Coffee cup symbol

see ATTENTION ASSIST

Collision detection (parked vehicle) ..... 177

Combination switch 125

Computer

see On-board computer

Consumption indicator

Calling up 164

Convenience closing 88

Convenience opening 87

Coolant (engine)

9 Check level 305

Notes 359

Cooling

see Climate control

Copyright 35

Cornering light 127

Cross Traffic Alert 240

Crosswind Assist

Function/notes 183

Cruise control 188

Activating 190

Buttons 190

Calling up a speed 19

Deactivating 190

Function 188

Maximum design speed 162

Requirements 190

Selecting 190

Setting a speed 190

Storing a speed 190

System limitations 188

Cup holder

Switching the cooling/heating function on/off 1 17

D

Dashboard

see Cockpit

Data acquisition

Vehicle 31

Data protection rights

Data storage 35

Data storage

Data protection rights 35

Electronic control units 31

Online services 34

Vehicle 31

Deactivating the alarm (ATA) 94

Dealership

see Qualified specialist workshop

Declaration of conformity

Electromagnetic compatibility 24

Jack 2

Specific absorption rate 24

TREFIT kit 28

Wireless vehicle components 24

Decorative foil (cleaning instructions)

309

Destination entry 268

Entering a POI or address 268

Detecting inattentiveness

see ATTENTION ASSIST

Diagnostics connection 28

Digital Owner's Manual 18

Dinghy towing

see Tow-bar system

Dipped beam

Setting 1 30

Display (care) 311

Display (MBUX multimedia system)

Home screen 258

Display (multimedia system)

Operating 259

Display (on-board computer)

Displays on the multifunction display .. 253

Display message

Calling up (on-board computer) 365

Notes 365

Display messages

---km/h 392

---km/h 393

LIM --- km/h 392

12 V battery See Owner's Man-

ual 409

48 V battery See Owner's Man-

ual 410

Active Light System inopera-

tive 372

Add 1 litre engine oil when

next refuelling 415

ATTENTION ASSIST inoperative .. 391

ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a

break! 391

Automatic driving lights inoper-

ative 371

Change key batteries 369

Check brake fluid level 390

Check brake pads See Owner's

Manual 390

Check trailer hitch lock 375

Check tyre(s) 413

Coolant Stop vehicle Switch

engine off 382

Currently unavailable Camera

view restricted 400

Currently unavailable Radar

sensors dirty 399

currently unavailable See Own-

er's Manual 404

currently unavailable See Owner's Manual 4 0 6
Engine oil level cannot be measured 4 1 7
Engine oil level Reduce oil level .. 416
Engine oil level Stop vehicle
Switch engine off 416
Engine oil pressure Stop Switch off engine 417
Fault Drive at max. 80 km/h ..... 401
Front left malfunction Consult workshop (example) 366
Hinterachslenkung Störung Werkstatt aufsuchen 377
Hinterachslenkung z.Zt. nicht verfügbar 378
inoperative Battery low 374
inoperative Refuel vehicle 374
inoperative See Owner's Man. .... 373

inoperative See Owner's Manual 405
inoperative See Owner's Manual 406
EBD inoperative See Owner's Manual 407
SOS Inoperative 408
Intelligent Light System inoper- ative 372
Key not detected (red display message) 370
Key not detected (white display message) 369
☐ Left dipped beam (example) ..... 371
Left windowbag malfunction Consult workshop (example) 366
Lowering 402
Malfunction See Owner's Manual 371
120mm/1 Maximum speed exceeded 394

Off 393
HOLD Off 391
Operation only possible in transmission position P 375
(P) Parking brake See Owner's Manual 386
Please reduce speed 403
Please wait 48 V battery charging 411
Rear left seat backrest not locked (Example) 381
Rectify tyre pressure 413
(P) Release parking brake 389
Replace key 369
Reserve fuel level 383
Restraint sys. malfunction Con- sult workshop 366
See Owner's Manual 409
Steering malfunction Increased physical effort See Owner's Manual .... 377

Steering malfunction Stop immediately See Owner's Manual ..... 3
Stop vehicle Leave engine running 410
Stop vehicle See Owner's Manual 410
Stop vehicle Vehicle too low ..... 402
suspended 393
Switch off lights 372
Switch on headlamps 372
Top up coolant See Owner's Manual 382
Top up washer fluid 381
Trailer coupling extending... 375
Trans. oil overheated Drive on with care 386
(P) Turn on the ignition to release the parking brake 390
Vehicle is operational Switch off ignition before exiting 374

Vehicle rising Please wait 403
Vehicle rising 403
Warning tyre defect 414
Wheel sensor(s) missing 412
Active Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual .... 397
Active Blind Spot Assist inoperative .... 397
Active Blind Spot Assist not available when towing a trailer See Owner's Manual 398
Active bonnet malfunction See Owner's Manual 378
Active Brake Assist Functions currently limited See Owner's Manual ..... 407
Active Brake Assist Functions limited See Owner's Manual 408
Active Distance Assist available again 394
Active Distance Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual 393

Active Distance Assist inoperative ..... 393
Active Lane Keeping Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual .... 398
Active Lane Keeping Assist inoperative 398
Active Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC inoperative See Owner's Manual 404
Active Steering Assist currently unavailable due to multiple emergency stops 395
Active Steering Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual 394
Active Steering Assist inoperative ..... 395
Active Stop-and-Go Assist currently unavailable see Owner's Manual .... 396
Active Stop-and-Go Assist inoperative See Owner's Manual 396

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus currently unavailable See Owner's Manual 3 7 3
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus inoperative 3 7 3
AMG Ride Control Function limited See Owner's Manual 401
Apply brake to deselect Park (P) position 383
Apply brake to select D or R 384
Apply brake to select R 384
Auxiliary battery malfunction 386
Beginning emergency stop 395
Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual 396
Blind Spot Assist inoperative 397
Blind Spot Assist not available when towing a trailer See Owner's Manual ... 397
Cannot start engine See Owner's Manual 411

Cruise control and Limiter inoperative 392
Cruise control inoperative 392
Cruise control off 392
DRIFT MODE currently unavailable See Owner's Manual 404
Electronic rear axle locking differential currently unavailable 378
Electronic rear axle locking differential inoperative 378
Front-passenger airbag disabled See Owner's Manual 367
Front-passenger airbag enabled See Owner's Manual 367
Hazard warning lamps malfunctioning 3 7 3
Limiter inoperative 392
Limiter passive 392
Mercedes me connect Services limited See Owner's Manual 408

Motor can be started again 411
N permanently active Risk of vehicle rolling 384
Only select Park (P) when vehicle is stationary 383
Place the key in the marked space See Owner's Manual 370
PRE-SAFE impulse side inoperative See Owner's Manual 368
PRE-SAFE inoperative See Owner's Manual 368
RACE START cancelled 403
RACE START not possible See Owner's Manual 403
Rear spoiler control system inoperative 378
Rear spoiler inoperative Limit XXX km/h 379
Reduce speed 415

Reversing not poss. Consult work- shop 3 8 5
Risk of vehicle rolling Driver door open and transmission not in P 38
Speed limit (winter tyres) XXX km/h ... 394
Speed Limit Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual 394
Speed Limit Assist inoperative 394
Stop vehicle Leave engine running Wait Transmission cooling 385
To shift out of P or N, depress brake and start engine 384
To switch off the engine, press the Start/Stop button for at least 3 seconds or 3 times. 381
Traffic Sign Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual 396
Traffic Sign Assist inoperative 396
Transmission Malfunction Stop 385

Tyre press. monitor currently unavailable 412

Tyre press. monitor inoperative 412

4Tyre press. monitor inoperative No wheel sensors 412

Tyre(s) overheated 414

Without changing gear, consult work- shop 38

Display on the windscreen see Head-up display

Distance control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

DISTRONIC see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Door Additional door lock 7
Child safety lock (rear door) 70
Locking (emergency key) 80
Opening (from inside) 7
Power closing function 79
Unlocking (emergency key) 80
Unlocking (from inside) 77

Door control panel 14

Double-clutch function 166

Drawbar see Tow-bar system

DRIFT MODE Activating .... 220 Activation conditions .... 220 Deactivating .... 220 5 Function .... 220

Drive Away Assist 239

Drive Away Assist see Protection against collision

Drive position Engaging 166

Drive program display 163

Drive programs see DYNAMIC SELECT

Driver's seat, see Seat

Driving abroad Symmetrical low beam 124

Driving safety system 178

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) 180

Active Brake Assist 201

Adaptive brake lights 186

BAS (Brake Assist System) 180

Cameras 178

EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution) 185

ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ..... 181

ESP® Crosswind Assist 183

ESP ^® trailer stabilisation 183

Overview 179

Radar and ultrasonic sensors 178

Responsibility 178

STEER CONTROL 185

Driving system

AMG RIDE CONTROL + 215

Driving system

see 360° Camera

see Active Blind Spot Assist

see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

see Active Emergency Stop Assist

see Active Lane Keeping Assist

see Active Parking Assist

see Active Speed Limit Assist

see Active Steering Assist

see ATTENTION ASSIST

see Blind Spot Assist

see Cruise control

see Driving safety system

see HOLD function

see Limiter

see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

see Reversing camera

see Speed Limit Assist

see Traffic Sign Assist

Driving tips

AMG ceramic high-performance

composite brake system 157

Driving abroad (symmetrical low

beam) 124

General driving tips 154

Running-in notes 153

Drowsiness detection

see ATTENTION ASSIST

DYNAMIC SELECT 162

Configuring drive program | 163

Displaying engine data 164

Displaying vehicle data 164

Drive program display 163

Drive programs 162

Function 162

Operating (DYNAMIC SELECT switch) 1 63

Selecting the drive program 163

E

E-SELECT selector lever 164

Engaging drive position 166

Engaging neutral 165

Engaging park position 166

Engaging park position automatically .. 166

Engaging reverse gear 165

Function 164

E10 355

Easy entry feature

Function/notes 106

Setting 107

Easy exit feature

Function/notes 106

Setting 107

EASY-PACK load-securing kit 114

Installing/removing the telescopic

rod 115

Notes 114

EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribu-

tion)

Function/notes 185

ECO Assist

Displaying 161

Function/notes 159

ECO display

Function 159

ECO start/stop function

Automatic engine start 157

Automatic engine stop 157

Operation 157

Switching off/on 159

Electric parking brake

Applying automatically 175

Applying or releasing manually 176

Emergency braking 177

Releasing automatically 176

Electrical fuses

see Fuses

Electromagnetic compatibility

Declaration of conformity 2 4

Emergency

Fire extinguisher 314

First-aid kit (soft sided) 314

Overview of the help functions 16

Removing the warning triangle 313

Safety vest 313

Setting up the warning triangle 314

Emergency braking

Emergency braking

see BAS (Brake Assist System)

Emergency engine start 331

Emergency key

Inserting/removing 74

Locking a door 8

Unlocking a door 8

Unlocking the tailgate 85

Emergency operation mode

Starting the vehicle 151

Emergency spare wheel 349

Notes 349

Emotion Start

Starting the vehicle 151

Engine

ECO start/stop function 157

Engine number 352

Starting (emergency operation

mode) 151

Starting (Remote Online) 152

Starting (start/stop button) 151

Starting assistance 324

Switching off (start/stop button) ..... 171

Engine bonnet

Function (active bonnet) 300

Opening/closing 301

Engine data

Displaying 164

0Engine electronics

Notes 350

Engine number

Engine oil 303

Additives 357

Capacity 358

Checking the oil level using the on-

board computer 303

MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 358

Quality 358

Topping up 30

Engine operating temperature Warning lamp 154

Engine output Note 154

Engine torque Note 154

EQ Boost Operating safety 22

ERA-GLONASS test mode Starting/ending 289

Error message see Display message

ESP® Crosswind Assist 18 Trailer stabilisation 183

ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Activating/deactivating .... 184 ESP® SPORT .... 181 Function/notes .... 181

ESP ^® SPORT Function/notes 181

EU general operating permit number .... 352

Exterior lighting see Lights Exterior lighting (care) 310

F Fatigue detection see ATTENTION ASSIST

Fire extinguisher 314

First-aid kit (soft sided) 314 Flacon Inserting/removing 1 4

Flat towing see Tow-bar system

Flat tyre .... 315 MOExtended tyres .... 3 Notes .... 315 TREFIT kit .... 317 Wheel change .... 343

Floor mats .... 122 Fog light (extended range) .... 128

Foil covering Radar and ultrasonic sensors .... 178

Fragrance see Fragrance system Fragrance system .... 142 Inserting/removing the flacon .... 142 Setting .... 142

Free software 35

Frequencies Two-way radio 351

Front airbag (driver, front passenger) ..... 42

Front passenger seat 99 Adjusting from the driver's seat 99

Front passenger seat see Seat

Fuel 356
Additives 356
E10 355
Fuel reserve 357
Petrol 355
Quality (petrol) 355
Refuelling 169
Sulphur content 355

Tank content 357

Function seat

see Door control panel

Fuses 331

Before replacing a fuse 331

Fuse assignment diagram 331

Fuse box in the engine compartment .. 332

Fuse box in the front passenger foot-well 333

Fuse box in the load compartment ..... 333

Fuse box on the dashboard 333

Notes 331

G

Garage door opener

Clearing the memory 175

Opening or closing the door 174

Programming buttons 173

Resolving problems 174

Synchronising the rolling code 174

Gearshift recommendation 167

General operating permit number

(EU) 352

Genuine parts 21

Genuine wood (Care) 311

Glide mode 168

Glove box

Air vent 149

H

Handbrake

see Electric parking brake

Handling characteristics (unusual) ..... 335

HANDS-FREE ACCESS 83

Hazard warning lights 126

Head restraint

Front (adjusting mechanically) 100

Rear (adjusting) 101

Rear (fitting/removing) 101

Head-up display 254

Adjusting display elements (on-board computer) 254

Adjusting the brightness (on-board computer) 254

Function 253

Menu (on-board computer) 254

Operating the memory function ..... 108

Setting the position (on-board computer) 254

Switching on/off 256

Headlamp flashing 125

Headlamps

see Automatic driving lights

Heating

see Climate control

Help call

see Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

High beam

Activating/deactivating 125 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus 129

High-pressure cleaner (care) 307

Hill Start Assist 186

HOLD function 185

Function/notes 185

Switching on/off 185

Home screen (media display)

Overview 258

1

i-Size child seat securing system Fitting 60

i-Size child seat securing system Seats suitable for attaching 59

Identification plate Engine .... 352 vehicle .... 352

Ignition Switching on (Start/Stop button) ..... 150

Ignition key see Key Immobiliser 93

Implied warranty Vehicle 31

In-Car Office 281 Features 281

Indicator lamps see Warning/indicator lamps

Individual drive program Configuring .... 163 Selecting .... 163

Inspection

see ASSYST PLUS

Instrument cluster

Function/notes 249, 250

Instrument display

Function/notes 250 Instrument cluster 10 Warning/indicator lamps 417

Instrument display and on-board computer

Function/notes 249

Intelligent Light System

Active headlamps 127

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus .... 1 Adverse weather light .... 128

City lighting 1 2

Cornering light 127

Fog light (extended range) 128

Motorway mode 127

Overview 126 Switching on/off 128

Interior lighting

Adjusting 131

Ambient lighting 131

Reading lamp 131
Switch-off delay time 132

Interior protection

Function 95 Priming/deactivating 95

Internet radio see Tunelr

Ionisation Activating/deactivating (MBUX multimedia system) 142

iPhone® see Smartphone integration

ISOFIX child seat securing system 2 9 Fitting .... 60 8 Seats suitable for attaching .... 58

J

Jack

Declaration of conformity 27

Jump-start connection 324
General notes 322

K

Key 73

Acoustic locking verification signal ..... 74

Battery 75

Emergency key 74

Energy consumption 74

Features 73

Key ring attachment 74

Overview 73

Problem 7

Unlocking setting 7

Key functions

Deactivating 74

KEYLESS-GO

Locking the vehicle 78

Problem 7

Unlocking setting 7

Unlocking the vehicle 78

Kickdown 168

Using 168

Knee airbag 42

L

Lamp

see Interior lighting

Lamps (instrument display)

see Warning/indicator lamps

Lane detection (automatic)

see Active Lane Keeping Assist

Lane Keeping Assist

see Active Lane Keeping Assist

^4 Light switch

Overview 124

Lighting

see Interior lighting

see Lights

^8 Lights 124

4 Active headlamps 127

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus 129

Adverse weather light 128

Automatic driving lights 125

City lighting 128

Combination switch 1

Cornering light 127

Driving abroad (symmetrical low

beam) 124

Fog light (extended range) 128

Hazard warning lights 126

Headlamp flashing 125

High beam 1 25

Intelligent Light System 126

Light switch 124

Low beam 124

Motorway mode 127

Parking lights 124

Rear fog light 124

Responsibility for lighting systems ..... 124

Setting the dipped beam 130

Setting the exterior lighting switch-

off delay time 130

Standing lights 124

Switching the surround lighting

on/off 130

Turn signal indicator 125

Limiter 189

Activating 190

Buttons 190

Calling up a speed 190

Deactivating 190

Function 189

Maximum design speed 162

Passive mode 189

Permanent setting 191

Requirements 190

Selecting 190

Setting a speed 190

Storing a speed 190

System limitations 189

Limiting speed

see Limiter

Limiting the opening angle (tailgate) ..... 85

LINGUATRONIC

Function 260

Starting 261

Live Traffic Information

Switching the traffic information display on 2

Loading 113

Bag hook 114

Notes 108

Roof luggage rack 116

Tie-down eyes 113

Loading

see EASY-PACK load-securing kit

Loading guidelines 108

Loads

Securing 108

Locking/unlocking

Activating/deactivating the automatic locking feature 79

Additional door lock 7

Emergency key 80

KEYLESS-GO 78

Opening the tailgate 80

Unlocking/opening the doors from the inside 77

Low beam

Switching on/off 124

Symmetrical low beam 124

Lubricant additives

see Additives

Luggage

Securing 108

Lumbar support

see Lumbar support (4-way)

Lumbar support (4-way) 97, 99

M

Maintenance

see ASSYST PLUS

Malfunction

Restraint system 37

Manoeuvring assistant

6 Activating/deactivating 240

Cross Traffic Alert 240

Drive Away Assist 239

Map 270

Displaying online map contents 271

Displaying weather information 271

Moving 270

Selecting the map orientation 270

Setting the map scale 270

Switching motorway information on/off 270

Massage programmes

Overview 103

Resetting the settings 103

Massage programs

Selecting the front seats 103

Massage settings

Resetting 103

Matt finish (cleaning instructions) ..... 308

Maximum design speed 162

Maximum gross vehicle weight 352

Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight 352

Maximum speed

see Limiter

Maximum speeds 361

MBUX multimedia system 257

Activating/deactivating standby mode 1 78

Configuring drive program I 163

Notes 257

Overview 257

Setting route-based speed adaptation 198

Standby mode function 177

Media

Overview of the functions and symbols 291

Media mode

Connecting Bluetooth ^® audio equipment 293

Medical aids 30

Memory function

Function 107

Head-up display — Calling up stored settings 108

Head-up display — Storing settings ..... 108

Operating 108

Outside mirrors – Calling up stored settings 108

Outside mirrors – Storing settings ..... 108 Seat – Calling up stored settings .....

Seat - Storing settings 108

Steering wheel – Calling up saved

settings 108 Steering wheel — Saving settings 1

Menu (on-board computer)

Head-up display 254

Overview 251

Mercedes me app

Information 281

Mercedes me calls

Arranging a service appointment ..... 279

Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre 278

Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre after automatic accident or breakdown detection 278

Consenting to data transfer 279

Information 278

Making a call via the overhead control panel 277 Transferred data 280

Mercedes me connect

Accident and Breakdown Management 276

Information 2 75

Transferred data 277

Mercedes-Benz emergency call sys-

tem 284

Automatic emergency call 286

Information 284

Information on data transfer ..... 287, 289

Manual emergency call 287

Overview 286

Self diagnosis 289

Starting/ending ERA-GLONASS test mode 28

Mercedes-Benz Link see Smartphone integration

Mercedes-Benz service centre see Qualified specialist workshop

Message (multifunction display) see Display message

Message memory 365

Mirrors see Outside mirrors

Mobile phone Wireless charging .... 121 Wireless charging (rear) .... 122

Mobile phone see Smartphone integration see Telephone

Model series see Vehicle identification plate

MOExtended tyres 315

Motorway mode 127

MULTIBEAM LED 126

Multifunction display 9 Overview of the displays 253

Multifunction steering wheel Overview of buttons 2

Multifunction steering wheel see Steering wheel

Multimedia system Collision detection (parked vehicle) ..... 177

Multimedia system see Display (multimedia system) see MBUX multimedia system see Touchpad

N

Navigation Notes ...... 266 Overview ...... 267 Showing/hiding the menu ...... 266 Switching on ...... 266

Navigation see Destination entry see Map see Route

Neutral Engaging 165

0

Occupant safety

see Airbag see Automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff see Pets in the vehicle see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) see PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side see PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus) see Restraint system see Seat belt

Oil

see Engine oil

On-board computer 251 Displaying the service due date 299 Head-up display menu 2 54 Multifunction display 253 Operating 251 Overview of menus 251

On-board diagnostics interface

see Diagnostics connection

On-board electronics

Engine electronics 3 5 0

Notes 350

Two-way radios 350

Online services

Data storage 34

Online services

see In-Car Office

Open-source software 35

Opening the tailgate using your foot

HANDS-FREE ACCESS 83

Operating fluids

Additives (fuel) 356

Brake fluid 358

Coolant (engine) 359

Engine oil 357

Fuel (petrol) 355

Notes 354

Windscreen washer fluid 360

Operating safety

48 V on-board electrical system 22

Declaration of conformity (electromagnetic compatibility) 24

Declaration of conformity (jack) 27

0 Declaration of conformity (TREFIT kit) .. 28

Declaration of conformity (wireless vehicle components) 24

EQ Boost 22

Information 22

Operating system

see On-board computer

Outside mirrors 134, 135

Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) 135

Automatic mirror folding function ..... 137

Folding in/out 134

Operating the memory function ..... 108

Parking position 136

Setting 134

Overhead control panel

Overview 12

Owner's Manual

Vehicle equipment 22

Owner's Manual (digital) 18

P

Paint code 352

Paintwork (cleaning instructions) 308

Panel heating

Setting 10

Panoramic roof

Operating the roller sunblind 92

Park position

Engaging 166

Selecting automatically 166

Parking

see Electric parking brake

Parking aid

see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC 230

Activating 234

Adjusting warning tones 234

Deactivating 234

Function 230

Side impact protection 232

System limitations 2 3

Parking assistance systems

see Active Parking Assist

Parking brake

see Electric parking brake

Parking lights 124

Parking position

Outside mirrors 136

Storing the position of the passenger

outside mirror using reverse gear ..... 137

Parking up 177

PASSENGER AIR BAG status display

see Automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff

Pedestrian protection

see Active bonnet (pedestrian protection)

Perfume

see Fragrance system

Perfume vial

see Fragrance system

Period out of use

Activating/deactivating standby mode 1 78

Standby mode function 177

Permissible axle load 352

Permitted towing methods 326

Petrol 355

Pets in the vehicle 71

Plastic trim (Care) 311

Power closing function Door 79

Power supply

Switching on (Start/Stop button) ..... 150

Power windows

see Side windows

PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant

protection) 50

Function 50

PRE-SAFE ^® Sound 50

Reversing measures 50

PRE-SAFE ^® Impulse Side 5 1

Activation 37

Function 51

PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occu-

pant protection plus) 51

Function 51

Reversing measures 50

Preventative occupant protection sys-

tem

see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection)

Profile 261

Creating a new profile 2 62

Notes 261

Selecting profile options 262

Programme

see DYNAMIC SELECT

Protection against collision 239

Protection of the environment

Notes 20

Take-back of end-of-life vehicles 20

Q

QR code

Rescue card 31

Qualified specialist workshop 29

R

RACE START

Activating 219

Activation conditions 219

Information 219

Radar and ultrasonic sensors

Damage 178

Radio

Overview of the functions and symbols 295

Radio operating permits 352

Rain-closing feature

Side windows 87

Sliding sunroof 91

REACH regulation 30

Reading lamp

see Interior lighting

Rear axle steering 157

Rear door (child safety lock) 70

Rear fog light

Switching on/off 125

Rear seat

see Seat

Rear seat belt

Status display 42

Rear seat belt status display 42

Rear spoiler

see Rear wing

Rear window

Sun protection 92

Rear window heater 139

Rear wing 221

Care 310

Function/notes 221

Retracting/extending 222

Setting 223

Rear-view mirror

see Outside mirrors

Recycling

see Take-back of end-of-life vehicles

Refuelling

Refuelling the vehicle 169

Registration

Vehicle 30

Remote control (stationary heater/

ventilation)

Displays 146

Problems 147

Replacing the battery 146

Setting 145

Remote Online

Charging the starter battery 152

Cooling or heating the vehicle inte-

rior 152

Starting the vehicle 152

Rescue card 31

Reserve

Fuel 357

Residual heat 142

Restraint system 36

Basic instructions for children 51

Function in an accident 37

Functionality 36

Malfunction 37

Protection 36

Reduced protection 36

Self-test 36

Warning lamp 36

Reverse gear

Engaging 165

Reversing camera 223

Button 226

Care 310

Function 223

Opening the camera cover (360°

Camera) 2 3

Switching automatic operation

on/off (360° Camera) 230

Rims (care) 310

Rocking free 166

Roll away protection

see HOLD function

Roller sunblind

Panoramic roof 92

Roof lining (care) 311

Roof load 361

Roof luggage rack

Loading 116

Securing 116

Route 269

Calculating 269

Selecting options 269

Route guidance with augmented real-

ity

Activating 269

Displaying street names and house

numbers 269

Route-based speed adaptation

Function 196

Setting 198

Run-flat characteristics

MOExtended tyres 315

Running-in notes 153

S

Safety systems

see Driving safety system

Safety vest 313

Seat 96, 111

4-way lumbar support 97, 99

Adjusting (electrically) 98

Adjusting (Seat Comfort) 97

Automatic seat adjustment 102

Backrest (rear) locking 113

Configuring the settings 101

Correct driver's seat position 96

Folding the backrest (rear) back ..... 112

Folding the backrest (rear) forwards .... 111

Massage programme overview 103

Operating the memory function 108

Panel heating 105

Resetting the settings 103

Setting options 14

Workout programme overview 103

Seat

see Front passenger seat

Seat belt 38,42

Activating/deactivating seat belt

adjustment 41

Adjusting the height 40

Care 311

Fastening 40

Protection 38

Rear seat belt status display 42

Reduced protection 39

Releasing 42

Seat belt adjustment (function) 41

Warning lamp 42

Seat belt adjustment

Activating/deactivating 41

Function 41

Seat belt tensioners

Activation 37

Seat belt warning

see Seat belt

Seat cover (Care) 311

Seat heater

Activating/deactivating 10

Seat ventilation

Switching on/off 105

Selecting a gear

see Changing gears

Selector lever

see E-SELECT selector lever

Self-test

Automatic front passenger front air- bag shutoff 47

Sensors (care) 310

Service

see ASSYST PLUS

Service centre

see Qualified specialist workshop

Service interval display

see ASSYST PLUS

Setting a speed 162

Setting a speed

see Cruise control

Setting the map scale

4 see Map

Shift paddles

see Steering wheel gearshift paddles

Shifting gears

Gearshift recommendation 167

Side airbag 42

Side impact protection 232

Side windows 86

Automatic function 87

Child safety lock in the rear 71

Closing 86

Closing using the key 88

Convenience closing 88

Convenience opening 87

Opening 8

Opening with the key 87

Problem 8 8

Rain-closing feature 87

Sliding sunroof

Automatic features 91

Closing 89

Closing using the key 88

Opening 8 9

Opening with the key 87

Problem 9 1

Rain-closing feature 91

Smartphone

see Smartphone integration

see Telephone

Smartphone integration 283

Overview 283

Snow chains 335

Socket (12 V) 117

Boot/luggage compartment 117

Front centre console 117

Socket (230 V) 118

Rear 118

Software update

System updates 263

Sound

PRE-SAFE ^® Sound 50

Wheels and tyres 335

Sound menu

Functions overview 297

Spare wheel

see Emergency spare wheel

Specific absorption rate 24

Speed Limit Assist 206

Function/notes 206

Setting 207

System limitations 206

Speed limit for winter tyres

Setting 1 91

Sports exhaust

see AMG Performance adjustable

exhaust system

Standby mode

Activating/deactivating 178

Function 177

Standing lights 124

Start/stop button

Emotion Start 151

Parking the vehicle 171

Starting the vehicle 151

Switching on the power supply or ignition 150

Start/stop function

see ECO start/stop function

Starter battery

Charging (Remote Online) 152

Starting assistance

see Jump-start connection

Starting the engine

see Vehicle

Starting-off aid

see Hill Start Assist

Stationary heater/ventilation

Displays (remote control) 146

Problems (remote control) 147

Replacing the battery (remote control) 146

Setting (MBUX multimedia system) ..... 145

Setting (remote control) 145

Switching on/off (control panel) 144

STEER CONTROL

Function/notes 185

Steering

Rear axle steering 157

Steering wheel 251

Adjusting (electrically) 105

Buttons 251

Care 311

Operating the memory function 108

Steering wheel heater 106

Steering wheel gearshift paddles 167

Steering wheel heater

Switching on/off 106

Stowage areas

see Loading

see Stowage compartment

Stowage compartment 111

Armrest 111

Centre console 111

Door 111

Glove compartment 111

Stowage compartments

see Loading

see Stowage compartment

Stowage spaces

USB ports 111

Suggestions

Configuring 262

Sulphur content 355

Sun blind

Rear window 92

Surround lighting

Switching on/off 130

Surround View

see 360° Camera

Suspension

AMG RIDE CONTROL + 215

Selecting the suspension setting 216

Setting the vehicle level 217

Suspension level

Setting 217

SVHC (substances of very high con-

cern) 30

Switch-off delay time

Exterior 130

Interior 132

Synchronisation function

Activating/deactivating (MBUX multimedia system) 141 Switching on/off (control panel) 141

System settings

Overview of the system settings menu 263

T

Tailgate 80

Closing 81
HANDS-FREE ACCESS 83
Limiting the opening angle 85
Opening 80
Opening dimensions 360
Unlocking (emergency key) 85

Tailpipes (care) 310

Take-back of end-of-life vehicles 20

Protection of the environment 20

Tank content

Fuel 357 Reserve (fuel) 357

Technical data

Axle load (trailer operation) 364

Fastening points (trailer hitch) .... 363 Information .... 350 Mounting dimensions (trailer hitch) .... 363 Notes (trailer hitch) .... 362 Overhang dimension (trailer hitch) .... 363 Radio operating permits .... 352 Tongue weight .... 363 Towing capacity (trailer operation) .... 363

Telephone 272, 274

Connecting a mobile phone (Pass-key) 275
Connecting a mobile phone (Secure Simple Pairing) 275
Functions in the telephone menu 275
Notes 272
Operating modes 274
Telephone menu overview 274
Wireless charging (mobile phone in the rear) 122
Wireless charging (mobile phone) 121

Telephony operating modes

Bluetooth® Telephony 274 Making calls in the vehicle 274

Temperature

Setting the vehicle interior temperature 139

Themes

Fastening 262

Through-loading feature

see Seat

Tie-down eyes 113

TIREFIT kit 316

Declaration of conformity 28

Storage location 316

Using 317

Toll system

Windscreen 137

Tongue weight 363

Tool

see Vehicle tool kit

Top Tether 63

Touch Control

On-board computer 251

Operating 259

Touchpad 259

Operating 259

Touchscreen (media display)

Operating 259

Tow-away protection

Function 94

Priming/deactivating 95

Tow-bar system 247

Tow-starting 331

Towing away 327

Towing eye

Installing 330

Storage location 330

Towing methods 326

Traffic information

Switching on the display 271

Traffic Sign Assist 207

Function/notes 207

Setting 209

System limitations 207

Trailer hitch

Axle load 364

Bicycle rack 245

Care 3 10

Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer 243

Extending/retracting the ball neck ..... 241

Extending/retracting the ball neck

(MBUX multimedia system) 242

Fastening points 363

General notes 362

Mounting dimensions 363

Notes 240

Overhang dimension 363

Socket 243

Tongue weight 363

Towing capacity 363

Trailer operation

Active Blind Spot Assist 211

Active Lane Keeping Assist 212

Bicycle rack 245

Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer 243

Extending/retracting the ball neck ..... 241

Extending/retracting the ball neck (MBUX multimedia system) 242

Notes 240

Socket 243

Trailer stabilisation

Function/notes 183

Transmission position display 164

Transporting

Vehicle 329

Trim element (Care) 311

Tuneln 297

Calling up 297

Turn signal indicator 125

Activating/deactivating 125

TV

Information 294

Two-way radios

Frequencies 351

Notes on installation 350

Transmission output (maximum) 351

Tyre inflation compressor

see TREFIT kit

Tyre pressure 337

Checking (tyre pressure monitoring

system) 338

Notes 336

Restarting the tyre pressure monitor-

ing system 339

TREFIT kit 317

Tyre pressure monitoring system

(function) 338

Tyre pressure table 337

Tyre pressure monitor

Function 338

Tyre pressure monitoring system

Checking the tyre pressure 338

Checking the tyre temperature 338

Restarting 339

Tyre pressure table 337

Tyre temperature

Checking (tyre pressure monitoring

system) 338

Tyre pressure monitoring system

(function) 338

Tyre tread 335

Tyres

Changing hub caps 343

Checking 335

Checking the tyre pressure (tyre

pressure monitoring system) 338

Fitting 347

Flat tyre 315

Interchanging 343

MOExtended tyres 3 15

Noise 335

Notes on fitting 339

Removing 346

Replacing 339, 343

Restarting the tyre pressure monitor-

ing system 339

Selection 339

Snow chains 335

Storing 343

TIREFIT kit 317

Tyre pressure (Notes) 336

Tyre pressure monitoring system

(function) 338

Tyre pressure table 337

Unusual handling characteristics ..... 335

U

Unlocking setting 74

Updates

Important system updates 263

USB port

Rear 119

V

Vehicle 151

Activating/deactivating standby

mode 178

Additional door lock 76

Collision detection (parking) 177

Correct use 30

Data acquisition 31

Data storage 31

Diagnostics connection 28

Equipment 22

Implied warranty 31

Locking (automatically) 79

Locking (from inside) 7

Locking (KEYLESS-GO) 7 8

Locking/unlocking (emergency key) ..... 80

Lowering 348

Medical aids 30

Parking up 177

QR code rescue card 31

Qualified specialist workshop 29

Raising 344

REACH regulation 30

Registration 30

Rocking free 166

Standby mode function 177

Starting (emergency operation

mode) 151

Starting (Emotion Start) 151

Starting (Remote Online) 152

Starting (start/stop button) 151

Switching off (start/stop button) ..... 171

Towing 247

Unlocking (from inside) 7

Unlocking (KEYLESS-GO) 7

Ventilating (convenience opening) 87

Vehicle data

Displaying (DYNAMIC SELECT) 164

Maximum speeds 361

Roof load 361

Vehicle height 360

Vehicle length 360

Vehicle width 360

Wheelbase 3 60

Vehicle dimensions 360

Vehicle identification number

see VIN

Vehicle identification plate 352

EU general operating permit number .. 352

Maximum permissible gross vehicle

weight 352

Paint code 352

Permissible axle load 352

VIN 352

Vehicle interior

Cooling or heating (Remote Online) ..... 152

Vehicle key

7 see Key

8 Vehicle maintenance

see ASSYST PLUS

Vehicle tool kit 316

TIREFIT kit 316

Towing eye 330

Ventilating

Convenience opening 87

Ventilation

see Climate control

Vents

see Air vents

VIN 352

Identification plate 352

Seat 352

Windscreen 352

Vision

Demisting windows 141

Windscreen heating 143

W

Warning lamps

see Warning/indicator lamps

Warning system

see ATA (anti-theft alarm system)

Warning triangle

Removing 313

Setting up 314

Warning/indicator lamp

ABS warning lamp 428

Active Brake Assist warning lamp 427

(Ⅰ) Brake system warning lamp (red) 426

(1) Brake system warning lamp (yellow) 425

Coolant warning lamp (red) ..... 422

Coolant warning lamp (yellow) ... 423

DRIFT DRIFT MODE warning lamp 431

(P) Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red) 425

Electrical fault warning lamp ..... 424

Engine diagnosis warning lamp .. 423

Engine operating temperature warning lamp 424

ESP® warning lamp flashes ..... 429

ESP® warning lamp lights up ..... 429

Fuel reserve warning lamp lights up 424

Power steering warning lamp (red) 420

Restraint system warning lamp ... 419

Seat belt warning lamp flashes .. 420

Seat belt warning lamp lights up 420

Suspension warning lamp (yel- low) 4 28

(P) The electric parking brake (yellow) indicator lamp 425

Trailer tow hitch warning lamp .... 421

Tyre pressure monitoring sys- tem warning lamp flashes 432

Tyre pressure monitoring sys- tem warning lamp lights up 432

Warning lamp for distance warning function 427

Warning/indicator lamps 417

Overview 417
PASSENGER AIR BAG 47

Warranty 31

Washer fluid see Windscreen washer fluid

Washing by hand (care) 308

Water tank

see Air-water duct

Weather information 271

Web browsers

Overview (multimedia system) 282

Wheel change

Fitting a new wheel 347

Lowering the vehicle 348

Preparation 343

Raising the vehicle 344

Removing a wheel 346

Removing/fitting hub caps 343

Wheel change

see Emergency spare wheel

Wheel rotation 343

Wheels

Care 310

Changing hub caps 343

Checking 3 3

Checking the tyre pressure (tyre

pressure monitoring system) 338

Fitting 347

Flat tyre 315

Interchanging 343

MOExtended tyres 315

Noise 335

Notes on fitting 339

Removing 346

Replacing 339, 343

Restarting the tyre pressure monitor-

ing system 339

Selection 339

Snow chains 335

Storing 343

TREFIT kit 317

Tyre pressure (Notes) 336

Tyre pressure monitoring system

(function) 338

Tyre pressure table 337

Unusual handling characteristics ..... 335

Wi-Fi

Setting 2 64

Window airbag 42

Windows

see Side windows

Windows (care) 310

Windscreen 132, 139

Demisting 139

Infrared reflective 138

Radio waves 137

Replacing the wiper blades 132

Windscreen

see Windscreen

Windscreen heating 143

Windscreen heating

see Windscreen heating

Windscreen washer fluid 360

Notes 360

Windscreen washer system

Topping up 305

Windscreen wipers

Replacing the wiper blades 132

Switching on/off 132

Winter operation

Snow chains 335

Winter tyres

Setting the permanent speed limit ..... 191

Wiper blades

Care 310

Replacing 132

Index 467

Wireless charging

Function/notes 120

Mobile phone 121

Mobile phone (rear) 122

Wireless vehicle components

Declaration of conformity 24

Specific absorption rate 24

Workout program

Overview 103

Workshop

see Qualified specialist workshop

Publication details

Germany

Internet

Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehicles and about Mercedes-Benz AG can be found on the following websites:

https://www.mercedes-benz.com

https://www.daimler.com

Documentation team

You are welcome to forward any queries or suggestions you may have regarding this Owner's Manual to the technical documentation team at the following address:

Mercedes-Benz AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service, 70546 Stuttgart, Germany

^② Mercedes-Benz AG: Not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from Mercedes-Benz AG.

Vehicle manufacturer

Mercedes-Benz AG

Mercedesstraße 120

70372 Stuttgart

As at 02.04.20

Digital - in the vehicle

Familiarise yourself with the contents of the Owner's Manual directly via the vehicle's multimedia system (menu item "Vehicle information"). Start with the quick guide or broaden your knowledge with practical tips.

Vehicle document wallet

Here you can find comprehensive information about operating your vehicle and about services and guarantees in printed form.

Digital - on the Internet

You can find the Owner's Manual on the Mercedes-Benz home-page.

Digital - as an App

The Mercedes-Benz Guides App is available free-of-charge in familiar App stores.

2905846902Z102

Order no. P290 0200 02 Part no. 290 584 69 02 Z102

Edition ÄJ2020-2a

Apple® iOS

Android™